Peugeot 3008

Handbook
Peugeot 3008
On-line handbook
Select one of the following means of access to view your handbook Scan this code for direct access to your handbook.
on-line...
Find your handbook on the PEUGEOT website, under "MyPEUGEOT".
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for the
care and maintenance of your vehicle.
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest If the "MyPEUGEOT" function is not available on the PEUGEOT
information available, easily identified by the bookmark, associated public website for your country, you can find your handbook at
with this symbol: the following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
Select:
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of
registration of your vehicle.
Welcome
This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole Thank you for choosing a 3008.
range.
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of the equipment described in this This handbook has been designed to help you make the
document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for
most of using your vehicle in all circumstances.
the country in which it is sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation.

Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical
specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this
edition of the handbook.
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on

to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.
Key
safety warning additional information contributes to the protection of the environment

Contents
Overview . Ease of use and comfort

Driving position 88
Lighting and visibility
Exterior lighting control stalk 141
Front seats 90 Direction indicators 144
Steering wheel adjustment 99 Headlamp beam height adjustment 145
.
Mirrors 99 Automatic illumination of headlamps 146
Eco-driving i-Cockpit Amplify function 102 Automatic headlamp dipping 149
Heating and Ventilation 104 Cornering lighting 151
Manual air conditioning 106 Wiper control stalk 152
Semi-automatic mono-zone Automatic rain sensitive wipers 155
air conditioning 108
Instruments Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 111
Digital instrument panel 12 Front demist - defrost 116
Indicator and warning lamps 16 Heated windscreen 117
Indicators 32 Rear screen demist - defrost 118
Manual test 40 Front fittings 119
Distance recorders 41 Courtesy lamps 128 Safety
Lighting dimmer 42 Interior mood lighting 129 General safety recommendations 156
Trip computer 43 Rear seats 130 Hazard warning lamps 157
Monochrome screen C 45 Rear fittings 133 Horn 157
Touch screen 48 Boot fittings 135 Emergency or assistance 158
Boot lamp 140 Electronic stability programme (ESC) 160
Advanced Grip Control 164
Hill Assist Descent Control 166
Seat belts 168
Access Airbags 172
Remote control 54
Child seats 177
Keyless Entry and Starting 58
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 179
Back-up procedures 64
ISOFIX child seats 186
Central locking 68
i-Size child seats 190
Alarm 70
Child lock 193
Doors 74
Boot 75
Hands-free tailgate 76
Electric windows 82
Panoramic opening sunroof 84
Contents
Driving Practical information Technical data

Driving recommendations 195 Fuel tank 281 Petrol engines 338
Starting / Switching off the engine Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 282 Petrol weights 339
with the key 197 Towing a trailer 284 Diesel engines 340
Starting / Switching off the engine Towbar with quickly detachable towball 285 Diesel weights 342
with Keyless Entry and Starting 200 Energy economy mode 290 Dimensions 344
Electric parking brake 203 Very cold climate screens 291 Identification markings 345
Manual gearbox 210 Snow chains 292
Automatic gearbox 211 Fitting roof bars 293
Hill start assist 216 Bonnet 294
Dynamic Pack 217 Petrol underbonnet layout 295
Gear shift indicator 218 Diesel underbonnet layout 296
Stop & Start 219 Checking levels 297
Under-inflation detection
Memorising speeds
223
226
Checks 301
AdBlue and SCR system
Alphabetical index .
Speed limit recognition 227 (BlueHDi Diesel) 303
Speed limiter 231
Cruise control 234
Dynamic cruise control with Stop
function 238
Distance alertandActive Safety Brake 247
Fatigue detection system 252
Lane Departure Warning System 254 For the audio and telematic systems,
In the event of a breakdown
Assisted Lane Departure Warning Warning triangle 307 refer to the supplement to the handbook
System 255
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 308 or go to the following internet address:
Blind Spot Monitoring System 260
Tool kit 309 http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
Parking sensors 263
Temporary puncture repair kit 312
Panoramic vision 265
Spare wheel 317
Park Assist 272
Changing a bulb 323
Changing a fuse 331
12 V battery 332
Towing the vehicle 336
Overview
Exterior Electronic key

Hands-free access
54, 63-67
58-62
Keyless starting 197, 200-202
Remote control key 54, 63-67

Locking / Unlocking 55-57
Starting the engine 197-199 Automatic illumination of
headlamps 146-147
Automatic headlamp dipping 149-150
Heated windscreen 117 Automatic rain sensitive wipers 155
Demisting the windscreen 116 Fatigue detection system 252-253
Windscreen wiper 152-154 Lane Departure Warning System 254
Assisted Lane Departure Warning
System 255-259
Speed limit recognition 227-230
Distance alert / Active Safety
Visiopark 2 265-266, 269-271
Brake 247-251
Towing 336-337
Electric windows 82-83
Very cold climate screens 291

Dynamic cruise control with Doors 74
Stopfunction 238-246 Central locking 68-69
Front parking sensors 263-264 Alarm 70-73
Park Assist 272-279
Main lighting 141, 143-144 Electronic stability programme

Adjusting the headlamp beam (ESC) 160-163
Front foglamps 142 height 145 Advanced Grip Control 164-165
Cornering lighting 151 Changing front bulbs 323-327 Hill Assist Descent Control 166-167
4
Overview .
Exterieur
Defrosting the rear screen 118 Roof bars 293

Rear wiper 153-154 Panoramic opening sunroof 84-87
Door mirrors 99-100
Guide-me-home / welcome
lighting 146-148
Blind Spot Monitoring System 260-262
Changing rear bulbs 328-330
Child lock 193-194

Boot 57, 59, 75
Hands-free tailgate access 76-81
Tools 309-311
Temporary puncture repair kit 312-316
Spare wheel 317-322 Fuel tank 281-283
Misfuel prevention 282
AdBlue tank 303-306
Visiopark 1 & 2 265-271

Rear parking sensors 263-264
Under-inflation detection 223-225
Tyre pressures 223, 315, 345
Towing 336-337 Snow chains 292
Towbar 196, 284
Quickly detachable towball 285-289
Trailer stability assist 163
5
Overview
Interior
Front seats 90-97

Multipoint massage 98
Boot fittings 135-140 Seat belts 168-171 Airbags 172-176
- load space cover
- 12 V socket
- boot lamp
- adjustable boot floor
- lashing eyes
- high load retaining net
Warning triangle 307
Tools 309-311 Front fittings 119-127
Temporary puncture repair kit 312-316 - USB port
Spare wheel 317-322 - 12 V socket
- front armrest
- mats
Wireless charger 122-123
Scented air freshener 125-126
Rear seats 130-132

Rear fittings 133-134
- 12 V socket
- 230 V / 50 Hz socket
- rear armrest Glove box 120
- ski flap Deactivating the passenger's front
Child seats 177-192 airbag 174, 178-181
ISOFIX mountings 186-189
i-Size child seats 190-191
6
Overview .
Instruments and controls
Blind / Panoramic opening
sunroof 84-87
Courtesy lamps 128
Digital instrument panel 12-15
Interior mood lighting 129
Warning lamps 16-31
Emergency or assistance call 158-159
Indicators, gauges 32-40
Seat belts / passenger's front airbag
Setting buttons 40-42 warning lamp display 169-170, 174
- CHECK / trip distance recorder
Rear view mirror 101
- dashboard lighting dimmer/
mood lighting
Monochrome screen C 45-47

Door mirrors 99-100
Touch screen 48-53
Electric windows 82-83
i-Cockpit Amplify function 102-103
Hazard warning lamps 157
Changing a fuse 331

Opening the bonnet 294
Heating / Ventilation 104-105
Manual air conditioning 106-107
Semi-automatic mono-zone air
conditioning 108-110
Automatic dual-zone air
Manual gearbox 210 conditioning 111-115
Automatic gearbox 211-215 Demisting / Defrosting, front 116
Electric parking brake 203-209 Anti-theft / Starting with the START/
STOP button 200-202 Demisting / Defrosting, rear screen 118
Advanced Grip Control 164-165 Heated seats 97
Hill Assist Descent Control 166-167
7
Overview
Instruments and controls

Multifunction steering wheel
Lighting controls 141-144, 146-150
Wiper controls 152-155

Memorising speeds 226 Trip computer 43-44
Speed limit recognition 227-230 Dynamic Pack 217
Speed limiter 231-233
Cruise control 234-237
Dynamic cruise control with
Stop function 238-246
Horn 157
Adjusting the steering wheel 99
Side switch panel
Adjusting the headlamp beam height 145 Alarm volumetric and anti-tilt
Unlocking - Opening / Closing the monitoring 70-73
hands-free tailgate 76-81 Heated windscreen 117
Stop & Start 219-222 Electric child lock 194
8
Overview .
Technical data - Maintenance
Petrol engines 338-339

Diesel engines 340-343
Dimensions 344
Running out of Diesel fuel 308
Identification markings 345
Battery 332-335
Energy economy mode 290
AdBlue 37-40
Checking levels 297-300 Changing a fuse 331

- oil
- brake fluid
- coolant
- screenwash fluid
- additive (Diesel with particle filter)
Checking components 301-302
- battery
- air filter / passenger
compartment filter
Changing bulbs 323-330 - oil filter
- front - particle filter (Diesel)
- rear - brake pads / discs
Bonnet 294
Petrol underbonnet 295
Diesel underbonnet 296
9
Eco-driving
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox Control the use of your electrical
equipment
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it
During acceleration change up early. by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents
open.
With an automatic gearbox, give preference to automatic mode and
Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the
avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
The gear efficiency indicator invites you to engage the most suitable Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as
gear: as soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, soon as the desired temperature is attained.
follow it straight away. Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.
For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, this indicator appears Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
only in manual mode.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the ambient light
level does not require their use.
Drive smoothly
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO2
emissions and also help reduce the background traffic noise. As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices
(film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds
Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
10
Eco-driving .
Limit the causes of excess consumption Observe the recommendations on

maintenance
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in
bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats. the door aperture, driver's side.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof Carry out this check in particular:
bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference. - before a long journey,
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. - at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter,
passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of
operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle
becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay to have the emissions of nitrogen oxides brought back to
the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to
avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to
a consistent average.
11
Instruments
Head-up digital screen

Personalisable digital instrument panel
Depending on the display mode selected, some information can be hidden or represented differently.
Digital screen Control buttons

The representation below shows the "DIALS" 5. Cruise control or speed limiter setting, A. Lighting dimmer for the instruments and
display mode. display of speed limit signs. controls* (available in night mode).
1. Fuel gauge. 6. Rev counter (x 1000 rpm or tr/min). or
2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). 7. Coolant temperature gauge (Celsius). Instrument panel mood lighting**.
3. Gear shift indicator, selector mode and the 8. Trip distance recorder (miles or km). B. Short press: start a manual test.
gear with an automatic gearbox. 9. Total distance recorder (miles or km). Long press: reset the service indicator or
4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). trip recorder (depending on the context).
* Versions with monochrome screen.

** Versions with touch screen.
12
Instruments
Displays Personalisation of the

1
Most warning and indicator lamps do not have
instrument panel
Optional information You can modify the appearance of the
a fixed position.
Depending on the display mode selected and instrument panel, by choosing:
The warning and indicator lamps in the second
the systems activated, the following information - a display colour**,
line are displayed from right to left in order of
may appear: - a display mode.
priority.
- the rev counter,
For certain functions that have indicator lamps
- the trip computer, Display language
for both operation and for deactivation, there is
- driving aids, This depends on the language selected
only one dedicated location.
- the speed limiter or cruise control, in the screen configuration menu.
- the media currently playing,
Permanent information - navigation instructions,
- engine information from the Dynamic Pack. Choosing a display colour
Whatever the display mode selected, the This depends on the colour scheme activated
instrument panel displays: by the i-Cockpit Amplify function:
- in fixed locations: F "Relax": grey,
gearbox and gear shift indicator F "Boost": red,
information, F "Normal" (no colour scheme activated):
the fuel gauge, blue.
the engine coolant temperature indicator, For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify
the distance recorders. function, refer to the corresponding section.
- in variable locations:
the digital speedometer,
status or alert messages displayed
temporarily.

13
Instruments
Choice of display mode Each mode corresponds to the type of - "MINIMAL": reduced display with the digital
information displayed in the instrument panel. speedometer and the distance recorders
- "DIALS": standard display of the analogue and, in the event of an alert only, fuel
and digital speedometers, rev counter, fuel gauge and coolant temperature indicator.
gauge, coolant temperature indicator and
distance recorders.
- "TRIP COMPUTER"*: minimal display with

in addition the rev counter, instantaneous
information and the trip recorder selected
- "NAVIGATION": standard display with in (1 or 2).
addition information related to the current or
route navigation (map and instructions). - "PERSONAL"**: minimal display with in
To modify the display mode of the instrument addition the selection made in the touch
panel: screen of the type of information displayed
F turn the thumbwheel on the left of the - "DRIVING": standard display with in in the personalisable areas on the left and
steering wheel to display and run through addition information related to the driving right.
the different modes in the right hand part of assistance system in use.
the instrument panel,
F once the desired display mode appears,
press the thumbwheel to confirm.
The new display mode is applied immediately.
* Versions with monochrome screen.

14
Instruments
To enter settings for the "PERSONAL" F for each personalised area, left and right, F a nominal preview appears alongside the
display mode and select the information to be select a type of information using the corresponding arrows,
displayed in the personalisable areas of the corresponding scroll arrows in the touch F confirm to save and quit.
instrument panel: screen: If the current display mode is "PERSONAL", the
"Driving aids", new selection is displayed immediately.
F select the Settings menu in the "Default" (empty),
upper bar of the touch screen, "Engine info" (Dynamic Pack),
"G-meters" (Dynamic Pack),
"Temperatures" (engine oil), As a safety measure, these adjustments should
F select "Configuration",
"Media", be carried out with the vehicle stationary.
F press the "Perso" button, "Navigation",
"Trip computer",
"Rev counter".
15
Instruments
Indicator and warning lamps
When the ignition is switched on Associated warnings

Certain warning lamps come on in the The illumination of most of these warning lamps
Certain warning lamps may come on in
instrument panel for a few seconds when the is accompanied by the display of a message
one of two modes: fixed (continuous) or
ignition is switched on. and an audible signal.
flashing.
When the engine is started, these same
Only by relating the type of illumination
warning lamps should go off.
to the operation of the vehicle can it
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
be determined whether the situation is
information on the warning lamp concerned.
normal or a fault has occurred.
For more information, refer to the
corresponding tables of warning and
indicator lamps.
16
Instruments
Operation indicator lamps

If one or more of the following indicator lamps come on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched on.
1
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk has been pushed
direction indicator down.
Right-hand flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk has been pushed
direction indicator up.
Hazard warning flashing with audible The hazard warning lamps switch, The left-hand and right-hand direction indicators and
lamps signal. located on the dashboard, has been their associated indicator lamps flash simultaneously.
operated.
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the

"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped

headlamps beam headlamps" position.
Main beam fixed. The lighting stalk has been pulled Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
headlamps towards you.
Automatic fixed. The function has been activated The camera, located at the top of the windscreen,
headlamp via the Driving menu of the touch manages the illumination of main or dipped beam,
+ dipping screen. depending on the exterior lighting and the driving
The lighting stalk is in the "AUTO" conditions.
or position. For more information on Automatic headlamp
dipping, refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on the Lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
17
Instruments
Rear foglamps fixed. The rear foglamps have been Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearwards to
switched on using the ring on the switch off the rear foglamps.
lighting control stalk.
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward
using the ring on the lighting control twice to switch off the front foglamps.
stalk.
Diesel engine fixed. When the ignition is switched on The period of illumination of the indicator lamp is
pre-heating with a key in the ignition switch or determined by the ambient conditions (up to about
a starting instruction made using thirty seconds in severe winter conditions).
the"START/STOP" button, the With an ignition switch and key, wait until the indicator
engine temperature makes engine lamp goes off before starting.
pre-heating necessary. With Keyless Entry and Starting, once it goes off,
starting is immediate, on condition that the brake
pedal remains pressed with an automatic gearbox, or
the clutch pedal is pressed fully down with a manual
gearbox.
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the indicator lamp goes off again,
then start the engine.
Stop & Start fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffic The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
jams,...) the Stop & Start system has put automatically in START mode, as soon as you want
the engine into STOP mode. to move off.
flashes for a few STOP mode is temporarily For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
seconds, then goes unavailable, corresponding section.
off. or
START mode is invoked
automatically.
18
Instruments
Warning / indicator lamp
Electric parking
State
fixed.
Cause
The electric parking brake is applied.

Action / Observations
Release the parking brake to switch off the warning

1
brake lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, briefly push
the parking brake control lever.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the Electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Deactivation of fixed. The "automatic application" (on Activate the function again or contact a PEUGEOT
the automatic switching off the engine) and dealer or a qualified workshop in the event of a fault.
functions of the "automatic release" functions are For more information on the Electric parking brake,
electric parking deactivated or faulty. refer to the corresponding section.
brake
Passenger's fixed in the seat belt The control switch, located in the In this case, do not install a rearward facing child seat
airbag system and passenger's front glove box, has been placed in the on this seat.
airbag warning lamps "ON" position. Move the control switch to the "OFF" position to
display. The passenger's front airbag is deactivate the passenger's front airbag. In this case,
activated. you can install a rearward facing child seat, unless
there is a fault with the airbags (airbag warning
lampon).
19
Instruments
Hill Assist fixed. The system has been activated, but Between 18 and 30 mph (30 and 50 km/h), the system
Descent Control is paused because the speed is too is paused.
high. Reduce the speed of the vehicle.
fixed. The system has been activated, but

the conditions for regulation are not
met (gradient, gear engaged).
flashing. The system is regulating the speed of The vehicle is being braked; the brake lamps come on
the vehicle. during the descent.
For more information on the Hill Assist Descent
Control system, refer to the corresponding section.
Blind Spot fixed. The system has been activated. For more information on the Blind Spot Monitoring
Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding section.
System
Automatic fixed. The wiper control stalk has been To deactivate automatic wiping, push the wiper control
wiping pushed down. stalk down again or put the wiper control stalk in
Automatic front wiping is activated. another position.
20
Instruments
Deactivation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This may be accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal.
1
Passenger's fixed in the instrument The control switch, located in the You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless
airbag system panel and/or seat belt glove box, is set to the OFF position. there is a fault with the airbags (airbag warning lamp
and front passenger's The passenger's front airbag is on).
airbag warning lamps deactivated. Set the control to the "ON" position to activate the
display. passenger's front airbag. In this case, do not install a
rearward facing child seat on this seat.
Stop & Start fixed, accompanied The Stop & Start system is The engine will not cut out at the next stop in the
by the display of a deactivated. traffic.
message. Reactivate the system by pressing the button again.
For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
corresponding section.
Distance alert / fixed, accompanied by The system has been deactivated, For more information on the Distance alert / Active
Active Safety a message. via the vehicle configuration menu in Safety Brake system, refer to the corresponding
Brake the screen. section.
Assisted Lane fixed, accompanied The system has been deactivated. There will be no correction of the vehicle's trajectory
Departure by the display of a should there be a change of direction.
Warning System message. For more information on the Assisted Lane
Departure Warning System, refer to the
21
Instruments
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, illumination of one or more of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires
action on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further using the associated alert message.
If you encounter any problems, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
STOP fixed, associated with Illumination of this warning lamp You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
another warning lamp, is related to a serious fault with Park, switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT
accompanied by the the engine, braking system, power dealer or a qualified workshop.
display of a message steering, automatic gearbox or a
and an audible signal. major electrical fault.
22
Instruments
Service
State
temporarily,
Cause
One or more minor faults for which

Identify the cause of the fault using the message

1
accompanied by the there is no specific warning lamp displayed in the instrument panel.
or display of a message. have been detected. You can deal with some problems yourself, such as a
door open or the start of saturation of the particle filter
(as soon as the traffic conditions allow, regenerate the
filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph
(60 km/h), until the warning lamp goes off).
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under inflation detection system, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, accompanied One or more major faults for which Identify the cause of the fault using the message
by the display of a there is no specific warning lamp displayed in the instrument panel; you must then
message. have been detected. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated with the The servicing interval has been Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
flashing and then fixed exceeded. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
display of the service
indicator spanner.
Maximum fixed. The temperature of the cooling Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
coolant system is too high. Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping-
temperature up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
qualified workshop.
23
Instruments
Engine oil fixed. There is a fault with the engine You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
pressure lubrication system. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
Battery charge* fixed. The battery charging circuit has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or started.
cut alternator belt, ...). If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Door(s) open fixed, associated with Speed below 6 mph (10 km/h), a door Close the door or boot.
a message identifying or the boot is not properly closed.
the door.
fixed, associated with Speed above 6 mph (10 km/h), a door

a message identifying or the boot is not properly closed.
the door, together with
an audible signal.
* Depending on the country of sale.
24
Instruments
Seat belts
State
fixed.
Cause
The driver and/or the front/rear

Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

1
not fastened / passenger has not fastened or has The illuminated dots represent the passengers that
unfastened unfastened their seat belt. have not fastened / unfastened their seat belt.
They come on:
- fixed for 30 about seconds on starting the vehicle,
- fixed from 0 to 12 mph (0 to 20 km/h) when
driving,
- flashing above 12 mph (20 km/h), accompanied by
an audible signal for about 120 seconds.
Electric parking flashing. The electric parking brake is not You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
brake applied automatically. Park on flat level ground, engage a gear
The application/release is faulty. (selectPmode for an automatic gearbox), switch
off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
brake fault without delay.
For more information on the Electric parking brake,
Anti-lock fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Braking System fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
(ABS) PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
25
Instruments
Brakes fixed. A minor fault with the braking system. Drive carefully.
As soon as possible, have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
significantly. Top-up with brake fluid listed by PEUGEOT.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
+ fixed, associated The electronic brake force distribution You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
with the ABS warning (EBFD) system has a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
lamp. workshop.
Dynamic flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is The system optimises traction and improves the
stability control operating. directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
(DSC/ASR) grip or trajectory.
fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Distance alert/ flashing. The system is operating. The system brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed
Active Safety of collision with the vehicle ahead.
Brake
fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
by a message and an qualified workshop.
audible signal.
26
Instruments
Lane Departure
State
flashing, accompanied
Cause
A lane marking has been crossed on

Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction to

1
Warning System by an audible signal. the left or right. return to the correct trajectory.
For more information on the Lane Departure
Warning System, refer to the corresponding section.
fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Be vigilant and drive carefully.
by the display of a Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
message. qualified workshop.
Assisted Lane fixed. The system is not available The system has been deactivated or is on automatic
Departure standby.
Warning System For more information on the Assisted Lane Departure
Warning System, refer to the corresponding section.
flashing. You are about to cross a solid lane The system is activated, then corrects the trajectory
marking without operating the on the side of the lane marking detected.
direction indicators.
+ fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Be vigilant and drive carefully.
by the display of a Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
message, an audible qualified workshop.
signal and the Service For more information on the Assisted Lane
warning lamp. Departure Warning System, refer to the
27
Instruments
Airbags on temporarily. This warning lamp comes on for a This warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
few seconds when you turn on the If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
ignition, then goes off. qualified workshop.
fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
pretensioner systems has a fault. qualified workshop.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
is too low. This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed, The tyre pressure monitoring system Under-inflation detection is not assured.
accompanied by the has a fault or no sensor is detected Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
Service warning lamp. on one of the wheels. qualified workshop.
28
Instruments
Low fuel level

State
fixed with reserve

Cause
When it first comes on there remains

You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running

1
level represented in approximately 6 litres of fuel in the out of fuel.
red, accompanied tank. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition
by the display of a is switched on, accompanied by a message and an
message and an audible signal, until a sufficient addition of fuel is
audible signal. made.
This audible signal and message are repeated with
increasing frequency as the fuel level drops and
approaches "0".
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 53 litres.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as
this could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
Engine flashing. The engine management system has Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
autodiagnosis a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
system workshop.
fixed. The emission control system has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
fault. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
29
Instruments
AdBlue fixed, on switching The remaining driving range is Have the AdBlue topped-up as soon as possible: go
(BlueHDi Diesel) on the ignition, between 350 miles (600 km) and to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
accompanied by an 1500 miles (2400 km). You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue to its tank.
audible signal and a
message indicating the
remaining driving range.
flashing, accompanied The remaining driving range is You must top-up the AdBlue to avoid a breakdown
by an audible signal between 0 and 350 miles (600 km). or go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
and a message You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue to its tank.
indicating the
remaining driving
range.
flashing, accompanied The AdBlue tank is empty: the To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the
by an audible signal starting inhibition system required AdBlue or go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
and a message by legislation prevents starting of the workshop.
indicating that starting engine. It is essential to add at least 4 litres of AdBlue to its
is prevented. tank.
For topping-up or for more information on AdBlue and the SCR system, refer to the corresponding section.
30
Instruments
SCR emissions
State
fixed, on switching on
Cause
A fault with the SCR emissions

This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions

1
control system the ignition, associated control system has been detected. return to normal levels.
+ (BlueHDi Diesel) with the Service and
engine diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied by
+ an audible signal and a
message.
flashing, on switching on After confirmation of the fault with the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
the ignition, associated emissions control system, you can workshop without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
with the Service and drive for up to 650 miles (1 100 km)
engine diagnostic warning before the engine starting inhibition
lamps, accompanied by system is triggered.
an audible signal and a
message indicating the
remaining driving range.
flashing, on switching on You have exceeded the authorised To be able to start the engine, you must call on a
the ignition, associated driving limit following confirmation PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
with the Service and of a fault with the emissions control
engine diagnostic warning system: the engine starting inhibition
lamps, accompanied by system prevents starting of the
an audible signal and a engine.
message.
31
Instruments
Indicators
Coolant temperature gauge
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine.
After first switching off the ignition,

open the bonnet cautiously and check
the coolant level.
With the engine running: For more information on Checking

- in zone A, the temperature is correct, levels, refer to the corresponding
- in zone B, the temperature is too high; section.
this warning lamp and the central STOP
warning lamp come on, accompanied by
the display of a message and an audible
signal.
32
Instruments
Service indicator
1
System which informs the driver when the Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
next service is due, in accordance with the 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain remain before the next service is due
manufacturer's service schedule. before the next service is due When the ignition is switched on, the system
The point at which the service is due is
When the ignition is switched on, the system issues issues an alert to indicate that the next service
calculated from the last reset of the service
an alert to indicate when the next service is due. is due very soon.
indicator, according to the mileage covered and
This alert comprises the temporary display of a This alert comprises the temporary display of a
the time elapsed since the last service.
message in the instrument panel, accompanied message in the instrument panel, accompanied
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, depending on the
by the permanent display of the servicing spanner by the flashing and then fixed display of the
country of sale, the degree of deterioration of
alongside the total distance recorder. servicing spanner alongside the total mileage
the engine oil may also be taken into account.
Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) or 9 months recorder.
remain before the next service is due. Example: 560 miles (900 km) or 2 months
remain before the next service is due.
The servicing spanner remains on as a

reminder that a service is required soon. The servicing spanner remains on as a
reminder that a service is required very soon.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)

remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service
information is displayed automatically in the
instrument panel.
33
Instruments
Service overdue
When the ignition is switched on, the system
issues an alert to indicate that the next service The alert may be triggered if you
is overdue. have exceeded the period since
This alert comprises the temporary display of a the last service, as indicated in the
message in the instrument panel, accompanied manufacturer's service schedule.
by the flashing and then fixed display of the For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the alert
servicing spanner alongside the total mileage may also be triggered early, depending
recorder. on the degree of deterioration of the
Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles engine oil, which depends on the driving
(300 km). conditions in which the vehicle is used.
The servicing spanner remains on until the

service has been carried out.
With BlueHDi Diesel versions, when

the ignition is switched on, this alert
is completed by the fixed illumination
of this warning lamp.
34
Instruments
Resetting the service indicator If you have to disconnect the battery Retrieving the service
following this operation, lock the vehicle information
After each service, the service indicator must and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset You can access the service information at any
be reset to zero. to be registered. time.
If you have carried out the service on your F Press the trip distance recorder reset
vehicle yourself: button.
F switch off the ignition, The service information is displayed for a
F press and hold the trip distance recorder few seconds, then disappears.
reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.
35
Instruments
Engine oil level indicator*
Oil level correct Oil level indicator fault

This is signalled by the display of the message
"Oil level measurement invalid" in the
instrument panel.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
On versions fitted with an electric oil level Oil level incorrect

indicator, the state of the engine oil level is
displayed in the instrument panel for a few This is indicated by the display of the message
In the event of a fault with the electric
seconds, after the servicing information. "Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel
indicator, the oil level is no longer
screen, accompanied by the service warning
monitored.
lamp and an audible signal.
If the system is faulty, you must check
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
the engine oil level using the manual
The level read will only be correct if the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
dipstick located under the bonnet.
the vehicle is on level ground and the avoid damage to the engine.
For more information on Checking
engine has been off for more than For more information on Checking levels,
levels, refer to the corresponding
30minutes. refer to the corresponding section.
section.
* Depending on version.
36
Instruments

AdBlue range indicators
1
These range indicators are present only on In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue
BlueHDi Diesel versions.
Once the AdBlue tank is on reserve or after
Remaining range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions The engine start prevention system
control system, when the ignition is switched required by regulations is activated
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the automatically once the AdBlue tank is
distance that can be covered, the range, before empty.
engine starting is prevented.
When switching on the ignition, there is no

automatic display of range in the instrument
panel.
Pressing this button will temporarily
display the remaining range with the
message "AdBlue: range greater than
1 500 miles" and, depending on the level in the
AdBlue tank, followed by a message indicating
that you can top-up with at least 10 litres.
37
Instruments
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km) Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km) Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
When switching on the ignition, the AdBlue When switching on the ignition, the AdBlue
warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an
audible signal and the display of a message audible signal and the display of the message
(e.g. "Top-up AdBlue: Starting impossible in "Top-up AdBlue: Starting impossible".
150 miles") indicating the remaining range The AdBlue tank is empty: the system required
expressed in miles or kilometres. by regulations prevents engine starting.
When switching on the ignition, the When driving, the message is displayed every
AdBluewarning lamp comes on, accompanied 30 seconds until the AdBlue tank has been
by an audible signal and the display of a message topped-up.
(e.g. "Top-up AdBlue: Starting impossible in It is essential to top-up as soon as possible and To be able to start the engine, it is
900miles") indicating the remaining range before the tank is completely empty; otherwise essential to add at least 4 litres of
expressed in miles or kilometres. it will not be possible to restart the engine after AdBlue to its tank.
When driving, the message is displayed every the next stop.
190 miles (300 km) until the AdBlue tank has
been topped-up. For more information on AdBlue and the
The reserve level has been reached: it is SCR system, and topping-up in particular,
recommended that you top-up as soon as refer to the corresponding section.
possible.
These messages are completed by the

recommendation to not top-up by more than
10 litres of AdBlue.
38
Instruments
In the event of a fault with the SCR emissions control system

1
A system that prevents engine starting is activated automatically from 650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In the event of the detection of a fault During an authorised driving phase (between
650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
While driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system
persists.
The AdBlue, SERVICE and self-diagnostic The alert is repeated when switching on the
warning lamps comes on, accompanied by an ignition.
audible signal and the display of the message You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
"Emissions fault". qualified workshop as soon as possible.
The alert is triggered when driving when the Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your
fault is detected for the first time, then when engine.
switching on the ignition for subsequent
journeys, while the fault persists.
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed

If it is a temporary fault, the alert (after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the
disappears during the next journey, permanent display of the message signalling
after self-diagnosis of the SCR system. a fault), the SERVICE and engine diagnostic
warning lamps come on and the AdBlue
warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an
audible signal and the display of a message
(e.g.: "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in
150 miles") indicating the remaining range
express in miles or kilometres.
39
Instruments
Manual test in the

instrument panel
Starting prevented
This function allows you, at any time, to check The following information is displayed in the
certain indicators and display the alerts log. instrument panel:
- the engine oil level,
- when the next service is due,
Every time the ignition is switched on, the SERVICE
F With the engine running, briefly press this - the driving range for the AdBlue and the
and engine diagnostic warning lamps come on and
button. SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel versions,
the AdBlue warning lamp flashes, accompanied by
- current alerts.
an audible signal and the display of the message
"Emissions fault: Starting prevented".
You have exceeded the authorised

driving limit: the starting prevention This information is also displayed
system inhibits engine starting. automatically every time the ignition is
switched on.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
40
Instruments
Distance recorders
1
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
When travelling abroad, you may

have to change the units of distance:
the display of road speed must be in
the official units (miles or km) for the
country.
The change of units is done via the
screen configuration menu, with the Total distance recorder Trip distance recorder
vehicle stationary. It measures the total distance travelled by the It measures the distance travelled since it was
vehicle since its first registration. reset by the driver.
Resetting the trip recorder
F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
41
Instruments
Instrument panel lighting

dimmer
F When the lighting reaches the maximum
setting, release the button, then press it
again to decrease brightness.
F Release the button once the desired level
of brightness is reached.
Instrument panel mood

lighting The brightness of the instrument panel mood
lighting is adjusted in the touch screen.
Version with monochrome screen Version with touch screen
Operates only when the vehicle's exterior It allows the instrument panel mood lighting to F Select the Settings menu in the
lighting is on ("night" mode). be switched on or off. upper bar of the touch screen.
It allows adjustment of the brightness of the
F Press this button.
instrument panel and controls.
F Press the "Brightness" button.
F Press this button to adjust the
brightness.
F When the lighting reaches the F Adjust the brightness by pressing the
minimum setting, release the arrows or moving the cursor.
button, then press it again to F Confirm to save and quit.
increase brightness.
or
42
Instruments
Trip computer
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption).
1
Information display in the Trip reset
instrument panel
F Press the button on the end of the wiper

control stalk to display the various tabs in
succession.
F When the desired trip is displayed, press
the button on the end of the wiper control
The display of trip computer information - The current information tab with: stalk for more than two seconds.
is permanent when you select the "TRIP the range, Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
COMPUTER" or "PERSONAL" display mode. the current fuel consumption, is identical.
For all other display modes, pressing the end the Stop & Start time counter. For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
of the wiper stalk displays this information in a - Trip "1" with: figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
new window. the average speed.
the average fuel consumption,
the distance travelled,
for the first trip.
- Trip "2" with:
the average speed,
the average fuel consumption,
the distance travelled,
for the second trip.
43
Instruments
A few definitions
Range Current fuel consumption Distance travelled
(miles or km) (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) (miles or km)
The distance which can still be travelled with Calculated over the last few seconds. Calculated since the last trip computer reset.
the fuel remaining in the tank (at the average
fuel consumption seen over the last few miles
(kilometres) travelled).
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
This value may vary following a change

in the style of driving or the relief,
resulting in a significant change in the Average fuel consumption Stop & Start time counter
current fuel consumption. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) (minutes / seconds or hours /
minutes)
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), Calculated since the last trip computer reset.
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time
dashes are displayed. counter calculates the time spent in STOP
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the mode during a journey.
range is recalculated and is displayed if it It resets to zero every time the ignition is
exceeds 60 miles (100 km). Average speed switched on.
(mph or km/h)
If dashes are displayed continuously
while driving in place of the digits,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a Calculated since the last trip computer reset.
qualified workshop.
44
Instruments
Monochrome screen C
Displays in the screen Controls Main menu
1
F Press the "MENU" button:

- "Multimedia",
- "Telephone",
- "Connections",
- "Personalisation-configuration",
Depending on the context, it displays: From the audio system control panel, press: F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the
- time, F the "MENU" button for access to the main menu required, then confirm by pressing
- date, menu, the "OK" button.
- ambient temperature (this flashes if there is F the "5" or "6" buttons to scroll through the
a risk of ice), items in the screen, "Multimedia" menu
- visual parking sensor information, F the "7" or "8" buttons to change a setting
- current audio source, value,
- telephone or Bluetooth system information, F the "OK" button to confirm, With the audio system switched on, this
- settings menus for the screen and the or menu allows you to activate or deactivate the
vehicle equipment. F the "Back" button to abandon the functions associated with use of the radio
operation in progress. (Frequency search (RDS), DAB/FM auto
tracking, RadioText (TXT) display) or to choose
the media play mode (Normal, Random,
Random all, Repeat).
For more information on the "Multimedia"
application, refer to the "Audio equipment and
telematics" section.
45
Instruments
"Telephone" menu "Personalisation-configuration" menu
With the audio system switched on, this menu This menu gives access to the following - "Comfort":
allows you to make a call, view the calls log or functions: "Rear wipe in reverse gear".
the various telephone directories. - "Define the vehicle parameters", For more information on the Wipers,
For more information on the "Telephone" - "Choice of language", refer to the "Lighting and visibility"
application, refer to the "Audio equipment and - "Display configuration", section.
telematics" section. "Parking assistance".
Define the vehicle parameters For more information on Parking
assistance, refer to the "Driving"
This menu allows the activation or deactivation section.
of the following equipment, depending on "Fatigue Detection System".
version: For more information on the Fatigue
- "Lighting": detection system, refer to the "Driving"
"Follow-me-home headlamps". section.
"Welcome lighting".
"Connections" menu For more information on Exterior lighting, - "Driving assistance":
refer to the "Lighting and visibility" section. "Auto. emergency braking".
For more information on the Active
With the audio system on, this menu allows Safety Brake, refer to the "Driving"
a Bluetooth device (telephone, media player) section.
- "Access to the vehicle":
"Speed recommendation".
to be paired and the connection mode to be "Plip action".
defined (hands-free, playing audio files). For more information on Speed limit
For more information on the Remote control
For more information on the "Connections" recognition, refer to the "Driving"
and selective door unlocking in particular, refer
application, refer to the "Audio equipment and section.
to the "Access" section.
telematics" section. "Tyre inflation".
For more information on Under-
inflation detection and reinitialisation in
particular, refer to the "Driving" section.
46
Instruments
1
Choice of language
This menu allows selection of the language Adjusting the date and time
used by the screen and the instrument" panel. F Press the "7" or "8" button to display
the "Display configuration" menu, then
press"OK".
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the
"Date and time adjustment" button, then
Display configuration press "OK".
This menu gives access to the following F Press the "7" or "8" button to select
settings: the setting to modify. Confirm by
- "Choice of units", pressing"OK", then modify the setting and
- "Date and time adjustment", confirm again to save the modification.
- "Display parameters", F Adjust the settings one by one, confirming
- "Brightness". with the "OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button, then the
"OK"button to select the "OK" box and
confirm or the "Back" button to cancel.
As a safety measure, the driver must

only carry out operations that require
sustained attention when stationary.
47
Instruments
Touch screen
This system gives access to: General operation
- the permanent display of the time and
the ambient temperature (a blue symbol Recommendations Principles
appears when there is a risk of ice), This screen is of the capacitive type. Use the buttons below the touch screen for
- the heating/air conditioning controls, Use is possible in all temperatures. access to the menus, then press the virtual
- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle Do not use pointed objects on the touch buttons in the touch screen.
functions and systems, screen. Certain menus may be displayed over two
- audio system and telephone controls and Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. pages. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
the display of associated information, Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch the second page.
- the display of visual parking aids (visual screen. To deactivate or activate a function,
parking sensor information, Park Assist, ...), select"OFF" or "ON".
- Internet services, and the display of To modify a setting or access additional
associated information. information, press the symbol for the function.
As a safety measure, the driver After a few moments with no action

and, depending on equipment, allows: should only carry out operations on the second page, the first page is
- access to the navigation system controls that require close attention with the displayed automatically.
and the display of associated information. vehicle stationary.
Some functions are not accessible
when driving. Use this button to confirm.
For the audio and telematic systems, Use this button to return to the
refer to the supplement to the handbook previous page.
or go to the following internet address:
48
Instruments
Menus
1
Connected navigation or Mirror Volume / mute.
Screen*. See more in "Audio equipment and
See more information in "Audio telematics".
equipment and telematics".
Driving. Upper bar

Allows the activation, deactivation and Certain information is always displayed in the
adjustment of settings for certain functions. upper bar of the touch screen:
The functions accessible from this menu are - Repeat of the air conditioning information,
arranged under two tabs: "Settings" and and direct access to the corresponding
"Driving assistance". menu.
- Repeat of information from the Radio
i-Cockpit Amplify function. Media, Telephone menus and navigation
Allows a vehicle ambience to be Telephone.
instructions*.
personalised. See more in "Audio equipment and
- Access to Configuration of the touch
For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify telematics".
screen and the digital instrument panel.
function, refer to the corresponding section.
Applications.
Radio Media. Allows direct access to certain
See more information in "Audio i-Cockpit Amplify functions
equipment and telematics". (scented air freshener...).
Air conditioning.
For more information on the Scented air
Allows control of the settings for
freshener, refer to the corresponding section.
temperature, air flow...
See more information in "Audio equipment and
For more information on Semi-automatic telematics".
mono-zone air conditioning and Automatic
dual-zone air conditioning, refer to the
corresponding sections. * Depending on equipment.
49
Instruments
Driving menu
"Settings" tab
Button Comments
"Lighting" - "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of cornering lighting.

- "LED daytime running lamps" (depending on the country of sale).
"Vehicle access" - "Driver plip action": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking of the driver's door.
- "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking at the tailgate.
- "Motorized tailgate": activation/deactivation of motorized operation of the tailgate.
- "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation of the hands-free tailgate access system.
"Comfort" - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the rear wiper coupled with reverse gear.
- "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of automatic guide-me-home lighting.
- "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior welcome lighting.
- "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of mood lighting and adjustment of brightness.
- "Auto mirror dipping in reverse": activation/deactivation of automatic dipping of door mirrors in reverse gear.
"Safety" - "Collision risk alert and automatic braking": activation/deactivation of collision risk alert and automatic emergency
braking.
- "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of speed limit recognition.
- "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of the driver fatigue detection system.
For more information on one of these functions, refer to the corresponding section.
50
Instruments
"Driving assistance" tab

1
Corresponding function "Comments"
"Speed settings" Memorisation of speed settings for the speed limiter or cruise control.
"Under-inflation initialization" Reinitialization of the under-inflation detection system.
"Lane departure detection assistance." Activation/deactivation of the function.
"Help staying in lane" Activation/deactivation of the function.
Parking sensors Activation/deactivation of the function.
"Park Assist" Activation/deactivation of the function.
"Automatic headlamp dip" Activation/deactivation of the function.
"Stop & Start" Activation/deactivation of the function.
"Blind spot monitoring" Activation/deactivation of the function.
"Panoramic visual aid" Activation of the Visiopark 2 function.
"Wheel anti-slip regulation" Activation/deactivation of the function
For more information on one of these functions, refer to the corresponding section.
51
Instruments
Configuration
The functions available through this menu are detailed in the table below.
Button Comments
Turn off the screen (black screen).

To return to the current screen, press the black screen or one of the menu buttons.
Adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel mood lighting.
Choice and settings for three user profiles.
Settings for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel...
Activation and adjustment of Wi-Fi settings.
52
Instruments
Settings
1
The settings possible for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel are presented in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Screen configuration Adjustment of the display settings (scrolling of text, animations...) and brightness.
Instrument panel perso Select the type of information displayed in the digital instrument panel.
System configuration Choice of units:

- temperature (Celsius or Fahrenheit)
- distance and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Languages Choice of language used for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel.
Time / Date Setting the time, date and format.

Option of synchronisation with GPS.
53
Access
Remote control
General points
Ejecting the key
Version without Keyless Entry and Starting

F Press this button; the key is ejected from its
The remote control can be used for the The key, integral with the remote control, can
housing.
following functions, depending on version: be used for the following functions, depending
To avoid damaging the mechanism, first press
- unlocking / locking / deadlocking the on version:
this button to fold it.
vehicle, - unlocking / locking / deadlocking the
- unlocking and opening the boot, vehicle,
- switch on the lighting from a distance, - turning the child lock on or off,
- folding / unfolding the door mirrors, - activation / deactivation of the passenger's
- activation / deactivation of the alarm, front airbag,
- opening the windows, - back-up door locking,
- closing the windows and the opening roof, - switching on the ignition and starting /
- locating the vehicle, stopping the engine.
- vehicle immobiliser.
Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be
In normal operating conditions, it is preferable
locked or unlocked in the event of a failure Version with Keyless Entry and Starting
to use the remote control.
of the remote control, the central locking, F Pull on this button to remove the key from
thebattery... the housing.
For more information on the Back-up To return it to the housing, first pull on this
procedures, refer to the corresponding button.
section.
54
Access
2
Unlocking the vehicle Locking the vehicle
Total unlocking Normal locking
F Press this button. Opening the windows F Press this button.
Depending on version, pressing and

holding the unlocking buttons opens
the windows to the desired position. On pressing the locking button, illumination
Selective unlocking of the of the direction indicators for a few seconds
driver's door signals:
The windows stop when you release the button. - locking of the vehicle for versions without
Setting is via the vehicle configuration menu in
alarm,
the screen.
- activation of the alarm for other versions.
F To unlock just the driver's door, Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
make a first press on this button.
F To unlock the other doors and
the boot, press this button again.
If one of the doors or the boot is not
fully closed, the locking does not take
place. However, if your vehicle has an
On the first press of the locking button, flashing alarm, this will be totally activated after
of the direction indicators for a few seconds about 45 seconds.
signals: If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
- total or selective unlocking of the vehicle and there is then no action on the doors
for versions without alarm, or boot, the vehicle will automatically
- deactivation of the alarm for other versions. The folding and unfolding of the door lock itself again after about 30 seconds.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. mirrors with the remote control can be If the alarm had been previously
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a activated, it will be reactivated
qualified workshop. automatically.
55
Access
Locating your vehicle

Deadlocking This function allows you to identify your vehicle
from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your
F Make a first press on this button. Closing the windows and sunroof vehicle must be locked.
F Within five seconds, press this
button again to deadlock the Pressing and holding the locking F Press this button.
vehicle. button closes the windows and,
depending on version, the sunroof to
the desired position.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and door
This operation also starts closing of the blind. mirror spot lamps and the direction indicators
For versions without alarm, deadlocking is
confirmed by illumination of the direction will flash for around ten seconds.
indicators for few seconds on the second press
of the locking button.
When closing the windows and sunroof

you must ensure that nothing prevents
their correct closing.
If, on versions with alarm, you want to
Deadlocking renders the interior door
leave the windows and/or sunroof partly
controls inoperative.
open, you must first deactivate the
It also deactivates the interior central
volumetric alarm protection.
locking button on the dashboard.
For more information on the Alarm,
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
56
Access
2
Remote operation of Unlocking and opening the
exterior lighting boot
Availability of this function depends on version.
Selective unlocking of the boot
F Make a short press on this
F Make a long press on this button On pressing the boot unlocking button, flashing
remote control button.
to unlock the boot and start the of the direction indicators for a few seconds
motorised opening of the tailgate. signals:
The sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps, - total or selective unlocking of the vehicle
number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps for versions without alarm,
The doors and fuel filler flap remain locked.
come on for 30 seconds. - deactivation of the alarm for other versions.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
Pressing again before the end of the timed The setting for selective unlocking of the boot
period switches off the lighting immediately. is done in the vehicle configuration menu in the
screen.
By default, selective unlocking of the boot is
activated.
If selective unlocking of the boot is
The setting for motorised operation deactivated, pressing the unlocking
of the tailgate is done in the button unlocks the whole vehicle.
Drivingmenu of the touch screen.
By default, motorised operation is deactivated. If motorised operation of the tailgate

is deactivated, pressing the unlocking
button releases the tailgate.
To lock the vehicle, it is necessary to
close the tailgate manually.
57
Access
Keyless Entry and Starting

Unlocking the vehicle
Complete unlocking
F With the electronic key on your person and
in the recognition zone A, pass your hand
behind one of the front door handles or
press the tailgate opening control (located
in the middle).
If motorised operation of the tailgate is
activated, this action triggers its automatic
opening.
System that allows the unlocking, locking
and starting of the vehicle, while keeping the
Opening the windows
electronic key on your person.
Depending on version, keeping your hand
behind the door handle or pressing the tailgate
control allows the windows to be opened to the
The electronic key can also be used as desired position.
a remote control.
For more information on the operation Flashing of the direction indicators for a few
of the Remote control, refer to the seconds signals:
corresponding section. - the unlocking of the vehicle for versions
without alarm,
- the deactivation of the alarm for other
versions.
58
Access
Selective unlocking of the

driver's door
Selective unlocking of the boot
F Press the tailgate opening button to unlock
just the boot.
2
F To unlock only the driver's door, with the
electronic key on your person, pass your The doors remain locked.
hand behind the driver's door handle.
F To unlock the complete vehicle, pass your
hand behind the front passenger door If selective unlocking of the boot is
handle with the electronic key close to deactivated, pressing this control also
the passenger door, or press the tailgate unlocks the door.
opening control (located in the middle) with
the electronic key close to the rear of the Activation or deactivation of selective
vehicle. locking of the boot is done in the
Driving menu of the touch screen.
Activation or deactivation of the

selective unlocking of the driver's
door is done in the Driving menu of
the touch screen.
When unlocking the driver's door, flashing

of the direction indicators for a few seconds
signals:
- the selective unlocking of the vehicle for
versions without alarm,
- the deactivation of the alarm for other
versions.
59
Access
If one of the doors or the boot is still As a safety measure (children on

open or if the electronic key for the board), never leave the vehicle without
Keyless Entry and Starting system has taking the electronic key for the Keyless
been left inside the vehicle, the central Entry and Starting system with you,
locking does not take place. even for a short period.
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully Be aware of the risk of theft when the
activated after about 45 seconds. electronic key for the Keyless Entry and
Starting system is in one of the defined
zones with the vehicle unlocked.
If the vehicle is unlocked by mistake
and with no action on the doors or boot,
the vehicle will lock again automatically
after about 30 seconds.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will In order to preserve the battery in the
also be reactivated automatically. electronic key and the vehicle's battery,
the "hands-free" functions are put into
long-term standby after 21 days without
use. To restore these functions, press
one of the remote control buttons or
start the engine with the electronic key
in the reader.
For more information on starting with
The automatic folding and unfolding
Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to
of the door mirrors can be deactivated
the corresponding section.
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
60
Access
2
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking Ensure that nothing could prevent the For reasons of safety and theft protection,
F With the electronic key in the recognition correct closing of the windows and do not leave your electronic key in the
zone A, press with a finger or thumb sunroof. vehicle, even when you are close to it.
on one of the front door handles (at the Be particularly aware of children when It is recommended that you keep it on your
markings) or press the locking button on operating the windows. person.
the tailgate (on the right).
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the
electronic keys is left inside the vehicle.
Illumination of the direction indicators for a few
seconds signals:
- locking of the vehicle for versions without
Closing the windows and sunroof
alarm,
Maintaining pressure on the door handle or
- activation of the alarm for other versions.
the tailgate control allows the windows and,
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
depending on version, the sunroof to be closed
to the desired position.
This operation also closes the sunroof blind.
61
Access
Accumulations (water, dust, grime,

salt...) on the inner surface of the door
handle may affect detection.
If cleaning the inner surface of the door
handle using a cloth does not restore
detection, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
A sudden splash of water (stream of
water, high pressure jet washer, )
may be identified by the system as the
desire to open the vehicle.
Deadlocking F With the electronic key in the recognition At the first press on one of the locking controls,
zone A, press a finger or thumb on one of illumination of the direction indicators for a few
Deadlocking renders the interior door the front door handles (at the markings) seconds signals:
controls inoperative. or on the locking control located on the - the locking of the vehicle for versions
It also deactivates the interior central tailgate (to the right). without alarm,
control button on the dashboard. F Within five seconds, press one of these - the activation of the alarm for other
Therefore, never leave anyone inside locking controls again to deadlock the versions.
the vehicle when it is deadlocked. vehicle. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
At the second press, illumination of the
direction indicators for a few seconds signals
the deadlocking of the vehicle for versions
without alarm.
62
Access
Lost keys, remote control, electronic key
2
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration certificate, your personal identification documents and if possible, the label bearing the
key code.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the
vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from
working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even when the ignition is switched off.
Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition or take the electronic key when you leave the vehicle, even for
a short time.
Electrical interference
The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key may not operate if close to certain electronic devices: telephone, laptop computer, strong
magnetic fields, ...
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.
For vehicles with an ignition switch, do not forget to remove the key and turn the steering to engage the steering lock.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle

Have the key codes memorised by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.
Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection point.
63
Access
Back-up procedures
Total unlocking / locking of the vehicle with the key
These procedures should be used in the Unlocking Normal locking
following cases:
- remote control cell battery flat,
- remote control fault,
- vehicle in an area subject to strong
electromagnetic interference.
In the first case, you can also replace the

remote control cell battery.
Refer to the corresponding section.
In the second case, you can also reinitialise the
remote control.
F Insert the key in the door lock barrel. F Insert the key in the door lock barrel.
F Turn the key towards the front of the F Turn the key towards the rear of the
vehicle. vehicle.
For versions without alarm, the unlocking is For versions without alarm, the locking is
confirmed by flashing of the direction indicators confirmed by flashing of the direction indicators
for a few seconds. for a few seconds.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
If the alarm is activated, the siren If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm,
sounds on opening the door; switch on this function will not be activated when
the ignition to stop it. locking with the key.
64
Access
2
Without central locking
Deadlocking These procedures should be used in the Locking
following cases:
- central locking fault,
- battery disconnected or discharged.
Driver's door
F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle
to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
F Insert the key in the door lock barrel. F Open the doors.
F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle Passenger doors F For the rear doors, check that the child lock
to lock it. is not on.
Unlocking a door
F Within five seconds, turn the key towards Refer to the corresponding section.
F Pull the interior opening control for the
the rear of the vehicle again to deadlock it. F Remove the black cap on the edge of the
door.
For versions without alarm, at the second door, using the key.
manoeuvre the deadlocking is confirmed F Without forcing, insert the key into the
byflashing of the direction indicators for aperture; then, without turning it, move the
a few seconds. latch sideways towards the inside of the
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. door.
F Remove the key and refit the black cap.
F Close the doors and check from the
outside that the vehicle is locked.
65
Access
Changing the battery

A message appears in the instrument panel screen when replacement of the battery is needed.
Version without Keyless Entry and Starting Version with Keyless Entry and Starting
Battery type: CR1620 / 3 volts. Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts.
F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver

at the cut-out.
F Lift off the cover.
F Remove the discharged battery from its
housing.
F Fit the new battery into its housing
observing the polarity.
F Clip the cover onto the casing.
The remote control must be reinitialised after

replacing the battery.
For more information on reinitialising the
remote control, refer to the corresponding
section.
66
Access
2
Reinitialising the remote control
Following replacement of the battery or in the event of a remote control fault, it may be necessary to reinitialise the remote control.
Version without Keyless Entry Version with Keyless Entry and

and Starting Starting
F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place
the gear lever in neutral then fully depress
the clutch pedal.
F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,

select position P then press the brake
pedal firmly.
F Switch off the ignition. F Switch on the ignition by pressing the

F Turn the key to position 2 (ignition on). "START/STOP" button.
F Press the closed padlock button for a few The electronic key is now fully operational
seconds. F Place the electronic key against the back-
again.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key up reader on the steering column and hold
from the switch. it there until the ignition is switched on. If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact
The remote control is now fully operational a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
again. without delay.
67
Access
Central locking
This function allows the doors and boot to be locked or unlocked simultaneously from inside the vehicle.
Manual mode Automatic mode

Unlocking This is the automatic central locking of the
vehicle when driving, also called anti-intrusion
F Press this button again to unlock security.
the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button For more information on Anti-intrusion
goes off. security, refer to the corresponding section.
When locking / deadlocking

from the outside
Locking When the vehicle is locked or
F Press this button to lock the deadlocked from the outside, the red
vehicle. indicator lamp flashes and the button is
The red indicator lamp in the button inactive.
comes on. F After normal locking, pull one of the
interior door levers to unlock the
vehicle.
F After deadlocking, it is necessary
to use the remote control, Keyless
Entry and Starting or the integral
key to unlock the vehicle.
If one of the doors is open, the central
locking from the inside does not take
place.
68
Access
Anti-intrusion security
2
This system allows automatic simultaneous locking of the doors and boot as soon as the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
Operation Activation / Deactivation

If one of the doors or the boot is open, the
automatic central locking does not take place. Driving with the doors locked may
render access for the emergency
services difficult in an emergency.
This is signalled by the sound of
the locks rebounding, accompanied
by illumination of this symbol in the
instrument panel, an audible signal
and the display of an alert message.
Carrying long or You can activate or deactivate this function

voluminous objects permanently.
If you want to drive with the boot open, F With the ignition on, press this
you should press the central locking button until an audible signal
button to lock the doors. Otherwise, starts and a corresponding
every time the speed of the vehicle message is displayed.
exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the locks
will rebound and the alerts mentioned The state of the system stays in memory when
above will appear. switching off the ignition.
Pressing the central locking button
unlocks the vehicle.
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this unlocking
is temporary.
69
Access
Alarm*
System which protects and provides a deterrent Self-protection function For all work on the alarm system,
against theft and break-ins. It provides the
The system checks for the putting out of contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
following types of monitoring:
service of its components. qualified workshop.
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central
- exterior perimeter control or the siren wiring are put out of service
The system checks for opening of the vehicle. or damaged.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a
door, the boot, the bonnet...
- interior volumetric
The system checks for any variation in the
volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
window, enters the passenger compartment or
moves inside the vehicle.
- anti-tilt**
The system checks for any change in the
attitude of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted,
moved or knocked.
* Depending on version.
** Depending on engine.
70
Access
2
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
Following an instruction to lock Deactivation
the vehicle, the exterior perimeter F Press the unlocking button on the remote
monitoring is activated after a delay of control.
5 seconds and the interior volumetric or
and anti-tilt monitoring after a delay of F Unlock the vehicle with the "Keyless Entry
45 seconds. and Starting" system.
If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) The monitoring system is deactivated: the
is not fully closed, the vehicle is not indicator lamp in the button goes off and the
locked but the exterior perimeter direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
monitoring will be activated after a
delay of 45seconds at the same time
Activation as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring.
F Switch off the ignition and get out of the
vehicle.
F Lock the vehicle with the remote control or When the vehicle automatically locks
the Keyless Entry and Starting system. itself again (as happens if a door or
The monitoring system is active: the indicator boot is not opened within 30 seconds
lamp in the button flashes once per second of unlocking), the monitoring system is
and the direction indicators come on for about also reactivated.
2 seconds.
71
Access
Locking the vehicle

with exterior perimeter
monitoring only To be effective, the deactivation must
Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt be carried out each time the ignition is
monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the switched off.
alarm in certain cases such as:
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
- leaving a window or sunroof partially open,
- washing your vehicle,
- changing a wheel,
- having your vehicle towed,
- transport by sea.
Deactivating the interior Reactivating the interior

volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring volumetric and anti-tilt
F Switch off the ignition and within monitoring
10seconds, press the button until the F Deactivate the perimeter monitoring by
indicator lamp is on continuously. unlocking the vehicle with the remote
F Get out of the vehicle. control or the Keyless Entry and Starting
F Immediately lock the vehicle using the system.
remote control or the Keyless Entry and The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Starting system. F Reactivate all monitoring by locking the
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is vehicle with the remote control or the
activated: the indicator lamp in the button Keyless Entry and starting system.
flashes once per second. The indicator lamp in the button flashes once
per second again.
72
Access
Triggering of the alarm

This is indicated by sounding of the siren
Failure of the remote control
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
Operating fault
When the ignition is switched on, fixed
2
and flashing of the direction indicators for F unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to illumination of the indicator lamp in the button
30seconds. the remote control) in the driver's door lock, indicates a fault with the system.
The monitoring functions remain active until F open the door; the alarm is triggered, Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
the alarm has been triggered eleven times in F switch on the ignition; the alarm stops; the qualified workshop.
succession. indicator lamp in the button goes off.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control or the Keyless Entry and Starting
system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
in the button informs you that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When the
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
immediately.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
key (integral to the remote control) in the
driver's door lock.
73
Access
Doors
Opening Closing
When a door is not closed correctly:
- with the engine running or the

vehicle moving (speed below
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied
by an alert message for a few
seconds.
- with the vehicle moving (speed above

6mph (10 km/h)), in addition to the warning
lamp and alert message, there is an
From outside From inside audible signal for a few seconds.
F After unlocking the vehicle or with the F Pull the interior control lever of a front door;
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and this unlocks the vehicle completely.
Starting system in the recognition zone,
pull the door handle.
With the selective unlocking activated:

- opening the driver's door unlocks
the driver's door only (if the vehicle
has not already been completely
When the selective unlocking is unlocked).
activated, the first press of the remote - opening one of the passenger
control unlocking button permits doors unlocks the rest of the
unlocking of the driver's door only. vehicle.
74
Access
Boot
2
Opening the tailgate Closing the tailgate
With the exterior tailgate control F Lower the tailgate using the interior grips.
F Release the grips and press down on the
outside of the tailgate to close it.
When selective unlocking is activated,
the electronic key must be close to the
rear of the vehicle.
If the tailgate is not properly closed:
- engine running, this warning

lamp and a message appear in
the instrument panel for a few
The tailgate is not designed to take a seconds,
bicycle carrier.
- vehicle running (speed above 6 mph
(10km/h)), this warning lamp and a
F With the vehicle unlocked or with the message appear in the instrument panel
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and for a few seconds, accompanied by an
Starting system in the recognition zone, audible signal.
press the central tailgate control.
F Raise the tailgate.
75
Access
Hands-free tailgate
General points
The motorised operation of the tailgate can be Anti-pinch
activated or deactivated in the vehicle settings
The motorised tailgate has an obstacle
menu.
detection system that automatically interrupts
The motorised tailgate must only be operated
and reverses its movement by a few degrees to
with the vehicle stationary.
allow the obstacle to be cleared.
Please note that this anti-pinch system is not
active at the end of the closing travel (around
1 cm from completely closed).
To avoid the risk of injury through Never introduce a finger in the locking
pinching or trapping, before and during system of the motorised tailgate - Risk
operation of the motorised tailgate: of a serious injury!
- ensure that there is no person close
to the rear of the vehicle,
- watch the activity of your
Bicycle carrier / Towbar
passengers, particularly any The motorised tailgate is not designed to
Check that there is enough space to children. support a bicycle carrier.
allow for the movement of the motorised When installing a bicycle carrier on a towbar
tailgate. with connection of a cable to the towbar socket,
the motorised operation of the tailgate will be
automatically deactivated.
If using a towbar or bicycle carrier not
recommended by PEUGEOT, it is essential
to deactivate the motorised operation of the
tailgate.
76
Access
2
Operation
There are several ways of operating the Activation and deactivation of
motorised tailgate:
Motorised closing
motorised operation of the tailgate
A. using the electronic key of the Keyless There are several possibilities.
is done in the Driving menu of the
Entry and Starting system, F Make a long press on the central button A
touch screen.
B. using the exterior control on the tailgate, of the electronic key.
This function is deactivated by default.
C. using the interior tailgate control, or
D. using the control on the dashboard, F Press the exterior control B on the tailgate.
E. using the "hands-free access" procedure or
below the rear bumper. Motorised opening F Press the interior tailgate control C.
There are several possibilities. or
F Make a long press on the central button A F Press twice in succession on the
of the electronic key. dashboard control D.
or The command is confirmed by an audible
F Press the exterior control B on the tailgate signal.
with the electronic key on your person.
or
F Press twice in succession on the
dashboard control D. It is possible to stop the movement of
The command is confirmed by an audible the tailgate.
signal. Pressing one of these controls again
The tailgate opens, either completely as the interrupts the movement.
default setting, or to the memorised position. Following the interruption of a
movement, pressing one of these
controls again resumes the movement.
77
Access
"Hands-free" motorised "Hands-free" motorised closing

opening F With the electronic key of the Keyless Entry
and Starting system on your person,
Passing your foot rapidly below the
F Use the "hands-free" access E by passing
bumper again while the tailgate is
a foot rapidly below the rear bumper.
opening interrupts the movement.
The command is confirmed by an audible
A third pass of your foot reverses the
signal.
direction of movement.
Ensure that you are steady on your feet Passing your foot rapidly below the
before passing a foot rapidly below the bumper again while the tailgate is
rear bumper. closing interrupts the movement.
Take care not to touch the exhaust A third pass of your foot reverses the
F With the electronic key of the Keyless Entry system, which may be hot - Risk of direction of movement.
and Starting system on your person, burns!
F Use the "hands-free" access E by passing
a foot rapidly below the rear bumper. Activation / deactivation of the
The command is confirmed by an audible Hands-Free Tailgate Access function
signal. is done in the Driving menu of the
The tailgate opens, either completely by touch screen.
default, or to the memorised position. This function is deactivated by default.
This movement first unlocks just the

boot, or the vehicle if the latter was
locked.
78
Access
2
Memorising an opening Manual operation
position The tailgate can be opened and closed
Automatic locking by the Hands- manually, even if motorised operation is
Free Tailgate Access function Where height is restricted (garage with a low
ceiling, ...) it is possible to limit and memorise activated.
the opening angle of the motorised tailgate. However, any manual operation must be done
with the tailgate first stopped.
This memorisation is done as follows:
F open the tailgate to the desired position,
F press buttonC or the exterior control B for When opening and closing a motorised tailgate
more than 3 seconds. manually, there is no assistance from gas-filled
Memorisation of the maximum opening position struts. Resistance to opening and closing is
of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal. therefore entirely normal.
It is possible to activate automatic locking of Repeated opening and closing of

the vehicle on closing the tailgate, using the the motorised tailgate can cause
Hands-Free Tailgate Access function. overheating of its electric motor, after
To cancel the memorised position: which opening and closing will not be
F stop the tailgate in an intermediate possible.
F Press this button; its indicator position, Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric
lamp comes on. F press buttonC or the exterior control B for motor to cool down before operating the
more than 3 seconds. tailgate again.
Pressing this button again deactivates the Cancellation of the memorised position is If you are unable to wait, operate it
function; its indicator lamp goes off. confirmed by an audible signal. manually.
Detection of obstacles
If an obstacle (person or object) is
encountered, the anti-pinch system stops the
closing movement and raises the tailgate by a
few centimetres to clear the obstacle.
79
Access
Reinitialising the motorised Precautions in use

tailgate
This operation is necessary where there is In wintry conditions
no movement - after detection of an obstacle, In the event of an accumulation of snow
connecting or recharging the battery, ... on the tailgate, clear the snow before
F Open the tailgate manually, if necessary. commanding a motorised opening of
F Fully close the tailgate manually. the tailgate.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT The formation of ice can block the
dealer or a qualified workshop. tailgate and prevent its opening: wait
until the ice melts with the heating of
the passenger compartment.
When washing
When washing the vehicle in an
automatic car wash, don't forget to
lock your vehicle to avoid the risk of
unexpected opening.
80
Access
2
Recommendations related to the "Hands-free tailgate Back-up release
access" function To manually unlock the boot in the event of a
If several passes of your foot below the rear In some circumstances, the tailgate may only battery or central locking failure.
bumper fail to open the tailgate, wait a few open or close, particularly if:
seconds before starting again. - your vehicle is fitted with a towbar,
- you hitch or unhitch a trailer,
The function is automatically deactivated in the - you fit or remove a bicycle carrier,
event of heavy rain or accumulation of snow. - you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle
carrier,
If the function fails to operate, check that
- you place or lift something behind the
the electronic key is not exposed to strong
vehicle,
electromagnetic interference (a smartphone, ...).
- an animal approaches the rear bumper,
- you are washing your vehicle,
The function may not work correctly with a - a service is being carried out on your
prosthetic leg. vehicle,
- you are accessing the spare wheel
The function may not work correctly if your (depending on version).
vehicle is fitted with a towbar. To avoid such operating problems, keep the Unlocking
electronic key away from the recognition zone F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
or deactivate "Hands-free tailgate access". the lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock to unlock the tailgate.
F Move the latch to the left.
Ensure that no object or person might
prevent the correct opening or closing
of the tailgate.
Be particularly aware of children when
Locking after closing
operating the tailgate. If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
will remain locked.
81
Access
Electric windows
Manual operation Safety anti-pinch
To open or close the window, press or pull the When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
switch gently. The window stops as soon as the it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
switch is released. In the event of unwanted opening of the
window on closing, press the switch until the
window opens completely, then pull the switch
immediately until the window closes. Continue
to hold the switch for approximately one second
Automatic operation after the window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
during this operation.
To open or close the window, press or pull
the switch fully: the window opens or closes
completely when the switch is released.
Pressing the switch again stops the movement
of the window.
1. Left-hand front.
2. Right-hand front.
3. Right-hand rear.
4. Left-hand rear.
5. Deactivate the electric window switches
located at the rear seats. The electric window switches
remain operational for approximately
45seconds after switching off the
ignition.
Once this time has elapsed, the electric
windows will not operate. To reactivate
them, switch the ignition on again.
82
Access
2
Deactivating the rear Reinitialising the electric
controls for the rear windows
windows Following reconnection of the battery, the
safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised.
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
during these operations.
In the event of contact during operation
of the windows, you must reverse the
For each window: movement of the window. To do this,
- lower the window completely, then raise it, press the switch concerned.
it will rise in steps of a few centimetres with When operating the passenger electric
each action. Repeat the operation until the window switches, the driver must
window closes completely, ensure that nothing is preventing
- continue to pull the switch for at least one correct closing of the windows.
second after reaching this position, window The driver must ensure that the
For the safety of your children, press switch5 passengers use the electric windows
closed.
to prevent operation of the rear windows correctly.
irrespective of their positions. Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
Be aware of passengers or other
The indicator lamp in the button comes on, persons present when closing the
accompanied by a message confirming windows using the electronic key or the
activation. It remains on, as long as the child "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
lock is off (deactivated).
Use of the rear electric windows from the
driver's controls remains possible.
83
Access
Panoramic opening sunroof

The panoramic sunroof and its blind are Principles Operating the sunroof
opened and closed using the buttons in the roof
console. Complete opening of the sunroof involves partly Opening
A. Blind control button. raising the mobile glass, then sliding it over the
fixed glass. With the sunroof fully closed or
B. Sunroof control button.
Any intermediate position is possible. partly raised:
Opening the sunroof also opens its blind. F press and release the rear of
However, the blind can be left open when the button B without going beyond
sunroof is closed. the point of resistance to fully
raise the sunroof.
With the sunroof open in the raised position:

F press and release the rear of buttonB
The control buttons for the sunroof and blind without going beyond the point of
can be used: resistance to open the sunroof.
- with the ignition on, if the state of charge of With the sunroof partly or fully closed:
the battery is adequate, F press and release the rear of button B
- with the engine running, going beyond the point of resistance to fully
- in STOP mode of Stop & Start, close the sunroof.
- during the 45 seconds after switching off Any new action on this button interrupts the
the ignition, movement.
- during the 45 seconds after locking the
vehicle.
F Press and hold the rear of button B without

Ensure that any luggage or accessories going beyond the point of resistance; the
Before operating the sunroof or blind carried on the roof bars do not interfere sunroof opens and stops when you release
control buttons, ensure that no object or with the movement of the sunroof. the button.
person might prevent the movement. Do not place heavy loads on the fixed
or mobile glass of the sunroof.
84
Access
If the sunroof is wet, following a shower

With the sunroof partly or fully open:
Anti-pinch system
If the sunroof encounters an obstacle when
2
F press and release the front of buttonB closing, the movement is automatically
or washing the vehicle, wait until it is reversed.
without going beyond the point of
completely dry before opening. The anti-pinch system is designed to be
resistance to close the sunroof to its raised
Do not operate the sunroof if it is effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
position.
covered by snow or ice - Risk of
F press and release the front of button B
damage!
Use only plastic scrapers to remove
again to fully close the sunroof. Reinitialisation
With the sunroof fully or partly raised:
snow or ice. Following reconnection of the battery or in
F press and release the front of buttonB
the event of a fault or jerky movement of
the sunroof, the opening sunroof must be
resistance to fully close the sunroof.
reinitialised:
Do not extend your head or arms F press the rear of button B until the sunroof
through the open sunroof when driving - is fully open,
Risk of serious injury! F press and hold the rear of button B again
for at least 3 seconds.
Closing F press and hold the front of button B without Check the condition of the sunroof
going beyond the point of resistance; the seals regularly (presence of dust or
With the sunroof partially or fully sunroof closes and stops when you release deposits, dead leaves...).
open: the button. Before using a car wash, first check that
F press and release the front of the sunroof is closed. If using a high
button B going beyond the point pressure jet wash, keep the tip of the
Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof
of resistance to fully close the lance at least 30 centimetres from the
open.
sunroof. seals.
Any new action on this button
interrupts the movement.
85
Access
Operating the sunroof blind

The closing movement of the blind is limited by Closing Reinitialisation
the position of the opening sunroof: the blind
F Press the front of button A, Following reconnection of the battery or in the
cannot be further forward than the front of the
going beyond the point of event of a fault or jerky movement of the blind,
mobile glass.
resistance to fully close the the blind must be reinitialised:
blind. F press the rear of button A until the blind is
Opening fully open,
F Press the rear of button A going F press and hold the rear of button A again
beyond the point of resistance to Any new action on this button interrupts the for at least 3 seconds.
fully open the blind. movement.
F Press and hold the front of buttonA,

Any new action on this button interrupts the resistance; the blind closes and stops During simultaneous closing of the
movement. when you release the button. sunroof and the blind, if the blind
catches up with the sunroof, the
F Press and hold the rear of button A, without blind then suspends its movement
going beyond the point of resistance; the Anti-pinch system and automatically resumes when the
blind opens and stops when you release sunroof stops.
If the blind encounters an obstacle when
the button.
closing, the movement is automatically
reversed.
86
Access
When locking the vehicle, pressing

and holding the locking button also
2
closes the windows and the sunroof
and then the blind. The movements
are interrupted when you release the
locking button.
Never leave the electronic key inside

the vehicle if you get out of the vehicle,
even for a short time.
If something is trapped when closing
the sunroof or blind, you should reverse
the movement of the sunroof or blind.
To do this, press the control button in
question.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the sunroof and blind correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the sunroof or blind.
87
Ease of use and comfort
Driving position
Adopting a good driving position helps improve your comfort and protection.
It also optimises interior and exterior visibility as well as access to controls.
Sitting comfortably
The presence in the vehicle of certain seat adjustments described in this section depends on the trim level and country of sale.
The distance between your knees and the

dashboard should be at least 10 cm, for easy
access to the controls in the dashboard.
Adjust the seat backrest angle to the most
vertical position possible; the backrest must not
be reclined more than 25 from vertical.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge
is level with the top of your head.
Adjust the length of the seat cushion to support
your thighs.
Adjust the lumbar support to fit the shape of
your spine.
Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at Passenger
Driver distance of at least 25 cm from your chest and Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back
you are able to hold it with your arms slightly and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest.
Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back
bent. Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so
and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest.
The steering wheel must not obstruct your view that you are at a distance of at least 25 cm from
Adjust the height of the seat so that your eyes
of the instrument panel. the dashboard.
are level with the middle of the windscreen.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge
Your head should be at a distance of at least
is level with the top of your head.
10 cm from the roof.
Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so
If your vehicle has electric seats, the
that you can fully depress the pedals with your As a safety measure, the seats and
ignition must be on to adjust them.
legs still slightly bent. steering wheel must only be adjusted
when stationary.
88
Before moving off When driving
Adjust the interior and exterior door mirrors so Maintain a good driving position and hold the
as to reduce blind spots. steering wheel with both hands at the quarter
to three position, so that you can easily and
quickly reach the controls behind and near the
steering wheel.
Fasten your seat belt: place the diagonal belt in

the middle of your shoulder and adjust the lap
belt so that is tightened over your pelvis.
Ensure that all passengers have fastened their
If your vehicle has electric door mirrors, seat belts correctly. Never adjust the seats or steering
the ignition must be on to adjust them. wheel when driving.
Always keep your feet on the floor.
89
Front seats
Manual seats
1. Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards

F Raise the control bar and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
F Release the bar to engage the seat in
position in the runners.
2. Adjusting the seat height

F Raise or lower the control as many times
as needed to obtain the desired seat
height.
3. Adjusting the seat backrest angle

F Turn the knob forwards or backwards to
recline the backrest to the desired angle.
4. Adjusting the height of the head restraint

5. Adjusting the lumbar support

(only on the driver's seat)
F Turn the knob forwards or backwards to
increase or decrease the level of lumbar
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full
support.
travel of the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats or jamming the
seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat.
90
"AGR" certified seats

Additional adjustments
3
1. Adjustment of the length of the seat cushion
F Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion, then move the front part of the
seat cushion forwards or backwards.
2. A
djusting the seat cushion angle
electrically
F Press and hold the front or rear of the
control to raise or lower the front of the seat
cushion.
3. Adjusting the lumbar support electrically

The control allows independent adjustment of
the depth and vertical position of the lumbar
support.
F Press and hold the front or rear of the
control to increase or reduce the lumbar
support.
F Press and hold the top or bottom of the
control to raise or lower the lumbar support
area.
91
Placing the passenger seat in the table position

The backrest of the passenger seat can be fully
folded forward and secured in this position.
This function, when associated with folding
of the backrest of the rear seats, helps in
transporting long and voluminous objects.
First steps:
F lower the head restraint,
F move the seat fully back to allow space for
the head restraint when folding,
F adjust the seat to the lowest position,
F check that there is nothing that might Folding the backrest Returning the backrest to the
interfere with folding of the backrest (seat F Pull the control fully up to release the normal position
belt, child seat, items of clothing, bags...). backrest. F Pull the control fully up to release the
F Tip the backrest fully forward. backrest.
F Raise the backrest and guide it back until it
latches into place.
F Check that the backrest has engaged
correctly.
In this position, the backrest can
support a maximum load of 30 kg.
When the front passenger seat is
fully folded, only the outer rear seat
behind the driver can be occupied by a
passenger.
92
Front head restraints
Adjusting the height Removing a head restraint Refitting a head restraint

Upward: F Pull the head restraint up as far as it will F Introduce the head restraint rods into the
F pull the head restraint up to the desired go. guides in the seat backrest.
position; the head restraint can be felt to F Press the lug Ato free the head restraint F Push the head restraint down as far as it
click into position. and then pull it fully out. will go.
Downward: F Stow the head restraint securely. F Press the lug A to free the head restraint
F press the lug A and push the head restraint and push it down.
down to the desired position. F Adjust the height of the head restraint.
Never drive with the head restraints

The adjustment is correct when the removed; they should be in place and
upper edge of the head restraint is level correctly adjusted for the occupant of
with the top of your head. the seat.
93
Electric driver's seat
To adjust the seat electrically, switch

on the ignition, or start the engine if the
vehicle has gone into energy economy
mode.
These electric adjustments remain
available for about a minute after
opening the driver's door. They are
deactivated about a minute after
switching off the ignition.
Before moving the seat backwards,

ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
passengers if present in the rear seats
or jamming the seat if large objects are
placed on the floor behind the seat.
94
3
1. Adjusting the angle and height of the seat 3. Adjusting the height of the head restraint
cushion / Adjusting the seat forwards and Refer to the corresponding section.
backwards
F Raise or lower the front of the control to 4. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion
obtain the desired seat cushion angle. F Pull the handle forwards to release the
F Raise or lower the rear of the control to cushion, then move the front part of the
raise or lower the seat. seat cushion forwards or backwards.
F Slide the control forwards or backwards to
move the seat forwards or backwards.
5. Adjusting the lumbar support
The control allows independent adjustment of
the depth and vertical position of the lumbar
support.
2. Adjusting the seat backrest angle F Press and hold the front or rear of the
F Turn the control forwards or backwards to control to increase or reduce the lumbar
recline the backrest to the desired angle. support.
F Press and hold the top or bottom of the
control to raise or lower the lumbar support
area.
95
Storing driving positions
Associated with the electric driver's seat, Storing a position Recalling a stored position
this function allows two driving positions to
Using buttons M / 1 / 2 Ignition on or engine running
be stored to facilitate adjustment if there is a
F Sit in the driver's seat. F Press button 1 or 2 to recall the
frequent change of driver.
F Switch on the ignition. corresponding position.
It takes account of the electric adjustments of
F Adjust your seat and the door mirrors. An audible signal confirms that adjustment is
the seat and the door mirrors.
F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 complete.
within four seconds.
An audible signal indicates that the position has
been stored. You can interrupt the current movement
by pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using
one of the seat controls.
A stored position cannot be recalled
while driving.
Recalling stored positions is
deactivated 45 seconds after switching
Storing a new position cancels the off the ignition.
previous position.
96
Heated seats
Prolonged use at the highest setting
3
is not recommended for those with
sensitive skin.
There is a risk of burns for those that
do not have normal perception of heat
(illness, taking medicines, ...).
The function is active only with the engine There is a risk of overheating the
running. system if material with insulating
properties is used, such as cushions or
Switching on Switching off seat covers.
F Press the button for your seat. F Press the button again until all of the Do not use the system:
F Each press changes the level of heating; indicator lamps are off. - if wearing damp clothing,
the corresponding number of indicator - if child seats are fitted.
The state of the function is not held in memory
lamps come on: To avoid breaking the heating element
when the ignition is switched off.
1 indicator lamp = low. in the seat:
2 indicator lamps = medium. - do not place heavy objects on the
3 indicator lamps = high. seat,
Do not use the function if the seat is not
occupied. - do not kneel or stand on the seat,
Reduce the level of heating as soon as - do not place sharp objects on the
possible. seat,
Once the temperatures of the seat and - do not spill liquids onto the seat.
the passenger compartment are at To avoid the risk of short-circuit:
adequate levels you can switch off the - do not use liquid products for
function; lower current consumption cleaning the seat,
reduces fuel consumption. - never use the heating function
when the seat is damp.
97
Multipoint massage
System with a choice of type of massage and Using the button on the front seat: If you want to modify the settings:
adjustment of its intensity. F select another type of massage from the
This system operates with the engine running, F Press this button; its indicator five offered,
as well as in STOP mode of Stop & Start. lamp comes on. F select a massage intensity from the
3levels offered: "1" (Low), "2" (Medium)
Activation / Settings The system is activated immediately with the or "3" (High).
The massage settings are adjusted in the touch last settings used and the settings page is The modifications are taken into account
screen. displayed in the touch screen. immediately.
The system is switched on, either directly using If the settings suit you and you make no Once activated, the system starts a one hour
the button on the front seat, or by activating changes, the display returns to its previous massage cycle, made up of sequences of
a personalised ambience with the i-Cockpit state. 6minutes of massage followed by 3 minutes
Amplify function at rest.
The system stops automatically at the end of
The multipoint massages are also
the cycle; the indicator lamp in the button goes
manage by the i-Cockpit Amplify
off.
function.
For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify
98
Steering wheel adjustment Mirrors

Door mirrors
3
F When stationary, pull the control lever to
release the adjustment mechanism.
F Adjust the height and reach to suit your Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass Adjustment
driving position. permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary
F Move control A to the right or to the left to
F Push the control lever to lock the for overtaking or parking.
select the corresponding mirror.
adjustment mechanism. They can also be folded for parking in confined
F Move control B in all four directions to
spaces.
adjust.
F Return control A to the central position.
As a safety measure, these operations
should only be carried out with the
Demisting / Defrosting
vehicle stationary.
If your vehicle is fitted with heated As a safety measure, the mirrors should
mirrors, the demisting-defrosting be adjusted to reduce the blind spots.
operates by switching on the heated
rear screen. The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear.
For more information on Demisting and Take this into account in order to
defrosting the rear screen, refer to the correctly judge the distance of vehicles
corresponding section. approaching from behind.
99
Unfolding Automatic tilting in reverse gear

F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the System which provides a view of the ground
remote control or the key. during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the
control A in the central position rearwards.
With the engine running, on engaging reverse
gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards.
The folding and unfolding of the door
They return to their initial position:
mirrors using the remote control can be
- a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear,
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
- once the speed of the vehicle exceeds
qualified workshop.
6mph (10 km/h),
Folding - on switching off the engine.
F From outside: lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key. If necessary the mirrors can be folded This function can be activated or
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the manually. deactivated in the Driving menu of
control A in the central position rearwards. the touch screen.
F Select the"Setting" tab then "Comfort"
If the mirrors are folded using control A, and "Auto mirror dipping in reverse".
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked. Pull again on control A.
100
Rear view mirror

Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to
the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...
Manual model Automatic "electrochrome"

Adjustment
model
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is This system automatically and progressively
directed correctly in the "day" position. changes between the day and night uses by
means of a sensor, which measures the light
Day / night position from the rear of the vehicle.
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position. In order to ensure optimum visibility
F Push the lever to change to the normal during your manoeuvres, the mirror
"day" position. lightens automatically when reverse
gear is engaged.
101
i-Cockpit Amplify function

This function allows the driving ambiences to be managed.
Specific system settings are offered for each ambience.
These ambiences can be personalised in the touch screen.
Content of an ambience Access to the i-Cockpit Amplify home page

An ambience is defined as the settings for each
of the following systems: Direct access by this button
Activating an ambience
- the passenger compartment From the home page:
mood lighting, F Select an ambience: "Relax" or "Boost".
(activation / deactivation and Depending on the settings made for the
adjustment of brightness) Access via the Applications menu ambience, the systems are activated
immediately.
- the audio ambience, F Select "i-Cockpit Amplify".
(choice of predetermined settings for
the audio system equaliser)
Deactivating an ambience
- scented air freshener, From the home page:
(activation / deactivation, selection of F Press "Deactivate the ambience".
a fragrance and a setting for diffusion or
intensity) F Select another ambience.
The ambience is automatically deactivated
- multipoint massage,
(selection of the seat, activation /
deactivation, selection of a type of
massage and a setting for intensity)
- Dynamic pack.
(activation / deactivation)
102
Personalising an ambience
From the home page:
It is possible to temporarily modify an
3
F Select an ambience to activate it.
ambience at any time, by modifying the
F Press "Settings" to display the settings
settings for one or more of the systems
page for the ambience.
managed in the ambience, without
F Select a system for which you wish to
going via the i-Cockpit Amplify function.
modify the settings.
For example, you can deactivate or
F After making the modifications, press any
modify the intensity of the current
area of the screen outside the system
massage by pressing the massage
settings window to return to the ambience
button on your seat, or activate or
settings page.
deactivate the passenger compartment
F After making all of the desired
mood lighting in the Driving menu.
modifications to settings, press "Save
In this case, the new settings will not be
settings".
saved as part of the current ambience.
The modifications are taken into account
immediately.
103
Heating and Ventilation

Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger
compartment is filtered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at the
base of the windscreen or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
Controls
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by
the driver, the front passenger and rear
passengers, according to the level of
equipment.
The temperature control enables you to obtain
the level of comfort required by mixing the air of
the various circuits.
The air distribution control enables you to
select the air vents used in the passenger
compartment by the combined use of the Air distribution
associated buttons.
The air flow control enables you to increase or 1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents. 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells.
reduce the speed of the ventilation fan. 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting
Depending on your vehicle, the controls are vents.
accessible in the "Air conditioning" menu of 3. Side adjustable air vents. To close the air vents:
the touch screen or are grouped together on 4. Central adjustable air vents. F side vents; place the cursor in the central
control panel on the centre console. 5. Air outlets to the front footwells. position, then move it sideways towards the
door.
F centre vents; place the cursor in the central
position, then move it sideways towards the
centre of the dashboard.
104
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance If after an extended stop in sunshine,
guidelines below: the interior temperature is very
F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles high, first ventilate the passenger
3
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well compartment for a few moments.
as the air extractor located in the boot. Put the air flow control at a setting high
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation enough to quickly change the air in the
of the air conditioning system. passenger compartment.
F Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month The air conditioning system does not
to keep it in perfect working order. contain chlorine and does not present
F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter any danger to the ozone layer.
elements replaced regularly.
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to
its special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the The condensation created by the air
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic conditioning results in a discharge
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits). of water under the vehicle which is
F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have perfectly normal.
it checked regularly as recommended in the warranty and maintenance record.
F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop. Stop & Start
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the
The heating and air conditioning
air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.
systems only work when the engine is
running.
To maintain a comfortable temperature
in the passenger compartment, you can
temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start
system.
For more information on Stop & Start,
105
Manual air conditioning

The air conditioning system operates only with Temperature adjustment Air distribution adjustment
the engine running.
F Turn this knob from blue (cold)
to red (hot). Windscreen and side windows.
Central and side vents.
Footwells.
1. Temperature.
2. Air conditioning On / Off. F Press this button as many times as
3. Air distribution. necessary to obtain the desired air
4. Air flow. distribution.
5. Air recirculation. The air distribution can be adapted by
combining the corresponding indicator lamps.
106
Air flow adjustment Recirculation of interior air Air conditioning On / Off

F Press the "large fan" or "small The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the
The air conditioning is designed to operate
3
fan" button to increase or windscreen and side windows.
effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.
decrease the air flow. Recirculation of the interior air isolates the
It enables you to:
The corresponding indicator lamps passenger compartment from exterior odours
- lower the temperature, in summer,
come on. and fumes.
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
This function also allows the desired
in winter, above 3C.
temperature in the passenger compartment to
If you keep pressing the "small fan" until all be reached in the shortest time.
Switching on
of the indicator lamps go off(system off), the
F Press this button, its indicator
temperature is no longer controlled. F Press this button to activate lamp comes on.
However, a slight flow of air can still be felt, the function; its indicator lamp
resulting from the forward movement of the comes on.
vehicle. The air conditioning does not operate
F Press this button again to deactivate the when the air flow adjustment is set to
function; its indicator lamp goes off. off.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
use recirculation of the interior air for a
few moments. Then return to the intake
Avoid the prolonged use of air of exterior air.
recirculation - Risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality!
Switching off
F Press this button again; its
indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off the air conditioning may result in

some discomfort (humidity, misting).
107
Semi-automatic mono-zone air conditioning

The air conditioning system operates only with Temperature adjustment
the engine running.
The temperature at the nozzles and vents F Press one of these buttons
is regulated by the system according to the to reduce (blue) or increase
temperature in the passenger compartment (red) the setting.
and the temperature setting.
The setting corresponds to a level of comfort

Press the Air conditioning menu and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or
button to display the system controls Fahrenheit (depending on the unit selected).
page. A setting of around 21 provides optimum
comfort. Depending on your requirements, a
setting between 18 and 24 is normal.
1. Automatic visibility programme.
2. Air recirculation.
3. Air flow.
4. Temperature.
5. Air distribution.
6. System Off.
7. Air conditioning On / Off.
8. Maximum air conditioning.
108
Air flow adjustment Air distribution adjustment Recirculation of interior air

Press one of these buttons to
3
increase (+) or decrease (-) the speed These buttons are used to arrange The intake of exterior air prevents the formation
of the booster fan. the distribution of air in the passenger of mist on the windscreen and side windows.
compartment by combining several air outlets. Recirculation of the interior air isolates the
The air flow symbol (a fan) fills progressively passenger compartment from exterior odours
according to the air flow wanted. Windscreen and side windows. and fumes.
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are This function also allows the desired
stopping ventilation. temperature in the passenger compartment to
Central and side vents. be reached in the shortest time.
Avoid driving too long without F Press this button to activate the
ventilation- Risk of misting and Footwells. function; its indicator lamp comes
deterioration of air quality! on.
F Press this button again to deactivate the
The air distribution can be adapted by using function; its indicator lamp goes off.
several buttons: illumination of the indicator
lamp confirms the presence of fan boosted air
in the direction indicated, the indicator lamp off
indicates the absence of fan boosted air in the
Avoid the prolonged use of air
direction indicated.
recirculation - Risk of misting and
For a uniform distribution of air in the
passenger compartment, the three buttons can
be activated simultaneously.
109
Air conditioning On / Off Maximum air conditioning Switching off the system
F Press this button; its indicator lamp
The air conditioning is designed to operate This function allows rapid cooling of the air in comes on and all other indicator
effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed. the passenger compartment. lamps of the system go off.
It enables you to: The system automatically adjusts the
- lower the temperature, in summer, temperature setting to the lowest possible, air This action deactivates all functions of the air
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting distribution towards the centre and outer vents, conditioning system.
in winter, above 3C. air flow to maximum and activates recirculation Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight air
of interior air. flow can still be felt however, resulting from the
Switching on forward movement of the vehicle.
F Press this button, its indicator F Press this button to activate the
lamp comes on. function; its indicator lamp comes
on.
The air conditioning does not operate F Press this button again to deactivate the Avoid driving for too long with the
when the air flow adjustment is set to function and return to the previous settings; system switched off - Risk of misting
off. its indicator lamp goes off. and deterioration of air quality!
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can Pressing any button reactivates the
use recirculation of interior air for a few system with the settings that were
moments. Then return to the intake of previously in use.
exterior air. Automatic visibility
programme
For more information on Front demisting -
Switching off defrosting, refer to the corresponding section.
F Press this button again, its
Switching off the air conditioning may result in

some discomfort (humidity, misting).
110
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning

This air conditioning system operates with Temperature adjustment
the engine running, but the ventilation and its
The driver and front passenger can each
controls are available with just the ignition on.
choose their own temperature setting.
3
Operation of the air conditioning and regulation
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
of temperature, air flow and air distribution in
comfort and not to a precise temperature.
the passenger compartment are automatic.
Press the Air conditioning menu F Press one of these buttons to

button to display the controls for the increase the value.
air conditioning.
F Press one of these buttons to
1. Automatic visibility programme. decrease the value.
2. Recirculation of interior air.
3. Temperature adjustment on driver's side.
4. Temperature adjustment on passenger's It is recommended that you avoid a difference
side. of more than 3 in the settings for left and right.
5. Air distribution adjustment.
6. Air flow adjustment.
7. System off.
8. Air conditioning On/Off.
9. Automatic comfort programme on / off.
10. Maximum air conditioning.
11. Access to the secondary page.
12. Selection of settings for the automatic
comfort programme.
13. Air Quality System (AQS).
14. Mono-zone / Dual-zone.
111
Automatic comfort
programme
F Press this button to activate or To change the current setting, shown by In cold weather with the engine cold,
deactivate the automatic mode of illumination of the corresponding indicator the air flow is increased gradually until
the air conditioning system. lamp, press this button repeatedly until the the system has warmed up, in order
desired setting is displayed: to limit the delivery of cold air into the
When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the passenger compartment.
"Soft": provides soft and quiet
air conditioning system operates automatically: On entering the vehicle, if the interior
62)7 operation by limiting air flow.
the system manages the temperature, air temperature is much colder or warmer
flow and air distribution in the passenger $872 than the comfort value setting, there
compartment in an optimum way according to is no need to alter the value displayed
the comfort level you have selected. "Normal": offers the best in order to reach more quickly the
1250$/ compromise between a comfortable required level of comfort. The system
It is possible to modulate the intensity of the temperature and quiet operation compensates automatically and
automatic comfort programme by choosing one $872 corrects the temperature difference as
(default setting).
of three settings offered in the secondary page, quickly as possible.
accessible from the "OPTIONS" button. "Fast": provides strong and effective
)$67
air flow.
$872
Use the "Normal" or "Fast" setting to assure

the comfort of passengers in the rear seats.
This setting is associated with automatic mode
only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode,
the indicator for the last setting remains on.
Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO
mode if deactivated.
112
Automatic visibility Manual control

programme You can manually adjust one or more settings, Air distribution adjustment
For more information on Front demisting / while retaining automatic control of the other
3
defrosting, refer to the corresponding section. functions: You can modulate the distribution of air in the
- air flow, passenger compartment using these three buttons.
- air distribution. Windscreen and side windows.
"Air Quality System" (AQS) As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator
lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off.
function Centre and side vents.
Using a pollution sensor, this function F Press this button again to
automatically activates recirculation of the reactivate the automatic comfort
interior air once it detects a certain level of programme.
polluting substances in the exterior air. Footwells.
When the air quality returns to a satisfactory Air flow adjustment
level, recirculation of interior air is automatically F Press one of these buttons to
deactivated. increase or decrease the speed Each press on a button activates or deactivates
This function is not designed to detect of the booster fan. the function. The indicator lamp is on when the
unpleasant odours.
button is activated. For a uniform distribution in
The function is automatically activated when The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in the passenger compartment, all three buttons
the screenwash is used or when in reverse progressively as the speed of the fan is can be pressed simultaneously.
gear. increased.
The function does not operate if the ambient In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three
temperature is below 5C, to avoid the risk of By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are buttons are off.
misting of the windscreen and side windows. stopping ventilation.
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan.
To activate or deactivate the function, go to the Avoid driving for too long with the
secondary page by pressing the "OPTIONS" ventilation off - Risk of misting and
button. deterioration of air quality!
113
Air conditioning On / Off Maximum air conditioning Recirculation of the interior

This function allows faster cooling of the air in air
The air conditioning is designed to operate the passenger compartment. The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the
efficiently in all seasons, with the windows The system automatically adjusts the windscreen and side windows.
closed. temperature setting to the lowest possible, air
It allows you: distribution towards the centre and outer vents,
Recirculation of interior air prevents exterior
- in summer, to lower the temperature, air flow to maximum and activates recirculation
odours and smoke from entering the passenger
- in winter, above 3 C, to improve demisting. of interior air.
compartment.
F Press this button to activate the
This function also allows the desired
Switching on function; its indicator lamp comes
temperature in the passenger compartment to
on.
F Press this button; its indicator be reached in the shortest time.
lamp comes on. F Press this button again to deactivate the F Press this button to activate
function and return to the previous settings; the function; its indicator lamp
its indicator lamp goes off. comes on.
The air conditioning cannot operate
when the air flow is set to off. F Press this button again to deactivate the
function; its indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off
F Press this button again; its
Avoid prolonged operation of the air
recirculation - Risk of misting and of
Switching the air conditioning off may cause deterioration of the air quality!
some deterioration of the conditions in the
passenger compartment (humidity, misting).
114
Mono-zone / Dual-zone Ventilation with the ignition on Switching off the system
The passenger temperature setting can be With the ignition on, you can use the ventilation F Press this button; its indicator lamp
3
indexed to the driver's setting (mono-zone system, controlling the air flow and distribution comes on and all other indicator
function). in the passenger compartment. lamps for the system go off.
It is available in the secondary page by This function is also available for a few minutes
pressing the "OPTIONS" button. after switching off the ignition, depending on This action deactivates all functions of the air
the state of charge of the vehicle's battery. conditioning system.
Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight air
F Press this button to activate the flow can still be felt however, resulting from the
"MONO" function; its "ON" status forward movement of the vehicle.
is displayed. You can also make use of the residual
heat in the engine to warm the passenger
The function is automatically deactivated if the compartment, using the temperature
passenger uses their temperature adjustment adjustment buttons.
buttons (dual-zone function). This function does not activate operation of the
air conditioning.
Avoid driving for long periods with

the system off - Risk of misting and
Pressing any button reactivates the
system with the settings that were
previously in use.
115
Front demist - defrost

With manual air With semi-automatic and
conditioning automatic air conditioning
F Adjust the temperature to maximum (red). Automatic visibility programme
F Adjust the air flow to maximum; all the
indicator lamps come on.
F Adjust the air distribution to the F Press this button to demist or
"Windscreen" position; its associated defrost the windscreen and side
indicator lamp comes on. windows as quickly as possible;
F Check that recirculation of interior air is its indicator lamp comes on.
deactivated; its indicator lamp must be off.
F Switch on the air conditioning by pressing The system automatically manages the air
the "A/C" button; its indicator lamp comes conditioning (depending on version), air
on. flow and air intake, and provides optimum
distribution towards the windscreen and side
windows.
F To switch it off, press this button; its
The system allows the manual modification of

air flow without causing automatic deactivation
of the automatic visibility programme.
With Stop & Start, when the demisting,

air conditioning and air flow functions With Stop & Start, when demisting has
are activated, STOP mode is not been activated, the STOP mode is not
available. available.
116
Heated windscreen
3
In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of Switching on
the windscreen, as well as the areas alongside
the windscreen pillars. With the engine running, press this
Without changing the settings for the air button; its indicator lamp comes on.
conditioning system, it allows faster release
of the windscreen wiper blades when they The system is active if the ambient temperature
are frozen to the windscreen and avoids is below 0C.
the accumulation of snow resulting from the
operation of the windscreen wipers.
Switching off
Pressing the button again switches off
the system; its indicator lamp goes off.
The system is automatically deactivated every

time the engine is switched off.
117
Rear screen demist - defrost

Switch off the heating of the rear screen
and door mirrors as soon as you judge it
possible, as reducing the consumption
of electrical current reduces fuel
consumption.
The rear screen demist - defrost

can only operate when the engine is
running.
Switching on
F Press this button to demist/
defrost the rear screen and
(depending on version) the door
mirrors.
The indicator lamp associated with the button
comes on.
Switching off
The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically
to prevent an excessive consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the
demisting/defrosting operation
before it is switched off
automatically by pressing the
button again.
The indicator lamp associated with the button goes off.
118
Front fittings
1. Grab handle
2. Sun visor
3. Card holder
3
4. Storage compartment below the
steering wheel
5. Illuminated glove box
6. Door pockets
7. Scented air freshener
8. USB port
9. Front 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
10. Storage compartment
or
CD player
or
Wireless charger
12. Cup holder
13. Front armrest with storage
compartment
14. Rear 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
16. 230 V socket
119
Sun visor Illuminated glove box Cigarette lighter /

12 V accessory socket
F To use the cigarette lighter, press it in

and wait a few seconds until it pops out
Component which protects against sunlight It can be used for storing a water bottle, the automatically.
from the front or the side, also equipped with an vehicle's handbook pack... F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
illuminated vanity mirror. F To open the glove box, raise the handle. 120 W), remove the cigarette lighter and
F With the ignition on, raise the concealing The glove box is illuminated when the lid is connect a suitable adaptor.
flap; the mirror is illuminated automatically. opened. You can use this socket to connect a telephone
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket It gives access to the passenger's front airbag charger, a bottle warmer...
holder. deactivation switch A. After use, put the cigarette lighterback into
It also gives access to the housing for scented place straight away.
air freshener B cartridges. The connection of an electrical device
not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a
USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor telephone
reception or interference with displays
in the screens.
120
USB port
When connected to the USB port, the
3
portable device charges automatically.
While charging, a message is displayed
if the power consumption of the
portable device exceeds the current
delivered by the vehicle.
The USB port also allows a smartphone to be

connected by MirrorLink or CarPlay , so that
The USB port allows the connection of a certain applications on the smartphone can be
portable device, such as a digital audio player used in the touch screen.
of the iPod type or a USB memory stick.
The USB player reads your audio files, which For more information on Audio and telematics
are transmitted to your audio system and and the USB port in particular, refer to the
played via the vehicle's speakers. corresponding section.
The management of these files is from the
steering mounted controls or the audio system.
121
FOCAL premium Hi-Fi Wireless charger

system This system allows the wireless charging of a
10 speakers incorporating exclusive FOCAL portable device, such as a smartphone, using
technologies offer the pleasure of pure and the principle of magnetic induction, based on
detailed sound inside the vehicle: the Qi 1.1 standard.
- High fidelity woofer / mid-range speakers: The portable device to be charged must be
Polyglass technology delivering balance compatible with the Qi standard, either by
and precise sound. design or by using a compatible holder or shell.
- TNF tweeters: Inverted dome aluminium The charging zone is identified by the
technology giving optimum sound Qi symbol.
dispersion and very detailed treble.
- Sub-woofer: 200 mm triple coil Power
Your vehicle is equipped with a high-fidelity
Flower technology for defined and
acoustic system designed by the French brand
dynamic reproduction of low frequencies.
FOCAL, a specialist in acoustics for more
- 12-way active amplification - 515 Watts:
than 35 years and recognised throughout the
Hybrid Class AB / Class D technology
world for its patented innovations and its unique
providing breadth and finesse in the high
audio signature.
frequency signals, as well as real power in
the bass.
Operation
The charger works with the engine running and
in STOP mode of Stop & Start.
Charging is managed by the smartphone.
For versions with Keyless Entry and Starting,
operation of the charger may be interrupted
when opening a door or switching off the
ignition.
122
Charging Checking operation
3
F First ensure that the charging zone is clear The state of the charge indicator lamp allows If the indicator lamp is on in orange:
of other articles. the operation of the charger to be monitored.
F Place a portable device in the middle of the
charging zone.
Charge
F Once the portable device is detected, the Significance
indicator lamp - remove the portable device, then return it
charge indicator lamp comes on in green.
to the middle of the charging zone.
Off Engine switched off.
or
No compatible portable
- remove the portable device and try again in
device detected.
a quarter of an hour.
Charging finished.
F Charging of the portable device's battery If the problem persists, have the system
then starts. On, green Compatible portable device checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
F Once the portable device's battery is fully detected. workshop.
charged, the charge indicator lamp goes off. Charging...
The system only supports charging one Flashing, Foreign object detected in the
portable device at a time. orange charging zone.
Portable device not well
centred in the charging zone.
On orange Fault with the portable Do not leave metal objects (coins, keys,
device's battery meter. the vehicle's remote control...) in the
Temperature of the portable charging zone while a portable device
device's battery too high. is charging - Risk of overheating or
Charger fault. interruption of the charge!
123
Front armrest
Comfort arrangement for the driver and front passenger.
It includes a cooled storage space.
Opening Storage Closing

F Raise the latch below the lid. The small movable flat top can be fitted at the F Fold both parts of the lid.
The lid opens in two sections. front or at the rear of the storage space.
A ventilation outlet delivers cooled air.
124
Scented air freshener

A complete air freshener system for the passenger compartment. It is supplied by a three-fragrance
3
cartridge.
This system operates only with the engine running.
Activation / Settings Changing the cartridge

Activation and adjustment of settings is done in The scented air freshener is also Access to the cartridge is in the glove box.
the touch screen: managed by the i-Cockpit Amplify
- either directly in the Applications menu, function.
- or by personalising an ambience for the For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify
i-Cockpit Amplify function. function, refer to the corresponding section.
In the Applications menu:
F select "Scented air freshener",

F select a fragrance from the three offered,
F select a delivery intensity to activate the
system,
F With the ignition on, pull the tongue to
or
release the empty cartridge.
F select "OFF" to deactivate it.
F Remove the empty cartridge from its
Modifications are taken into account
housing.
immediately.
The air freshener stops working with the
cartridge removed.
125
Recommendations
Do not discard the original cartridge, which
serves as a blanking plug if the air freshener is
not used.
Retain the cartridge sealing caps which serve
as packaging if the cartridge is not used.
Replacement cartridges are available from
PEUGEOT dealers or from the brand's internet
website.
As a safety measure:
- use only the cartridges designed for
F Remove the two seals from the new the system,
cartridge. - do not try to fit or remove a
F Insert the new cartridge into its housing cartridge when driving,
observing the direction of fitment. - do not try to refill or dismantle the
The air freshener is ready to operate again. cartridges.
Keep cartridges out of the reach of
children or pets.
Avoid contact between the fluid in the
cartridge and the skin or eyes.
In the event of ingestion of the fluid in
the cartridge, consult a doctor, showing
them the product packaging or label.
126
Mats
Fitting Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
F move the seat as far back as possible,
3
pedals:
F unclip the fixings,
- only use mats which are suited to
F remove the mat.
the fixings already present in the
vehicle; these fixings must be used,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
PEUGEOT may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of
the cruise control / speed limiter.
The mats approved by PEUGEOT have
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the two fixings located below the seat.
Refitting
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the
wallet attached. To refit the mat on the driver's side:
The other mats are simply placed on the F position the mat correctly,
carpet. F refit the fixings by pressing,
F check that the mat is secured correctly.
127
Courtesy lamps
Front and rear courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy In permanent lighting mode, the lighting time
lamp comes on gradually: varies according to the circumstances:
- with the ignition off, approximately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, approximately
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
thirtyseconds,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
- on opening a door,
- when the remote control locking button is
used to locate your vehicle. When the courtesy lamp is in the
"permanent lighting" position, the rear
1. Front courtesy lamp courtesy lamp also comes on, except if
2. Front map reading lamps it is in the "permanently off" position.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked, To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put
- when the ignition is switched on, it in the "permanently off" position.
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Front and rear map reading

Permanent lighting.
lamps
F With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
3. Rear courtesy lamp

4. Rear map reading lamps
Take care not to put anything in contact
with the courtesy lamps.
128
Interior mood lighting

The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.
The interior mood lighting switches off

automatically when the sidelamps are switched
3
off.
The interior mood lighting can be

activated or deactivated and its
brightness adjusted in the Driving
menu of the touch screen.
The interior mood lighting is also

managed by the i-Cockpit Amplify
At night, the interior mood lighting comes on Depending on version, the interior mood function.
automatically when the sidelamps are switched lighting includes:
on. - two LEDs located in the front courtesy
lamp,
- a light source in the storage compartment
at the front of the centre console,
- a light source for each of the front
footwells,
- light guides on the front door panels and
the sides of the centre console,
- illuminated bezels for the front cup holders,
- a light source for each of the front door
pockets,
- illuminated rails for the panoramic sunroof
blind.
129
Rear seats
Bench seat with a fixed cushion and split folding backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot load space.
Rear head restraints

The rear head restraints can be removed.
Never drive with passengers seated at
the rear when the head restraints are
To remove a head restraint: removed; they must be in place and in
F pull the head restraint as far up as it will go, the high position.
F press the lug A to release the head The head restraint for the centre seat
restraint and remove it completely, and those for outer seats are not
F stow the head restraint. interchangeable.
To refit a head restraint:

F introduce the rods of the head restraint
They have two positions: into the guides of the corresponding seat
- a high position, for when the seat is in backrest,
use: F push the head restraint down as far as it
F pull the head restraint fully up. will go,
- a low position, for stowing, when the seat F press the lug A and then push the head
is not in use: restraint fully down.
F press the lug A to release the head
restraint and push it fully down.
130
Folding the backrests Folding from the passenger compartment
3
First: F Press the backrest release grip 1.
F lower the head restraints,
F if necessary, move the front seats forward,
F fold away the rear armrest,
F check that nothing or no person might
interfere with the folding of the backrests
(clothing, luggage, ...),
F check that the outer seat belts are lying
correctly on the backrests.
Each section of the backrest has two release

controls:
- a grip 1 on the outer edge of the backrest, F Guide the backrest 3 down to the horizontal
- a lever 2 on the boot side trim. position.
The folding of the backrest is
accompanied by a slight lowering of the
corresponding cushion.
To obtain a flat surface, it is necessary
to place the adjustable boot floor in the
high position.
When the backrest is released, the red
indicator is visible in the release grip.
Folding or unfolding the seat backrests
must only be done with the vehicle
stationary.
131
Folding from the boot Returning the backrests to

their original position
F Pull the backrest release lever 2 towards
you. First check that the outer seat belts are
The backrest 3 folds fully onto the cushion. lying vertically alongside the backrest
latching rings.
F Put the backrest 3 in the upright position

and push on it to latch it home.
F Check that the red indicator is no longer
visible in the release grip 1.
F Ensure that the outer seat belts are not
trapped during the manoeuvre.
Caution, a backrest that has not latched

correctly compromises the safety of
passengers in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
The contents of the boot may be thrown
forward - Risk of serious injury!
132
Rear fittings
230 V / 50 Hz power socket 12 V accessory socket
Connect only one device at a time to
3
the socket (no extension or multi-way
connector).
Connect only devices with class II
insulation (shown on the device).
Do not use a device with a metal case
(electric shaver, ...).
As a safety measure, when electrical
consumption is high and when required
by the vehicle's electrical system
(particular weather conditions, electrical
A 230 V / 50 Hz socket (maximum power: overload...), the current supply to F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
150 W) is located on the back of the centre the socket will be cut off; the green 120 W), lift the cover and connect a
console under a protective cover. indicator lamp goes off. suitable adaptor.
This socket works with the engine running, as
well as in STOP mode with Stop & Start.
F Raise the protective cover.
F Check that the green indicator lamp is on.
The connection of an electrical device
F Connect your multimedia or other electrical
device (telephone charger, laptop
USB charger, may adversely affect the
computer, CD-DVD player, baby food
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
warmer...).
causing faults such as poor telephone
In the event of a fault with the socket, the green in the screens.
warning lamp flashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
133
Rear armrest Ski flap

Comfort and storage arrangement for rear Arrangement for storing and transporting long
passengers. objects.
F Lower the rear armrest for a more Opening

comfortable position.
F Lower the rear armrest.
The armrest incorporates two cup holders.
F Pull the flap handle downwards.
F Lower the flap.
F Load the objects from inside the boot.
134
Boot fittings
1. Load space cover
2. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
3. Boot lamp
3
4. Rear seat folding controls
5. Hooks
6. Stowing rings
7. Adjustable boot floor (2 positions)
8. Storage well / Tool box under the floor
The stowing rings are designed for

securing luggage by attaching a
retaining net to the rings.
Such nets are available as an option or
as an accessory.
For more information, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer.
For the installation of a high load
retaining net, refer to the corresponding
section.
135
Luggage cover 12 V accessory socket
It is in two parts: To remove the luggage cover: F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
- a fixed part with an open storage space, F unhook the two cords, 120 W), remove the cap and connect an
- a mobile part which rises as the tailgate F raise the moving part slightly, then unclip it appropriate adaptor.
opens, with an open storage space. on each side, F Switch on the ignition.
F unclip the fixed part on each side, then
remove the luggage cover.
The luggage cover can be stowed under the
boot floor. The connection of an electrical device
Under sudden deceleration, objects USB charger, may adversely affect the
placed on the luggage cover may be operation of vehicle electrical systems,
turned into projectiles. causing faults such as poor telephone
in the screens.
136
High load retaining net
Behind the front seats Behind the rear seats

F Fold the rear seats. F Remove the luggage cover.
F Remove the cover trims located on each F Remove the cover trims on each side,
This removable net allows the use of the entire side of the roof. located high up in the roof.
loading volume up to the roof: F Position the net's upper hooks in the roof, F Position the net's upper hooks in the roof,
- behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear on each side in turn. on each side in turn
seats are folded, F Attach the net straps to the lower F Attach the net straps to the lower rings,
- behind the rear seats (row 2) when the anchorages, located on the front seat outer located on each of the boot side trims.
luggage cover is removed. runners. F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
It provides protection for the occupants of the F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
vehicle in the event of sudden braking.
Once fitted, the net does not prevent

folding of the rear seat backrests.
137
Adjustable boot floor

This two-position floor allows you to optimise To change the height of the floor:
the volume of the boot by means of the outer F Push the floor fully forwards then use the
stops placed on the sides: side stops to move the floor to the desired
- High position (100 kg max): you obtain a position.
flat floor up to the front seats, when the
rear seats are folded.
- Low position (150 kg max): maximum boot
volume.
On certain versions, the adjustable boot To support the floor in the raised position:
floor cannot be fitted in the low position. F From the high position, raise the floor
towards the load space cover.
F Take it past the retractable stops, then rest
the floor on these stops.
138
Sliding boot floor Storage well
F From the high position, press the handle
3
and pull the boot floor towards you, as far
as it will go.
This position facilitates loading and unloading
of the boot.
Maximum load: 100 kg.
F Raise the boot floor fully for access to the Depending on version, this houses:
storage well. - a temporary puncture repair kit with the
vehicle's tools,
- a spare wheel with the vehicle's tools.
It also allows storage of the luggage cover.
139
Boot lamp
This comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and goes off automatically when the
boot is closed.
The lighting time varies according to the

circumstances:
- when the ignition is off, approximately
tenminutes,
- in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds,
- when the engine is running, no limit.
140
Exterior lighting control stalk

Main lighting
Selection of main lighting mode Without AUTO lighting Headlamp dipping
F Turn the ring A to place the desired symbol

against the mark.
4
Lighting off (ignition off) /
Daytime running lamps (engine running).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Daytime running lamps / Dipped
beam / Main beam.
Sidelamps only.
With AUTO lighting
F Pull the stalk B toward you to switch
between dipped and main beam
Dipped or main beam headlamps. headlamps.
In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
Displays
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
"Highway" function
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
On versions fitted with "Full LED"
lighting selected is on.
technology headlamps, the range
of the dipped beam headlamps is A fault with a lamp is signalled by
automatically increased once the the permanent illumination of this
speed of the vehicle is above 68 mph warning lamp, accompanied by the
(110km/h). display of a message and an audible
signal.
141
Foglamps
In good or rainy weather, by both
day and night, use of the front and
rear foglamps is prohibited. In these
situations, the power of their beams
may dazzle other drivers. They should
only be used in fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, you should
switch on the foglamps and dipped
beam headlamps manually, as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
Rear foglamps Front and rear foglamps light.
Do not forget to switch off the foglamps
when they are no longer necessary.
The main or dipped beam headlamps The sidelamps or dipped or main beam
must be on. headlamps must be on.
Rotate and release ring C: Rotate and release ring C:

F forward to switch on the rear foglamps. F forward a first time to switch on the front
F backward to switch them off. foglamps,
F forward a second time to switch on the rear
foglamps,
F backward a first time to switch off the rear
foglamps,
F backward a second time to switch off the
front foglamps.
142
Daytime running lamps /

Sidelamps
Switching off the lighting In some weather conditions (e.g. low
when switching off the ignition temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
When the ignition is switched off, all of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
lamps switch off immediately, except for the
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
4
dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide-
have been on for a few minutes.
me-home lighting is activated.
Switching on the lighting

after switching off the Travelling abroad
ignition If using your vehicle in a country that
To reactivate the lighting control stalk, drives on the other side of the road, the The light-emitting diodes (LEDs) in these
turn the ring A to position "0" - lighting headlamps must be adjusted to avoid lamps, front and rear, come on automatically
off, then to the position of your choice. dazzling on-coming drivers. when the engine is started.
When the driver's door is opened, a Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a They provide the following functions:
temporary audible signal warns you that qualified workshop. - Daytime running lamps (lighting control
the vehicle's lighting is on. stalk at position "0" or "AUTO" with
They switch off automatically after a adequate light level).
period which depends on the state of - Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at
charge of the battery (entry to energy position"AUTO" with a low ambient light
economy mode). level or "Sidelamps only" or "Main or
dipped beam headlamps").
143
Direction indicators
Parking lamps
Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of
the sidelamps on the traffic side only.
F Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the Three flashes of the direction
point of resistance. indicators
F Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the
F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
point of resistance.
resistance; the direction indicators will F Depending on version, within one minute
If you forget to cancel the flash 3 times. of switching off the ignition, operate the
direction indicators for more than lighting control stalk up or down depending
On versions fitted with LED direction indicators,
twentyseconds, the volume of the on the traffic side (for example: when
the line of LEDs is illuminated sequentially.
audible signal will increase if the speed parking on the left; lighting control stalk
The brightness of the daytime runnning lamps
is above 40 mph (60 km/h). upwards; the right hand sidelamps are on).
is reduced during sequential operation of the
This is confirmed by an audible signal and
direction indicators.
illumination of the corresponding direction
indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel.
To switch off the parking lamps, return the
lighting control stalk to the central position.
144
Headlamp beam height adjustment

Manual adjustment of Automatic adjustment of
halogen headlamps "Full LED" technology
headlamps
4
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, the beams of the halogen headlamps This system automatically adjusts the height
Do not touch the "Full LED" technology
should be adjusted according to the load in the of the beams from this type of headlamp,
headlamps. Risk of electrocution!
vehicle. according to the load in the vehicle, to avoid
Have the system checked by a
0 Driver or driver + front passenger. causing a nuisance to other road users.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
- Driver + front passenger + rear
workshop.
passengers. If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
1 5 people. comes on in the instrument panel,
- 5 people + a load in the boot. accompanied by a message and an
2 Driver + a load in the boot. audible signal.
The system then places the headlamp beams

in the lowest position.
The initial setting is position "0".
145
Automatic illumination of headlamps

When a low level of ambient light is detected by a sunshine sensor, the number plate Automatic guide-me-home
lamps,sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action
on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic
lighting
operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched With the "Automatic illumination of headlamps"
off, the lamps are switched off automatically. function activated, under low ambient light, the
sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and door
Operating fault mirror spotlamps come on automatically when
the ignition is switched off.
In the event of a malfunction of the
sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
on, this warning lamp is displayed in Activation, deactivation and the duration of the
the instrument panel accompanied by guide-me-home lighting are set in the vehicle
an audible signal and/or a message. parameters menu in the screen.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Activation Do not cover the sunshine sensor,

coupled with the rain sensor and
F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position.
located at the top centre of the
Activation of the function is accompanied by
windscreen behind the rear view mirror;
the display of a message.
the associated functions would no
longer be controlled.
Deactivation
F Turn the ring to another position. In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
Deactivation of the function is accompanied by may detect sufficient light. In this
the display of a message. case, the lighting will not come on
automatically.
146
Manual guide-me-home Automatic exterior

lighting welcome lighting
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam With the "Automatic illumination of headlamps"
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been function activated, under low ambient light, the
switched off makes the driver's exit easier sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and door
when the light is poor. mirror spotlamps come on automatically when
4
the vehicle is unlocked.
Activation, deactivation and the duration of the

exterior welcome lighting are set in the vehicle
parameters menu in the screen.
Switching on Switching off

F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps For versions without "Automatic illumination
using the lighting stalk. of headlamps", the manual guide-me-home
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the lighting switches off automatically after
function off. 30seconds.
For versions with "Automatic illumination of
headlamps", the period of operation of the
manual guide-me-home lighting is the same
as that set for the automatic guide-me-home
lighting.
147
Remote operation of Door mirror spotlamps

exterior lighting
Availability of this function depends on version. To make your approach to the vehicle easier, Switching on
these illuminate:
F Make a short press on this When the front courtesy lamp
- the zones facing the drivers and
remote control button. switch is in this position,
passengers doors,
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and the spotlamps come on
rearward of the front doors. automatically:
The sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps,
- when you unlock the vehicle,
number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps
- when you open a door,
come on for 30 seconds.
- when you use the remote control to locate
the vehicle.
Pressing again before the end of the timed Whatever the position of the front courtesy
period switches off the lighting immediately. lamp switch, they also come on with the
exterior welcome lighting and the guide-me-
home lighting.
Switching off
They go off automatically after 30 seconds.
148
Automatic headlamp dipping

System which automatically changes between dipped and main beam according to the ambient light level and the driving conditions, using a camera
located at the top of the windscreen.
This system is a driving aid.

The driver remains responsible for the
vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the
prevailing conditions of light, visibility,
4
traffic and observation of driving and
vehicle regulations.
The system will be operational as soon as

you have exceeded 15 mph (25km/h).
If the speed drops below 9 mph (15km/h),
the system no longer operates.
149
Activation Pause The system may suffer interference or

F Turn the lighting control stalk ring to the If the situation requires a change of headlamp not work correctly:
"AUTO" position. beam, the driver can take over at any time. - under conditions of poor visibility
F In the Driving menu, select F Flashing the headlamps pauses the (falling snow, heavy rain or thick
"Driving assistance", then function and the system changes to fog, ...),
"Automatic headlamp dip". "automatic illumination of headlamps" - if the windscreen is dirty, misted or
mode: obscured (by a sticker, ...) in front of
- if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" the camera,
The state of the system stays in memory when indicator lamps are on, the system - if the vehicle is facing highly
the ignition is switched off. changes to main beam, reflective signs.
- if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator
Operation lamps are on, the system changes to
Once the function is activated, the system dipped beam.
The system is not able to detect:
operates as follows: To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps
- road users that do not have their
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if again.
own lighting, such as pedestrians,
the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of
- vehicles whose lighting is obscured
the main beam headlamps:
(for example: vehicles running
- dipped beam is
behind a safety barrier on a
maintained, this indicator
lamp comes on in the
Deactivation motorway),
- vehicles at the top or bottom of a
instrument panel. F In the Driving menu, select the steep slope, on twisty roads, on
"Driving assistance" tab, then crossroads.
If the ambient light level is very low and the
"Automatic headlamp dip"; the
traffic conditions permit:
system changes to "automatic
- main beam comes illumination headlamps" mode.
on automatically: this
indicator lamp comes on
in the instrument panel.
150
Cornering lighting
Activation / Deactivation
The cornering lighting can be
activated or deactivated in the
Switching on
This system starts:
- when the corresponding direction indicator
4
Present on vehicles fitted with "Full LED" With cornering lighting is switched on,
technology headlamps, this system makes use or
of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate - from a certain angle of rotation of the
the inside of a bend, when the main or dipped steering wheel.
beam headlamps are on and the vehicle speed
is below 25 mph (approximately 40 km/h)
(urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking Switching off
manoeuvres...).
The system does not operate:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
- above 25 mph (40 km/h),
- when reverse gear is engaged.
Without cornering lighting
151
Wiper control stalk

Programming Windscreen wiper
Your vehicle may also include some functions Without AUTO wiping A. Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower
that can be configured: the stalk to the desired position.
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
Fast wiping (heavy rain).
Normal wiping (moderate rain).
Intermittent wiping (proportional to

the speed of the vehicle).
Park.
Single wipe (press downwards or pull

In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice the stalk briefly towards you, then
or frost present on the windscreen, release).
around the wiper arms and blades and With AUTO wiping
the windscreen seal, before operating
or
the wipers.
Automatic wiping (press

down, then release).
Do not operate the wipers on a dry

Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly towards you).
windscreen. Under extremely hot or
cold conditions, ensure that the wiper
blades are not stuck to the windscreen
before operating the wipers.
152
Rear wiper
Reverse gear Windscreen wash
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation automatically if the
windscreen wipers are operating.
4
The function is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle settings menu in the screen.
This function is activated by default.
B. Rear wiper selection ring: turn the ring

to place the desired symbol against the In the event of snow or hard frost, F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you.
marking. deactivate the automatic rear wiper via The screenwash and then the wiper operate for
the vehicle settings menu in the screen. a fixed time.
Park.
The screenwash includes a wiper blade

system with integral washer jets called
Intermittent wipe.
"Magic Wash".
The screenwash fluid is sprayed from
all along the length of the wiper blade;
Wash-wipe.
this improves visibility and reduces the
consumption of screenwash fluid.
Turn the ring fully; the rear screen wash, then
the rear wiper automatically operate for a set
duration.
153
Special position of the

windscreen wipers
Screenwash fluid low level
When the low fluid level is reached in the
reservoir, this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, accompanied by a
message and an audible signal.
The warning lamp come son when the ignition

is switched on, or every time the stalk is
operated, until the reservoir is refilled.
Next time you stop, refill the screenwash fluid This position permits release of the windscreen
To maintain the effectiveness of the
reservoir. wiper blades.
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
- handle them with care,
wiper blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
- clean them regularly using soapy
To avoid damaging the wiper blades or release the wiper blades from the windscreen.
water,
the pump, do not operate the screenwash - avoid using them to retain
if the screenwash reservoir is empty. cardboard on the windscreen,
Only operate the screenwash if there F Any action on the wiper stalk within - replace them at the first signs of
is no risk of the fluid freezing on the oneminute after switching off the ignition wear.
windscreen and hindering visibility. places the wiper blades vertically on the
Always use screenwash fluid suitable screen.
for low temperatures during the winter F To park the wiper blades again, switch on
period. the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
154
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers operate automatically, adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall without any action on the part of the driver.
Detection of rainfall is by means of a sensor at the top centre of the windscreen, behind the rear view mirror.
Operating fault
If a fault occurs with the automatic rain
sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
4
intermittent mode.
Have them checked by PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with

the sunshine sensor and located in the top
Switching on Switching off centre of the windscreen.
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
F Briefly push the control stalk down. F Briefly push the control stalk down again, wipers when using an automatic car wash.
A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has or place the control stalk in another In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
been accepted. position (Int, 1 or 2). windscreen is completely clear of ice
before activating the automatic rain
This warning lamp comes on in the This warning lamp goes off in the sensitive wipers.
instrument panel, accompanied by a instrument panel, accompanied by a
message. message.
The automatic rain sensitive windscreen

wipers must be reactivated by pushing
the control stalk downwards, if the
ignition has been off for more than
oneminute.
155
Safety
General safety recommendations

Labels are applied at various We draw your attention to Installation of accessory
points on your vehicle. They carry the following points: radio communication
safety warnings as well as vehicle transmitters
- The fitting of electrical equipment
identification information. Do not
or accessories not listed by Before installing a radio communication
remove them: they form an integral part
PEUGEOTmay cause excessive transmitter, you must contact a
of your vehicle.
current consumption and faults and PEUGEOT dealer for the specification
failures with the electrical system of of transmitters which can be fitted
your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT (frequency, maximum power,
dealer for information on the range aerial position, specific installation
For any work on your vehicle, use of recommended accessories. requirements), in line with the Vehicle
a qualified workshop that has the - As a safety measure, access to Electromagnetic Compatibility
technical information, skills and the diagnostic socket, used for Directive(2004/104/EC).
equipment required, all of which a the vehicle's electronic systems,
PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. is reserved strictly for PEUGEOT
dealers or qualified workshops,
equipped with the special tools
required (risk of malfunctions of the
vehicle's electronic systems that Depending on the legislation in force in
could cause breakdowns or serious the country, certain safety equipment
accidents). The manufacturer may be compulsory: high visibility
cannot be held responsible if this safety vests, warning triangles,
advice is not followed. breathalysers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
- Any modification or adaptation fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps
not intended or authorised by at the rear of the vehicle...
Automobiles PEUGEOT or
carried out without meeting the
technical requirements defined
by the manufacturer would lead
to the suspension of the legal and
contractual warranties.
156
Safety
Hazard warning lamps Horn
Visual warning with all of the direction

indicators flashing to alert other road users to a
vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.
F Press this button, all of the direction
Audible warning to alert other road users to an
imminent danger.
F Press the central part of the multifunction
steering wheel.
5
indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the force of deceleration, the hazard warning
lamps come on automatically. They switch off
automatically the first time you accelerate.
It is also possible to switch them off by pressing
the switch on the dashboard.
157
Safety
Emergency or assistance call

Peugeot Connect SOS
In an emergency, press this
If an impact is detected by the airbag
button for more than 2 seconds.
control unit, and independently of
Flashing of the green LED and
the deployment of any airbags, an
a voice message confirm that
emergency call is made automatically.
the call has been made to the
"Peugeot Connect SOS" call
centre*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels If you benefit from the Peugeot
the request. Connect Packs offer with the SOS and
The green LED goes off. assistance pack included, there are
additional services available to you in
The green LED remains on (without flashing) your MyPeugeot personal space, via
when communication is established. the Internet website for your country.
It goes off at the end of the call.
"Peugeot Connect SOS" immediately locates

your vehicle, starts communication with you in
* Subject to the general conditions for the
your language**, and where necessary sends
service available from dealers and subject to
the appropriate public emergency services**. In
technological and technical limitations.
countries where the service is not available, or
when the locating service has been expressly
declined, the call is sent directly to the ** Depending on the geographical cover of
emergency services (112) without the vehicle "Peugeot Connect SOS", "Peugeot
location. Connect Assistance" and the official national
language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT
CONNECT services is available from dealers
or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
158
Safety
Peugeot Connect Assistance

Operation of the system Press this button for more than
If you purchased your vehicle outside
When the ignition is switched 2seconds to request assistance
the PEUGEOT dealer network, we
on, the green LED comes on for if the vehicle breaks down.
invite you to have a dealer check the
3 seconds indicating that the A voice message confirms that
configuration of these services and, if
system is operating correctly. the call has been made**.
desired, modified to suit your wishes.
For all countries except Russia, Belarus In a multi-lingual country, configuration
and Kazakhstan. Pressing this button again immediately cancels is possible in the official national
The red indicator lamp flashes the request. language of your choice.
5
then goes off: there is a system The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
fault. message.
The red indicator lamp is on continuously:
For technical reasons and in particular
replace the back-up battery.
Geo-location to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT
For Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan. CONNECT services" services to
The red indicator lamp is on customers, the manufacturer reserves
continuously: there is a system the right to carry out updates to the
fault. vehicle's on-board telematic system.
The red indicator lamp flashes: replace the You can deactivate geo-location by
back-up battery. simultaneously pressing the "Peugeot
In either case, the emergency and assistance Connect SOS" and "Peugeot Connect
calls may not function. Assistance" buttons, followed by a press on
"Peugeot Connect Assistance" to confirm. ** D
epending on the geographical cover of
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
"Peugeot Connect SOS", "Peugeot
possible. To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously Connect Assistance" and the official national
press the "Peugeot Connect SOS" and language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
"Peugeot Connect Assistance" buttons The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT
A fault with the system does not again, followed by a press on "Peugeot CONNECT services is available from dealers
prevent the vehicle being driven. Connect Assistance" to confirm. or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
159
Safety
Electronic stability programme (ESC)

A set of the following Electronic Stability systems:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- emergency braking assistance,
- wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction control,
- dynamic stability control (DSC).
- trailer stability assist (TSA).
Definitions
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Emergency braking assistance Dynamic stability control (DSC)
and electronic brake force In an emergency, this system enables you to If there is a difference between the path
distribution (EBFD) reach the optimum braking pressure more followed by the vehicle and that required by the
These systems improve the stability and quickly and therefore reduce the stopping driver, this system monitors each wheel and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking distance. automatically acts on the brake of one or more
and contribute towards improved control in It is triggered in relation to the speed at which wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a to the required path, within the limits of the laws
surfaces. reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an of physics.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
emergency braking.
The electronic brake force distribution system
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) Trailer stability assist (TSA)

This system (also known as Traction Control) This system allows control of the vehicle to be
optimises traction in order to avoid wheel retained when towing a trailer, so as to avoid
slip by acting on the brakes of the driving the risk of snaking.
wheels and on the engine. It also improves It is available on vehicles with factory-fitted
the directional stability of the vehicle on trailer wiring (preparation for towbar option
acceleration. or the towbar with quickly-detachable towball
pack).
160
Safety
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force Intelligent traction control
distribution (EBFD) system
The fixed illumination of this warning Depending on version, your vehicle has a
Normal operation of the ABS may make
lamp signals that there is a fault with system to help driving on snow: intelligent
itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
the ABS. traction control.
pedal.
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive This system detects situations of difficult
carefully at moderate speed. surface grip that could make it difficult to move
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified off or make progress on deep fresh snow or
workshop as soon as possible. compacted snow.
In emergency braking, press very
5
In these situations, the intelligent traction
firmly and maintain this pressure.
control limits the amount of wheel spin to
Illumination of this warning lamp, coupled
provide the best traction and trajectory control
with the STOP and ABS warning
for your vehicle.
lamps, accompanied by the display of a
message and an audible signal, signals When changing wheels (tyres and
that there is a fault with the electronic The use of snow tyres is strongly
rims), ensure that these are approved
brake force distribution (EBFD). recommended on surfaces offering low
for your vehicle.
levels of adhesion.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
161
Safety
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) / Dynamic stability control (DSC) ASR / DSC

These systems offer increased safety
in normal driving, but they should not
Operation Reactivation
encourage the driver to take extra risks
These systems are activated automatically The ASR system is reactivated automatically or drive at high speed.
every time the vehicle is started. every time the ignition is switched back on or It is in conditions of reduced grip
They come into operation in the event of a from 30 mph (50 km/h). (rain, snow, black ice) that the risk of
problem of grip or trajectory. Below 30 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it loss of grip increases. It is therefore
manually: important for your safety to keep these
This is indicated by flashing of this systems activated in all conditions, and
Reactivation is done in the Driving
warning lamp in the instrument panel. particularly in difficult conditions.
It is confirmed by the display of a The correct operation of these
message. systems depends on observation of
Deactivation the manufacturer's recommendations
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle regarding as much the wheels (tyres
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft Operating fault and rims), braking and electronic
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the components as the assembly and repair
Illumination of this warning lamp,
ASR system, so that the wheels can turn freely procedures used by PEUGEOT dealers.
accompanied by the display of a
and regain grip. To benefit in full from the effectiveness
message and an audible signal,
Reactivate the system as soon as the level of of these systems in wintry conditions,
indicates a fault with the system.
grip permits. the vehicle must be fitted with four snow
tyres, allowing the vehicle to retain
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified neutral behaviour on the road.
Deactivation is done in the Driving workshop to have the systems checked.
It is confirmed by the display of a message.

After an impact, have these systems
The ASR system no longer acts on the
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
operation of the engine or the brakes in the
qualified workshop.
event of an involuntary change of trajectory.
162
Safety
Trailer stability assist

When towing, this system reduces the risk of the vehicle or trailer snaking.
It is available on vehicles with factory-fitted trailer wiring (preparation for towbar option or the towbar with quickly-detachable towball pack).
Operation Operating fault

The system is activated automatically when the Should a fault occur with the system,
ignition is switched on. The trailer stability assist system offers
this warning lamp comes on in the
The electronic stability programme (ESC) must increased safety in normal driving,
instrument panel, accompanied by
provided that the recommendations on
5
not have any faults. the display of a message and an
Between 36 and 100 mph (60 and 160 km/h), if towing a trailer are observed. It should
audible signal.
the system detect oscillations (snaking) in the not encourage the driver to take risks,
movement of the trailer, it acts on the brakes to If you continue to tow a trailer, reduce your such as towing a trailer in adverse
stabilise the trailer and, if necessary, reduces speed and drive carefully! operating conditions (overloading,
engine power to slow down the vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified failure to observe the trailer nose
workshopto have the system checked. weight, worn or under-inflated tyres,
faulty braking system, .) or drive at
The correction is signalled by the too high a speed.
flashing of this indicator lamp in the In certain certain cases, oscillation of
instrument panel and illumination of the trailer may not be detected by the
the brake lamps. ESC system, particularly with a light
trailer.
For information on the weights and towed When driving on slippery or poor
loads, refer to the "Technical data" section or surfaces, the system may not be able to
the registration certificate for your vehicle. prevent sudden snaking of the trailer.
For advice on driving safely when Towing
atrailer, refer to the corresponding section.
163
Safety
Advanced Grip Control

Special patented traction control system which Operating modes
improves traction on snow, mud and sand.
This system, the operation of which has been
optimised for each situation, allows you to
manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip
(encountered during touring use).
Associated with all-season M+S (Mud and

Snow) tyres, this system offers a compromise
between safety, adhesion and traction.
The accelerator pedal should be pressed Standard (ESC) Snow

sufficiently to allow the system to use the power
This mode is calibrated for a low level of wheel This mode adapts its strategy to the conditions
of the engine. Operation at high engine speeds
spin, based on the different levels of grip of grip encountered for each of the two front
is completely normal.
normally encountered on the road. wheels on moving off.
(mode active up to 30 mph (50 km/h))
A five-position selector knob allows you to
F Place the knob in this position. F Place the knob in this position.
choose the setting best suited to the driving
conditions encountered.
An indicator lamp associated with each mode
comes on, accompanied by the display of a
message to confirm your choice. Every time the ignition is switched off,
the system automatically resets to this
mode.
164
Safety
You can deactivate certain

ESC systems (ASR and DSC)
by turning the knob to the
"OFF" position.
These systems are reactivated

automatically from 30 mph (50 km/h) or
every time the ignition is switched on.
5
Driving advice
All terrain (mud, damp grass, ...) Sand
Your vehicle is designed principally to
This mode allows little spin on the two driving drive on tarmac roads but it allows you
This mode, when moving off, allows to drive on other less passable terrain
wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to
considerable spin on the wheel with the least occasionally.
move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck
grip to optimise clearing of the mud and to However, it does not permit off-road
in the sand.
regain grip. At the same time, the wheel with driving such as:
(mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h))
the most grip is controlled in such a way as to - crossing and driving on terrain
transmit as much torque as possible. which could damage the underbody
F Place the knob in this position.
When moving, the system optimises wheel spin or strip away components (fuel
to respond to the driver's requirements as fully pipe, fuel cooler...) due to obstacles
as possible. or stones in particular,
(mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h)) - driving on terrain with steep
Do not use the other modes on sand as
gradients and poor grip,
the vehicle may become stuck.
- crossing a stream.
F Place the knob in this position.
165
Safety
Hill Assist Descent Control

System that provides assistance when Operation
descending on loose or soft surfaces (gravel,
mud...) or a steep gradient. Switching on
This system reduces the risk of slip or loss
By default, the system is not selected. F Once the vehicle starts its descent, you
of control of the vehicle when descending,
The state of the system does not stay in can release the accelerator and brake
whether going forward or in reverse.
memory when the ignition is switched off. pedals, speed is regulated by the system:
During a descent, it assists the driver in
The driver can select the system with the
maintaining a constant speed, depending
engine running and the vehicle stationary or at
on the gear engaged, while progressively - if the gearbox is in first or second
speeds of up to about 30 mph (50 km/h).
releasing the brakes. gear, speed is reduced and the
indicator flashes rapidly,
- if the gearbox is in neutral or if
the clutch pedal is depressed,
speed is reduced and the
indicator flashes slowly; in this
case, the speed maintained
during the descent is lower.
If you release the accelerator and brake pedals

F With the speed below 30 mph
while the vehicle is stationary on a gradient, the
(50 km/h), press this button until
system will release the brakes for progressive
its indicator lamp comes on to
movement of the vehicle.
select the system; this indicator
The brake lamps come on automatically when
appears in grey in the instrument
the system is regulating the speed of the
panel.
vehicle.
F With the speed below 18 mph (30 km/h),
the system becomes active; this indicator
comes on in green in the instrument panel.
166
Safety
Operating fault
Switching off
If a fault occurs with the system,
If the speed of the vehicle exceeds 18 mph
this warning lamp comes on,
(30km/h), regulation is automatically paused
accompanied by the display of a
and the indicator in the instrument panel
message in the instrument panel.
changes back to grey, but the indicator lamp in
the button still stays on. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
Regulation resumes automatically as soon as dealer or a qualified workshop.
the speed of the vehicle drops below 18mph
5
(30 km/h), provided that the conditions of
gradient and release of the pedals are met.
You can press the accelerator or brake pedal
at any time.
F Press this button until its indicator lamp
For the system to operate, the slope
goes off; the indicator goes off in the
must be steeper than 5%.
instrument panel.
The system can be used with the
Above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system is
gearbox in neutral.
automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in
Otherwise, engage a gear appropriate
the button goes off.
for the speed of the vehicle, to avoid the
engine stalling.
With an automatic gearbox, the system
can be used with the selector at N, D The system is not available:
or R. - if the speed of the vehicle is above
43 mph (70 km/h),
- if the speed of the vehicle is
When the system is regulating, being controlled by the Dynamic
the Active Safety Brake system is cruise control with Stop function,
automatically deactivated. depending on the type of gearbox.
167
Safety
Seat belts
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a Fastening Height adjustment
pretensioning and force limiting system.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so
improving their protection.
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the F To adjust the anchorage point, squeeze the
buckle. control A and slide it to one of the notches.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
168
Safety
Rear seat belts

Front seat belts not fastened / Seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp unfastened warning lamps
display
When the ignition is switched on, this
warning lamp comes on in the seat
belt and passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display, if the driver
and/or the front passenger has not
fastened their seat belt.
5
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h),
this warning lamp flashes for two minutes
accompanied by an audible signal. Once these
two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp
The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point
remains on until the driver and/or the front
inertia reel seat belt.
passenger fastens their seat belt.
The outer rear seats are fitted with pyrotechnic
1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened / pretensioners and force limiters.
unfastened warning lamp.
2. Front left seat belt warning lamp.
3. Front right seat belt warning lamp.
4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
The corresponding warning lamp 2 or 3 comes

on in red on the seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display if the seat belt is
not fastened or is unfastened.
169
Safety
Fastening Seat belt unfastened warning Seat belt unfastened warning

F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the lamp lamps display
buckle. This warning lamp comes on in
F Check that the seat belt is fastened the seat belt and passenger's front
correctly by pulling the strap. airbag warning lamps display,
when one or more rear passengers
unfasten their seat belt.
Unfastening From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h),

F Press the red button on the buckle. this warning lamp flashes for two minutes
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in. accompanied by an audible signal. Once the
two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp
remains on until one or more rear passengers
fasten their seat belt.
When the ignition is switched on, with the
engine running or when the vehicle is moving at
less than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding
warning lamps 4, 5 and 6 come on in red for
approximately 30 seconds, if the seat belt is not
fastened.
When the vehicle is moving at more than
12mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning
lamp 4, 5 or 6 comes on in red, accompanied
by an audible signal and the display of a
message, if a rear passenger has unfastened
their seat belt.
170
Safety
Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers use In order to be effective, a seat belt must: Recommendations for children
the seat belts correctly and that they are all - be tightened as close to the body as
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
fastened before setting off. possible,
less than 12 years old or shorter than one
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth
and a half metres.
always fasten your seat belt, even for short movement, checking that it does not
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
journeys. twist,
than one person.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as - be used to restrain only one person,
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
they will not fulfill their role fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
For more information on Child seats, refer to
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel - not be converted or modified to avoid
permitting automatic adjustment of the length affecting its performance.
5
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is In accordance with current safety
stowed automatically when not in use. regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's
Before and after use, ensure that the seat seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with
belt is reeled in correctly. the skills and equipment needed, which a
The lower part of the strap must be PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
In the event of an impact
positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. Have your seat belts checked regularly by a Depending on the nature and seriousness
The upper part must be positioned in the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, of the impact, the pretensioning device may
hollow of the shoulder. particularly if the straps show signs of be deployed before and independently of the
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic damage. airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners
locking device which comes into operation in Clean the seat belt straps with soapy is accompanied by a slight discharge of
the event of a collision, emergency braking water or a textile cleaning product, sold by harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release PEUGEOT dealers. activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
the device by pulling the strap firmly and After folding or moving a seat or rear bench incorporated in the system.
then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
and reeled in correctly. comeson.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
workshop.
171
Safety
Airbags
General information The airbags do not operate when the
System designed to contribute towards ignition is switched off.
improving the safety of the occupants (with This equipment will only deploy once.
the exception of the rear centre passenger) If a second impact occurs (during the
in the event of violent collisions. The airbags same or a subsequent accident), the
supplement the action of the seat belts fitted airbag will not be deployed again.
with force limiters (all except the centre rear
passenger belt).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags Impact detection zones
are deployed instantly and contribute A. Front impact zone.
towards better protection of the occupants B. Side impact zone.
of the vehicle (with the exception of the
rear centre passenger); immediately after
the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so Deployment of one or more of the
that they do not hinder visibility or the exit airbags is accompanied by a slight
of the occupants, emission of smoke and a noise, due
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in to the activation of the pyrotechnic
certain roll-over conditions, the airbags cartridge incorporated in the system.
may not be deployed; the seat belt This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
alone contributes towards ensuring your individuals may experience slight
protection in these situations. irritation.
The noise of detonation associated with
the deployment of one or more airbags
may result in a slight loss of hearing for
a short time.
172
Safety
Front airbags
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the
passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in
the event of a serious front impact to all or part
of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the front to the rear of the
vehicle.
5
The front airbag inflates between the thorax
and head of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the
System which protects the driver and front dashboard, passenger's side, to cushion their
passenger in the event of a serious front impact forward movement.
in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and
thorax.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
173
Safety
Deactivating the Reactivating the

passenger's front airbag passenger's front airbag
When you remove the child seat, with
To assure the safety of your child,
the ignition off, turn the switch to the
the passenger's front airbag must be
"ON"position to reactivate the front airbag and
deactivated when you install a rearward
so assure the safety of your front passenger in
facing child seat on the front passenger
the event of an impact.
seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being When the ignition is switched on,
seriously injured or killed if the airbag this warning lamp comes on in the
were deployed. seat belt warning display screen for
approximately one minute to signal
that the front airbag is activated.
F With the ignition off, insert the key in the

passenger airbag deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the "OFF" position.
F Remove the key keeping the switch in the Operating fault
new position.
When the ignition is switched on, this If this warning lamp comes on in the
warning lamp comes in the seat belt instrument panel, you must contact
warning display screen. It stays on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
while the airbag is deactivated. workshop to have the system
checked.
The airbags may no longer be
deployed in the event of a serious
impact.
174
Safety
Lateral airbags Curtain airbags

System contributing towards greater protection Operating fault
for the driver and passengers (with the
exception of the rear centre passenger) in the If this warning lamp comes on in the
event of a serious side impact in order to limit instrument panel, you must contact
the risk of injury to the side of the head. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and workshop to have the system checked.
the upper passenger compartment area.
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the
event of a serious impact.
Deployment
5
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the In the event of a minor impact or bump
System which protects the driver and front event of a serious side impact applied to all or on the side of the vehicle or if the
passenger in the event of a serious side impact part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular vehicle rolls over, the airbags may not
in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a be deployed.
between the hip and the shoulder. horizontal plane and directed from the outside In the event of a rear or front collision,
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest towards the inside of the vehicle. none of the lateral airbags is deployed.
frame, door side. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
Deployment
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in
the event of a serious side impact applied to all
or part of the side impact zone, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the corresponding door trim panel.
175
Safety
Advice
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the safety recommendations below:
Sit in a normal upright position. Front airbags Lateral airbags
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its Use only approved covers on the seats,
Do not leave anything between the
spokes or resting your hands on the centre compatible with the deployment the lateral
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
part of the wheel. airbags. For information on the range of seat
object...), nor fix or attach anything close to
Passengers must not place their feet on the covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
the inflation trajectory of the airbags; this
dashboard. contact a PEUGEOTdealer.
could cause injuries during their deployment.
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
Never modify the original definition of your
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a backs (clothing...). This could cause injury
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
cigarette or pipe. to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is
around the airbags.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or deployed.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
hit it violently. Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
stolen or broken into, have the airbag
Do not fit or attach anything to the steering nearer to the door than necessary.
systems checked.
wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries
All work on the airbag system must be
with deployment of the airbags.
carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a The vehicle's front door panels include side
qualified workshop. impact sensors.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned A damaged door or any unauthorised or
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor incorrectly executed work (modification or
burns to the head, chest or arms when an Curtain airbags repair) on the front doors or their interior trim
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could compromise the operation of these
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few could cause injury to the head if the curtain sensors - Risk of malfunction of the lateral
milliseconds) then deflates within the same airbag is deployed. airbags!
time discharging the hot gas via openings If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the Such work must only be done by a
provided for this purpose. grab handles installed on the roof, they play PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
a part in securing the curtain airbags.
176
Safety
General points relating to child seats

Although one of PEUGEOT's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please observe the

PEUGEOT recommends that children
following recommendations:
should travel on the rear seats of your
- in accordance with European regulations,
vehicle:
all children under the age of 12 or less
- rearward facing up to the age of 3,
than one and a half metres tall must
- forward facing over the age of 3.
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
5
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
*T
he regulations on carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
177
Safety
Child seat at the front*

Rearward facing Forward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed When a forward facing child seat is installed on Passenger seat in the fully back and
on the front passenger seat, adjust the the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle highest position.
vehicle seat to the fully back and highest seat to the fully back and highest position,
position, with the backrest straightened. with the backrest straightened. Leave the
The passenger's airbag must be deactivated. passenger's airbag active.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Ensure that the seat belt is properly

tightened.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm and steady
* Refer to the legislation in force in your country contact with the floor. If necessary,
before installing a child seat on this seating adjust the passenger's seat.
position.
178
Safety
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag

The warning label present on both sides of the
Never install a rearward facing child
passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In
restraint system on a seat protected by
line with current legislation, the following tables
an active front airbag. This could cause
contain this warning in all of the languages
the death of the child or serious injury.
required.
Passenger airbag OFF
For information on deactivating the

passenger's front airbag, refer to the
"Airbags" section.
179
Safety
AR
BG .
.
CS NIKDY neumisujte dtsk zdrn zazen orientovan smrem dozadu na sedadlo chrnn AKTIVOVANM elnm AIRBAGEM. Hroz
nebezpe SMRTI DTTE nebo VNHO ZRANN.
DA Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol p et sde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
KVSTET eller DRBT.
DE Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der
Fahrtrichtung, das Kind knnte schwere oder sogar tdliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL ,
. .
EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retencin para nios de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podra causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del nio.
ET rge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sidusuunas" lapseistet juhi krvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD.
Turvapadja avanemine vib last TSISELT vi ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI L KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selk ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edess suojana on kyttn aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR NE JAMAIS installer de systme de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers larrire sur un sige protg par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTIV.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de lENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT.
HR NIKADA ne postavljati djeju sjedalicu leima u smjeru vonje na sjedalo zatieno UKLJUENIM prednjim ZRANIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU SOHA ne hasznljon menetirnynak httal beszerelt gyermeklst AKTIVLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLGZSKKAL vdett lsen. Ez a
gyermek HALLT vagy SLYOS SRLST okozhatja.
IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ci potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT NIEKADA nerenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemons su atgal atgrtu vaiku ant sdyns, kuri saugoma VEIKIANIOS priekins ORO
PAGALVS. Isiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali bti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
180
Safety
LV NEKAD NEuzstdiet uz aizmuguri vrstu brnu sdeklti priekj pasaiera sdviet, kur ir AKTIVIZTS priekjais DROBAS GAISA
SPILVENS.
Tas var izraist BRNA NVI vai radt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT Qatt mghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut fsiggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla.
NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN.
NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL NIGDY nie instalowa fotelika dziecicego w pozycji "tyem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposaonym w CZOOW PODUSZK
POWIETRZN w stanie AKTYWNYM. Moe to doprowadzi do MIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodowa u niego POWANE OBRAENIA
CIAA.
PT
RO
NUNCA instale um sistema de reteno para crianas de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalao poder provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANA.
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
5
RU ,
, .
.
SK NIKDY neintalujte detsk zdrn zariadenie orientovan smerom dozadu na sedadlo chrnen AKTIVOVANM elnm AIRBAGOM.
Mohlo by djs k SMRTENMU alebo VNEMU PORANENIU DIEAA.
SL NIKOLI ne nameajte otrokega sedea s hrbtom v smeri vonje, e je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedeem
AKTIVIRANA. Takna namestitev lahko povzroi SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POKODBE.
SR NIKADA ne koristite deje sedite koje se okree unazad na seditu zatienim AKTIVNIM VAZDUNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV Passagerarkrockkudden fram MSTE vara avaktiverad om en baktvnd bilbarnstol installeras p denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
DDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
TR KESNLKLE HAVA YASTII AKTF olan n koltua yz arkaya dnk bir ocuk koltuu yerletirmeyiniz. Bu OCUUN LMESNE veya
OK AIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
181
Safety
Child seat at the rear

Rearward facing Forward facing Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
The incorrect installation of a child seat

in a vehicle compromises the protection
of the child in the event of an accident.
When a rearward facing child seat is installed When a forward facing child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the rearward facing child seat does not so that the legs of the child in the forward
touch the vehicle's front seat. facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front
seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly

tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm contact with
the floor. If necessary, adjust the front
seat of the vehicle.
182
Safety
Child seats recommended by PEUGEOT

PEUGEOT offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L1
"RMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the rearward facing position.
L5
"RMER KIDFIX XP"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
L6
"GRACO Booster"
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
5
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
183
Safety
Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally
approved(a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Under 13 kg From 15 to From 22 to

From 9 to 18 kg
(groups 0 (b) 25 kg 36 kg
Passenger's (group 1)
Seat and 0+) (group 2) (group 3)
front airbag From 1 to about
Up to about From 3 to about From 6 to about
3 years
1year 6 years 10 years
Passenger seat Deactivated "OFF" U U U U

with height
adjustment* Activated "ON" X UF UF UF
Row 1 (c)
Passenger seat Deactivated "OFF" U U U U
without height
adjustment** Activated "ON" X UF UF UF
Seat behind the

U U U U
driver's seat
Seat behind the

Row 2 (d) U U U U
passenger's seat
Centre rear seat (e) U U U U
* Fully high position.

** Backrest straightened.
184
Safety
U: seating position suitable for the installation (a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be
Remove and stow the head restraint
of a child seat secured using the seat belt installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
before installing a child seat with
and approved for universal use rearward (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats
backrest on a passenger seat.
facing and/or forward facing. and "car cots" cannot be installed on the
Refit the head restraint once the child
UF: seating position suitable for the installation front passenger seat.
seat has been removed.
of a child seat secured using the seat belt (c) Consult the legislation in force in your
and approved for universal use forward country before installing your child on this
facing. seat.
X: seating position not suitable for installing a (d) To install a child seat at the rear, rearward
5
child seat for the weight group indicated. or forward facing, move the front seat
forward, then straighten the backrest to
allow enough room for the child seat and
the child's legs.
(e) A child seat with a support leg must never
be installed at this seating position.
185
Safety
"ISOFIX" mountings
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulation.
The seats, represented below, are fitted with To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
regulation ISOFIX mountings: - remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on the seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed),
- pass the upper strap of the child seat
behind the seat backrest, between the
apertures for the head restraint rods,
- fix the hook of the upper strap to the ring B,
- tighten the upper strap.
- a ring B behind the seat and identified by a

marking, referred to as the Top Tether for
There are three rings for each seat:
fixing the upper strap.
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, the left hand rear seat, before fitting the
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your seat, first move the centre rear seat belt
vehicle. towards the middle of the vehicle, so
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two as to avoid the seat interfering with the
latches which are secured on the two rings A. operation of the seat belt.
Some seats also have an upper strap, known
as the Top Tether, which is attached to ring B.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protection in the event of an accident.
- two rings A, located between the vehicle
For information on the possibilities for Follow strictly the fitting instructions
seat back and cushion, indicated by a
installing ISOFIX child seats in your provided by with the child seat.
marking,
vehicle, refer to the summary table.
186
Safety
ISOFIX child seats recommended by PEUGEOT

PEUGEOT offers a range of ISOFIX child seats listed and type approved for your vehicle.
"RMER Baby-Safe Plus"

"RMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
and its ISOFIX base
(size category: B1)
(size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
5
Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX Is installed only in the forward facing
base which is attached to the rings A. position.
The base has a support leg, adjustable for Is attached to the rings A and the upper
height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. ringB, referred to as the TOP TETHER,
This child seat can also be secured with a using an upper strap.
seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,
and attached to the vehicle's seat by the lying down.
three-point seat belt. This child seat can also be used on seats
not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In
this case, it must be secured to the vehicle's
seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the Refer also to the child seat
position of the vehicle's front seat so that the manufacturer's fitting instructions for
child's feet are not touching the backrest. information on installing and removing
the seat.
187
Safety
Locations for ISOFIX child seats

In line with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Under 10 kg Under 10 kg
(group 0) From 9 to 18 kg
(group 0)
Under 13 kg (group 1)
Up to about
(group 0+) From about 1 to 3 years
6months Up to about 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Cot Rearward facing Rearward facing Forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Passenger's
Seat
front airbag
Passenger's seat Deactivated

X IL IL IUF / IL
with height "OFF"
adjustment Activated "ON" X X X IUF / IL
Row 1 (a)
Passenger's seat Deactivated
X IL IL IUF / IL
without height "OFF"
adjustment Activated "ON" X X X IUF / IL
Seat behind driver's
IL (b) IL IL IUF / IL
seat
Seat behind
Row 2 IL (b) IL IL IUF / IL
passenger's seat
Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX
188
Safety
IUF: s eating position suitable for the installation (a) Refer to the legislation in force in your
of an Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing country before installing a child at this
before installing a child seat with a
secured using the upper strap. seating position.
backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the
IL: s eating position suitable for the installation (b) T he installation of a cot at this seating
head restraint once the child seat has
of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either: position may prevent the use of one or both
been removed.
- rearward facing fitted with an upper strap other seats in this row.
or a support leg,
- forward facing fitted with a support leg,
- a cot fitted with an upper strap or a
5
supportleg.
For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX
mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
X: s eating position not suitable for the
installation for an ISOFIX seat or cot of the
weight group indicated.
189
Safety
Locations for i-Size child seats

The i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A.
The i-Size child seats also have:
- either an upper strap which is attached to the ring B
- or a support leg which sits on the vehicle's floor, compatible with the seat approved for i-Size
the role of which is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision.
For more information on ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
In accordance with the new European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with
ISOFIX mountings approved for i-Size.
Seating position Passenger's front airbag i-Size restraint system
Deactivated, "OFF" i-U

Row 1 (a) Passenger seat
Activated, "ON" i-UF
Seat behind the driver's seat i-U
Row 2 Seat behind the front passenger's seat i-U
Centre rear seat Not i-Size
190
Safety
i-U: suitable for i-Size restraints of the (a) Refer to the current legislation in your
"universal" category, forward facing or country before installing a child at this
before installing a child seat on a
rearward facing. seating position.
passenger seat.
i-UF: only suitable for i-Size restraint systems
Refit the head restraint once the child
in the "Universal" category, forward
seat has been removed.
facing.
X: seating position not suitable for i-Size
restraint systems in the "Universal"
category.
191
Safety
Advice
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a For optimum installation of the forward facing Installing a booster seat
vehicle compromises the child's protection in child seat, ensure that the back of the child
the event of an accident. seat is as close as possible to the backrest The chest part of the seat belt must be
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt of the vehicle's seat, in contact if possible. positioned on the child's shoulder without
buckle under the child seat, as this could You must remove the head restraint before touching the neck.
destabilise it. installing a child seat with backrest to a Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the passenger seat. passes correctly over the child's thighs.
child seat harnesses keeping the slack Ensure that the head restraint is stored or PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster
relative to the child's body to a minimum, attached securely to prevent it from being seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
even for short journeys. thrown around the vehicle in the event of guide at shoulder level.
When installing a child seat using the seat sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened the child seat is removed.
correctly on the child seat and that it secures
the child seat firmly on the seat of your As a safety precaution, do not leave:
vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable, - a child or children alone and
move it forwards if necessary. Children at the front unsupervised in a vehicle,
The legislation on carrying children on the - a child or an animal in a vehicle which
front passenger seat is specific to each is exposed to the sun, with the windows
country. Refer to the legislation in force in closed,
your country. - the keys within reach of children inside
At rear seating positions, always leave
Deactivate the passenger's front airbag the vehicle.
sufficient space between the front seat and:
when a rearward facing child seat is installed To prevent accidental opening of the doors
- a rearward facing child seat,
on the front passenger seat. and rear windows, use the child lock.
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously Take care not to open the rear windows by
forward facing.
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. more than one third.
To do this, move the front seat forwards
To protect young children from the rays of
and, if necessary, move its backrest into the
the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
upright position.
192
Safety
Manual child lock

Mechanical system to prevent opening of a rear door using its interior control.
The control, red in colour, is located on the edge of each rear door.
It is identified by a symbol marked on the bodywork.
5
Turning the child lock on Turning the child lock off Do not confuse the child lock control,
F Using the ignition key or the integral key, F Using the ignition key or the integral key, which is red, with the back-up locking
depending on version, turn the red control depending on version, turn the red control control, which is black.
as far as it will go: as far as it will go:
- to the right on the left-hand rear door, - to the left on the left-hand rear door,
- to the left on the right-hand rear door. - to the right on the right-hand rear door.
193
Safety
Electric child lock

Remotely operated system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls.
The control is located on the dashboard, driver's side.
Switching on Switching off

F Press this button. F Press this button again. This system is independent and in no
The indicator lamp in the button comes on, The indicator lamp on button goes off, circumstances does it take the place of
accompanied by a confirmation message. accompanied by a confirmation message. the central locking control.
This indicator lamp remains on until the child This indicator lamp remains on while child lock Check the status of the child lock each
lock is switched off. is switched on. time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
Any other status of the indicator lamp short time.
indicates a fault with the electric child In the event of a serious impact, the
lock. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT electric child lock is switched off
dealer or a qualified workshop. automatically to permit the exit of the
rear passengers.
194
Driving
Driving recommendations
Observe the driving regulations and remain If you are obliged to drive through water: Important!
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your Never drive with the parking brake
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to applied - Risk of overheating and
react at any time to any eventuality. damage to the braking system!
On a long journey, a break every two hours is Risk of fire!
strongly recommended. As the exhaust system of your vehicle
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate is very hot, even several minutes after
the need to brake and increase the distance switching off the engine, do not park
from other vehicles. or run the engine over areas where
inflammable substances and materials
are present: grass, leaves, etc.
- check that the depth of water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves
6
that might be generated by other users,
Driving on flooded roads - deactivate the Stop & Start system,
- drive as slowly as possible without stalling.
In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph
We strongly advise against driving on flooded Never leave a vehicle unsupervised
(10 km/h),
roads, as this could cause serious damage with the engine running. If you have
- do not stop and do not switch off the
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the to leave your vehicle with the engine
engine.
electrical systems of your vehicle. running, apply the parking brake
and put the gearbox into neutral or
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as positionN or P, depending on the type
circumstances allow, make several light brake of gearbox.
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
195
Driving
When towing
Distribution of loads Cooling Braking
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the Towing a trailer on a slope increases the Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
heaviest items are as close as possible to temperature of the coolant. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of
the axle and the nose weight approaches As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling engine braking is recommended.
the maximum permitted without capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
exceedingit. F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
Air density decreases with altitude, thus speed.
reducing engine performance. Above The maximum towed load on a long incline
Tyres
1000 metres, the maximum towed load must depends on the gradient and the ambient
be reduced by 10% for every 1000 metres of temperature. F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
altitude. In all cases, keep a check on the coolant vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
temperature. recommended pressures.
For more information on Weights, refer to the
F If the warning lamp and the Lighting
STOP warning lamp come on, F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
stop the vehicle and switch off on the trailer and the headlamp beam
the engine as soon as possible. height of your vehicle.
Side wind For more information on Adjusting the
headlamp beam height, refer to the
F Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.
The rear parking sensors will be

deactivated automatically to avoid the
audible signal if a genuine PEUGEOT
towbar is used.
196
Driving
Anti-theft protection Starting / Switching off the engine with the key
Electronic engine immobiliser Ignition switch
The keys contain an electronic chip which has
Ignition on position
a secret code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised in order for It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
starting to be possible. equipment or portable devices to be charged.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the Once the state of charge of the battery drops
engine management system a few minutes to the reserve level, the system switches to
after the ignition is switched off and prevents energy economy mode: the power supply is
starting of the engine by anyone who does not cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
have the key. battery charge.
In the event of a malfunction, you are informed

by a message in the instrument panel screen.
It has 3 positions:
6
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the
- position 1 (Stop): insert and removing the
In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact key or the remote control, which would
key, steering column locked,
a PEUGEOT dealer if required. weigh down on its blade in the ignition
- position 2 (Ignition on): steering column
switch and could cause a malfunction.
unlocked, ignition on, Diesel preheating,
It could adversely affect the deployment
engine running,
of the front airbag.
- position 3 (Starting).
For reasons of safety and theft Switching off the engine leads to a loss
protection, do not leave your electronic of braking assistance.
key in the vehicle, even when you are
close to it.
It is recommended that you keep it on
your person.
197
Driving
Starting the engine

With the parking brake applied and the gearbox F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
In temperate conditions, do not leave
in neutral or position Nor P: position 2, ignition on, to operate the
the engine at idle to warm up but move
F depress the clutch pedal fully (manual engine pre-heating system.
off straight away and drive at moderate
gearbox),
speed.
or
F press the brake pedal firmly (automatic Wait until this warning lamp goes off
gearbox), in the instrument panel then operate
F insert the key into the ignition switch; the the starter motor by turning the key Never leave the engine running in
system recognises the code, to position 3 without pressing the an enclosed area without adequate
F unlock the steering column by simultaneously accelerator pedal, until the engine ventilation: internal combustion
turning the steering and the key. starts. Once the engine is running, engines emit toxic exhaust gases,
release the key. such as carbon monoxide. Danger of
intoxication and death!
In certain cases, you may have to apply In wintry conditions, the warning lamp In very severe wintry conditions
more force to the steering (wheels on can stay on for a longer period. When (temperatures below -23C), to ensure
full lock, for example). the engine is hot, the warning lamp the correct operation and durability of
does not come on. the mechanical components of your
vehicle, engine and gearbox, it is
necessary to leave the engine running
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter
If the engine does not start straight for 4 minutes before moving off.
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal, away, switch off the ignition. Wait a
until the engine starts. Once the engine is few moments before operating the
running, release the key. starter motor again. If the engine does
not start after several attempts, do not
keep trying: you risk damaging the
starter motor or the engine. Contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
198
Driving
Switching off the engine

F Stop the vehicle. Energy economy mode
F With the engine running at idle, turn the key
Key left in the "Ignition on"
to position 1.
After switching off the engine (position 1-Stop), position
for a maximum of 30 minutes you can still use
F Remove the key from the ignition switch. If the key has been left in the ignition switch
functions such as the audio and telematic
F To lock the steering column, turn the at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will
system, the wipers, dipped beam headlamps,
steering until it locks. be switched off automatically after one hour.
courtesy lamps, ...
To switch the ignition back on, turn the key
to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2
To facilitate unlocking of the steering (Ignition on).
column, it is recommended that the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead
position before switching off the engine. For more information on Energy
6
economy mode, refer to the
F Check that the parking brake is correctly corresponding section.
applied, particularly on sloping ground.
Never switch off the ignition before the

vehicle is at a complete stop. With the
engine off, the braking and steering
assistance systems are also cut off: risk
of loss of control of the vehicle.
When you leave the vehicle, keep the

key with you and lock the vehicle.
199
Driving
Starting / Switching off the engine with

Keyless Entry and Starting
Starting the engine
F Briefly press the "START/
The presence of the "Keyless Entry
STOP" button while maintaining
and Starting" electronic key in the
pressure on the pedal until the
recognition zone is essential.
engine starts.
If the electronic key is not detected in
The steering column unlocks and the engine this zone, a message is displayed.
starts. Move the electronic key into this zone
For Diesel engines, in temperatures below so that the engine can be started.
zero and/or with a cold engine, the engine will If there is still a problem, refer to the
not start until the pre-heater warning lamp has "Key not detected - Back-up starting"
gone off. section.
If this warning lamp comes on after

F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever
pressing the "START/STOP" button:
into neutral.
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, F With a manual gearbox, you should keep
fully depress the clutch pedal. the clutch pedal fully depressed until the If one of the starting conditions is not met,
or warning lamp goes off and not press the a reminder message is displayed in the
F With an automatic gearbox, place the "START/STOP" button again until the instrument panel.
gear selector at position P or N. engine is running. In some circumstances, it is necessary
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, or to turn the steering wheel slightly while
fully depress the brake pedal. F With an automatic gearbox, you should pressing the "START/STOP" button to
keep the brake pedal fully depressed until assist unlocking of the steering column; a
the warning lamp goes off and not press message warns you when this is needed.
the "START/STOP" button again until the As a safety measure, never leave the
engine is running. vehicle while the engine is running.
200
Driving
Switching off the engine Ignition on

F Immobilise the vehicle, engine at idle. (without starting)
F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever
into neutral.
or
F With an automatic gearbox, place the
gear selector at position P or N.
F With the electronic key inside

the vehicle, press the "START/
STOP" button.
The engine stops and the steering
6
column locks.
With the Keyless Entry and Starting remote
With the ignition on, the system
control inside the vehicle, pressing the "START/
automatically goes into energy
STOP" button, with no action on the pedals,
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the economy mode to maintain an adequate
allows the ignition to be switched on.
engine will not stop. state of charge in the battery.
This also allows the accessories to be used
(for example: audio system, lighting...).
Never leave your vehicle with the

electronic key still inside. F Press the "START/STOP" button,
the instrument panel comes on
but the engine does not start.
Switching off the engine leads to a loss

F Press the button again to switch off the
of braking assistance.
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked.
201
Driving
Key not detected Emergency switch-off
In the event of an emergency only, the engine

can be switched off without conditions (even
when driving).
Press the "START/STOP" button for about
fiveseconds.
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
as the vehicle stops.
Back-up starting Back-up switch off
A back-up reader is fitted to the steering When the electronic key is not detected or is
column to allow the engine to be started if no longer in the recognition zone, a message
the system does not detect the key in the appears in the instrument panel when closing a
recognition zone, or when the battery in the door or trying to switch off the engine.
electronic key is discharged.
F Place and hold the remote control against
the reader.
F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place

the gear lever in neutral then fully depress F To confirm the instruction to switch off the
the clutch pedal. engine, press the "START/STOP" button
for about five seconds.
F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, In the event of a fault with the electronic key,
select position P then press the brake contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
pedal firmly. workshop.
F Press the "START/STOP" button.

The engine starts.
202
Driving
Electric parking brake

Indicator lamp
This indicator lamp comes on in the
In the event of a battery failure, the
instrument panel and in the control
electric parking brake no longer works.
lever to confirm the application of the
As a safety measure, if the parking
parking brake.
brake is not applied, immobilise the
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking vehicle by engaging a gear (with a
brake. manual gearbox) or placing the chocks
The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes supplied against one of the wheels.
during manual application or release. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The system provides, in automatic operation,

the application of the parking brake on
6
switching off the engine and release as the
vehicle moves off.
The driver can take over at any time to apply
or release the parking brake, by operating the
control lever:
F by briefly pulling the control lever to apply
the brake,
F by briefly pushing the control lever, while
pressing the foot brake, to release it.
Automatic mode is activated by default.
203
Driving
Manual operation
Manual release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake:
F press the brake pedal,
F while maintaining pressure on the brake
pedal, briefly push the control lever.
The complete release of the parking brake
Label on door panel is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and
theP indicator lamp in the control lever going
Before leaving the vehicle, check that When towing, parking on a steep slope, off, accompanied by the display of the message
parking brake is applied: the indicator or if your vehicle is heavily laden, "Parking brake released".
lamps in the instrument panel and turn the wheels towards the kerb and
the control lever must be on fixed, not engage a gear (with a manual gearbox) If you push the control lever without
flashing. or place the gear selector at position P pressing the brake pedal, the parking
If the parking brake is not applied, there with an automatic gearbox. brake will not be released and a
is an audible signal and a message is For towing, you vehicle is approved for message is displayed.
displayed on opening the driver's door. parking on slopes of up to 12%.
Manual application
With the vehicle stationary: briefly pull the control lever.
Never leave a child alone inside the Confirmation of the instruction is signaled by
vehicle with the ignition on, as they flashing of the indicator lamp in the control
could release the parking brake. lever.
Application of the parking brake
is confirmed by illumination of
the brake indicator lamp and
thePindicator lamp in the control
lever, accompanied by the display of
the message "Parking brake applied".
204
Driving
Automatic operation
Automatic release Automatic application
Ensure first that the engine is running and the With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
driver's door is properly closed. is automatically applied when the engine
The electric parking brake releases is switched off by pressing the START/STOP
automatically and progressively when the button.
vehicle is moving. Application of of the parking brake
With a manual gearbox is confirmed by illumination of
F Fully depress the clutch pedal, the brake indicator lamp and the
engage 1st gear or reverse. Pindicator lamp in the control lever,
F Press the accelerator pedal and release accompanied by the display of the
the clutch pedal. message "Parking brake applied".
With an automatic gearbox The complete release of the parking brake
6
F Press the brake pedal. is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and Automatic application does not take
F Select position D, M or R. theP indicator lamp in the control lever going place if the engine stalls or goes into
F Release the brake pedal and press the off, accompanied by the display of the message STOP mode of Stop & Start.
accelerator pedal. "Parking brake released".
When stationary with the engine running, do not With automatic operation, you can also
depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, manually apply or release the parking
you risk releasing the parking brake. brake using the control lever.
With an automatic gearbox, if the brake
does not release automatically, check
that the front doors are correctly closed.
205
Driving
Special cases
In some situations, you may need to operate Parking the vehicle with the
the parking brake manually. brake released
The complete release of the parking
In very cold conditions (ice), it is
brake is confirmed by the brake
Immobilisation of the vehicle recommended that the parking brake
indicator lamp and the P indicator
with the engine running not be applied.
lamp in the control lever going off,
To immobilise your vehicle, engage a
To immobilise the vehicle with the engine accompanied by the display of the
gear or fit the chocks supplied against
running, briefly pull the control lever. message "Parking brake released".
one of the wheels.
Application of of the parking F Switch off the ignition.
brake is confirmed by illumination Immobilisation of the vehicle with the
of the brake indicator lamp and With an automatic gearbox, P mode is
parking brake released
thePindicator lamp in the control automatically selected when the ignition
F Switch off the engine.
lever, accompanied by the display of is switched off. The wheels are blocked.
Illumination of the warning lamps in the
the message "Parking brake applied". instrument panel and control lever confirm
application of the parking brake.
F Switch on the ignition again, without
starting the engine.
F Release the parking brake manually by
pushing the control lever while keeping
your foot on the brake.
206
Driving
Deactivating automatic operation Emergency braking

In some situations, such as very cold weather
The emergency braking should only be
or towing (caravan, recovery), it may be
used in an exceptional situation.
necessary to deactivate automatic operation of
the system.
F Start the engine.
In the event of a failure of the main service
F Apply the parking brake with the control
brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver
lever, if it is released.
taken ill, under instruction, etc.), a continuous
F Take your foot off the brake pedal.
pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle.
F Push and hold the control lever in the
Braking takes place while the control lever is
release direction for at least 10 seconds
being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever
and no more than 15 seconds.
is released.
F Release the control lever. From this point, the parking brake can only The ABS and DSC systems provide stability of
6
F Press and hold the brake pedal. be applied and released manually using the the vehicle during emergency braking.
F Pull the control lever in the apply direction control lever. If the emergency braking malfunctions, the
for 2 seconds.
message "Parking brake control faulty" will be
displayed in the instrument panel.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic
operation.
Reactivation of automatic operation is
Deactivation of the automatic functions confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
is confirmed by illumination of this instrument panel going off.
indicator lamp in the instrument panel.
If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction,
F Release the control lever and the brake signalled by the illumination of one or both
pedal. warning lamps in the instrument panel, then
stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate "pull-release"
actions on the control lever until the vehicle is
immobilised.
207
Driving
Operating faults
The various alert situations are described in this table.
In the event of a fault with the electric parking brake it is recommended that you contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Situations Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and this warning lamp. - Automatic release is not available.
- If you attempt an automatic release, a help message is displayed on
acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use
manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. - Secondary braking does not have full power.
- If automatic release is not available, a help message is displayed on
acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use
manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. - Automatic application is not available: use the control lever.
- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
- If automatic release is also not available, a help message is displayed
on acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use
manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. - If manual application and release do not work, the control lever is faulty.
- The automatic functions must be used in all circumstances: they are
automatically reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever.
- You can no longer immobilise the vehicle with the engine running.
208
Driving
Situations Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. The parking brake is faulty, the manual and automatic functions may not operate.
When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle:
F Pull and hold the control lever for about 7 to 15 seconds, until the
warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel.
If this procedure does not work, you should make your vehicle safe:
F Park on a level surface.
F Engage a gear with a manual gearbox or select position P with an
automatic gearbox.
F If possible, place a chock against one of the wheels.
Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. - The parking brake does not have its full performance to securely hold
the vehicle in all situations.
You should make your vehicle safe:
6
F Park on a level surface.
F Engage a gear with a manual gearbox, or select position P with an
automatic gearbox.
F If possible, place a chock against one of the wheels.
Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The flashing of the P warning lamps on starting the vehicle indicates that the
parking brake is not correctly applied.
As soon as possible, stop the vehicle and try to completely release the
parking brake, using the control lever, with your foot on the brake pedal.
Display of the message "Battery fault" and this warning lamp. - The state of charge of the battery is very low and requires immobilisation
of the vehicle in a safe place: engage a gear with a manual gearbox or
place a chock against one of the wheels.
- Once the battery is completely discharged, the controls do not operate:
to release the parking brake, call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
209
Driving
6-speed manual gearbox

Engaging reverse gear Engaging 5th or 6th gear
F Move the lever fully to the right to engage

5th or 6th gear.
Failure to follow this advice could cause

permanent damage to the gearbox
(inadvertent engagement of 3rd or
4th gear).
F Raise the trigger under the knob and move

the gear lever to the left then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the

vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate

starting of the engine, always select
neutral and depress the clutch pedal.
210
Driving
Automatic gearbox (EAT6)

Six-speed automatic gearbox with push selector. It also offers a manual mode with steering mounted paddle gear changes.
Gearbox selector positions Push selector

Move the selector by pressing it forward
once or twice (N or R) or rearward (N orD),
if necessary going beyond the point of
resistance.
The selector returns to its initial position when
released.
P. Park.
For parking the vehicle: the wheels are
A. Button P.
To put the gearbox into P.
6
blocked. B. Unlock button.
R. Reverse. To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or
N. Neutral. change to R.
For moving the vehicle with the ignition off: for This button should be pressed before pressing
certain car washing machines, when towing the the selector.
vehicle... C. Button M.
D. Automatic drive mode. To change from D to permanent manual mode.
The gearbox manages the gear changes D. Display panel showing the operation of the
according to the driving style, the profile of the gearbox P, R, N, D.
road and the load in the vehicle.
M. Manual mode.
The driver changes gear using the steering
mounted control paddles.
211
Driving
Steering mounted control paddles "Sport" button

With the engine running, when the programme Dynamic pack
associated with the button is active, the
gearbox delays changing up for a more The indicator lamp in the button is on
dynamic driving style. SPORT when the Dynamic pack is activated.
The programme is automatically deactivated
when the ignition is switched off. You can activate or deactivate the function:
- by pressing this button,
Activating the Sport programme or the or
Dynamic pack is not recommended in the - via the i-Cockpit Amplify function, by
following situations: modifying the setting for an ambience in
- one of the special modes (other than the touch screen.
standard mode) of Grip control is on,
In M or D mode, the steering mounted control
- low fuel level reached,
paddles allow the driver to change gear
- low AdBlue level reached. For more information on the Dynamic Pack
manually.
F Pull the right-hand "+" paddle toward you and the i-Cockpit Amplify function, refer to
and release to change up a gear. Pressing this button has no effect when the corresponding section.
F Pull the left-hand "-"paddle towardyou a trailer is connected.
and release to change down a gear.
Sport programme
The steering mounted control paddles In D mode, pressing this button
cannot be used to select neutral or to SPORT activates the Sport programme.
select or come out of reverse. "S" appears in the instrument panel.
212
Driving
Displays in the instrument panel Operation

With the engine running, if it is necessary to General points
press the brake pedal or the Unlock button
To release the gearbox:
in order to change mode, an alert message is
- from P mode:
displayed in the instrument panel.
F press the brake pedal firmly,
Only appropriate attempted changes of mode
F press the Unlock button,
are accepted.
F while maintaining pressure on the brake
pedal and on the Unlock button, select
With the engine running and the brakes another mode.
released, if R, D or M is selected, - from neutral N:
With the ignition on, the state of the gearbox is the vehicle moves off, even without F speed below 3 mph (5 km/h),
displayed in the instrument panel: pressing the accelerator pedal. F press the brake pedal firmly,
P: park. Never leave children unsupervised F maintaining pressure on the brake pedal,
6
R: reverse. inside the vehicle with the engine select another mode.
N: neutral. running. To engage reverse:
D1...D6: automatic mode. F speed below 3 mph (5 km/h),
S: Sport programme or Dynamic pack. F press the Unlock button,
M1...M6: manual mode. F push forward once or twice.
-: instruction not accepted in manual mode. To change to manual mode:
F with D mode first selected,
Never press the accelerator and brake F press the M button; the indicator lamp in
If the driver's door is opened with the ignition pedals at the same time - Risk of the button comes on.
on, a message is displayed asking you to put damage to the gearbox! To come out of manual mode:
the gearbox into P mode. In the event of a battery failure, you F push forward to return to D.
The state of the gearbox is displayed in the must place the chocks supplied with the or
instrument panel for a few moments after vehicle tools against one of the wheels F press the M button; the indicator lamp in
switching off the ignition. to immobilise the vehicle. the button goes off.
213
Driving
Special aspects of automatic Moving off

mode From P mode:
The vehicle must be stationary to switch off the The gearbox selects the gear that offers F Press the brake pedal firmly.
ignition. optimum performance, taking account of the F Start the engine.
To put the vehicle into free-wheel with the ambient temperature, the profile of the road, F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal,
engine off: the load on the vehicle and the style of driving. press the Unlock button.
F vehicle stationary, engine running, For maximum acceleration without touching F Push twice rearward going beyond
selectN, the selector, press the accelerator fully down the point of resistance to select the
F switch off the engine, (kick-down). The gearbox changes down automaticD mode, or forward to engage
F switch the ignition on within five seconds, automatically or holds the gear selected until reverse R.
F with your foot on the brake pedal, push the the maximum engine speed is reached.
selector forward or rearward and release to When braking, the gearbox changes down
confirm N and release the electric parking automatically to provide effective engine From neutral N:
brake manually, braking. F Press the brake pedal firmly.
F switch off the ignition. The steering mounted controls allow the driver F Start the engine.
to temporarily select a gear, if the road and F Maintaining pressure on the brake
engine speed permit. pedal, push rearward to select the
automaticDmode, or forward, while
If you exceed the period of five seconds, the pressing the Unlockbutton to engage
gearbox goes into P mode; you must then start reverse R.
the procedure again from the beginning.
Special aspects of manual mode Then, from P or N:

The change from one gear to another takes F Release the brake pedal.
With N engaged, opening the driver's
place only if the if the road speed and engine F Accelerate progressively to automatically
door results in an audible signal.
speed permit. release the electric parking brake.
Closing the driver's door stops the
If the engine speed is too high or too low, the F With the parking brake released, the
signal.
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then vehicle then moves off.
the gear actually engaged is displayed.
214
Driving
Operating faults
In severe wintry conditions (temperature Malfunction of the gearbox Malfunction of the selector
below -23C), it is recommended that In the event of a minor fault
the engine be allowed to run for a few This is signalled by the illumination of You are alerted by the illumination of this
minutes before moving off, to ensure this warning lamp, accompanied by the warning lamp, accompanied by the display
the correct operation and durability of display of a message and an audible of a message and an audible signal.
the engine and gearbox. signal, when the ignition is switched on.
In certain cases, the selector lamps may not
The gearbox goes into back-up mode: D mode come on, but the state of the gearbox is still
stays in third gear, the steering mounted control displayed in the instrument panel.
paddles are inoperative, M mode is no longer Drive cautiously and go to a PEUGEOT or a
Stopping the vehicle
available. You may feel a pronounced jolt when qualified workshop.
Whatever the state of the gearbox when the engaging reverse. This does not present any
6
ignition is switched off, P mode is engaged risk for the gearbox.
automatically, with the exception of N, in which Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h), In the event of a serious fault
case Pmode will be engaged after a delay of keeping to the speed limit.
5 seconds (allowing the change to free-wheel). You are alerted by the illumination of
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified this warning lamp.
Check that P mode has been engaged and workshop.
that the electric parking brake was applied
automatically; if not, apply it manually.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away
from the traffic, and call a PEUGEOT
The corresponding indicator lamps When the ignition is switched off,
for the selector panel and the electric the gearbox goes into P mode
parking brake control lever must automatically.
be on, as well as the ones in the
instrument panel.
215
Driving
Hill start assist

System which keeps your vehicle immobilised Operation
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
This system only operates when:

- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- certain gradient conditions are met,
- with the drivers door closed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle On a descending slope, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held for a momentarily stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being when you release the brake pedal: vehicle is held momentarily when you
held in the hill start assist phase. - provided you are in first gear or neutral with release the brake pedal.
If you need to leave the vehicle with the a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in position D or M with an
engine running, apply the parking brake
automatic gearbox.
Operating fault
manually then ensure that the parking
brake warning lamp and the warning
lamp P in the lever of the electric
parking brake control are on fixed (not
flashing).
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning
lamps come on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop to have the system
checked.
216
Driving
Dynamic Pack
This pack adapts:
- the display colour for the instrument panel,
- the acoustic ambience of the engine,
- the level of power assistance for the steering,
- acceleration,
- the management of gear changes with an
automatic gearbox,
- the display in the instrument panel of
information on the vehicle's dynamic
parameters.
Activation
F Press and hold this button until
SPORT the instrument panel colour
changes (red); the indicator lamp
6
in the button comes on.
The Dynamic pack is also managed
by the i-Cockpit Amplify function.

Displays
If the indicator lamp flashes, activation F Press the end of the wiper control stalk to You can also display this information with the
is not possible (for example, if Park display the various dynamic parameters in "PERSONAL" mode of the instrument panel.
Assist is selected) and the instrument the instrument panel.
panel display colour returns to its F Press repeatedly to go from one screen to
This telemetry information (power
normal mode. another.
output, turbocharger pressure, torque,
If the indicator lamp continues flashing longitudinal and lateral acceleration, ...)
for a long time, contact a PEUGEOT is given as an indication only.
217
Driving
Gear shift indicator*

System which reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most appropriate gear.
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and your The information appears in the instrument
The system adapts its gear change
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise panel in the form of an arrow.
recommendation according to the
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
driving conditions (slope, load,...) and
follow this instruction without engaging the On vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox,
the demands of the driver (power,
intermediate gears. the arrow may be accompanied by the
acceleration, braking,...).
The gear engagement recommendations must gear recommended.
The system never suggests:
not be considered compulsory. In fact, the
- engaging first gear,
configuration of the road, the amount of traffic
- engaging reverse gear.
and safety remain determining factors when Example:
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver - You are in third gear.
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the advice given by the system. - You press the accelerator pedal.
This function cannot be deactivated. - The system may suggest that you engage
a higher gear.
With an automatic gearbox, the system

is only active in manual mode.
On BlueHDi Diesel 135 and 150 versions with

manual gearbox, in certain driving conditions
the system may suggest changing into neutral
so that the engine can go into standby (STOP
mode with Stop & Start). In this case,
N is displayed in the instrument panel.
* Depending on engine.
218
Driving
Stop & Start

The Stop & Startsystem puts the engine Operation
temporarily into standby - STOP mode-
during stops in the traffic (red lights, Going into engine STOP mode
traffic jams,...). The engine restarts
automatically-STARTmode - as soon as This indicator lamp comes on in the
For your comfort, during parking
you want to move off. The restart takes place instrument panel and the engine
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not
instantly, quickly and silently. goes into standby automatically:
available for a few seconds after
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system - with a manual gearbox, at speeds below
coming out of reverse gear.
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust 12 mph (20 km/h) or vehicle stationary with
Stop & Start does not affect the
emissions as well as the noise level when the PureTech 130 petrol and BlueHDi 115
operation of vehicle systems such as
stationary. and 120 Diesel versions, when you place
braking, power steering...
the gear lever in neutral and you release
the clutch pedal,
6
- with an automatic gearbox, vehicle Never refuel with the engine in
stationary, when you press the brake pedal STOPmode; you must switch off the
or put the gear selector in N mode. ignition with the key or the START/
STOP button.
A time counter calculates the sum of the
periods in STOP mode during a journey. It
resets itself to zero every time the ignition is
switched on with the key or the START/STOP
button.
219
Driving
Special cases: STOP mode not Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked
available automatically
STOP mode is not invoked when: This indicator lamp goes off and the As a safety measure or to maintain comfort
- the vehicle is on a steep slop (rising or engine starts automatically: levels in the vehicle, START mode is invoked
falling), automatically when:
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
- the driver's door is open, - you open the driver's door,
depress the clutch pedal,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened, - you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
- with an automatic gearbox:
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 15 mph
gear selector in D or M mode, when you
(10km/h) since the last engine start (with (25 km/h) with a manual gearbox (2 mph
release the brake pedal,
the key or the START/STOP button), (3 km/h) with PureTech 130 petrol and
or gear selector in N mode and brake
- the electric parking brake is applied or BlueHDi 115 and 120 Diesel versions),
pedal released, when you place the gear
being applied, or 2 mph (3 km/h) with an automatic
selector in D or M mode,
- the engine is needed to maintain a gearbox.
or when you engage reverse.
comfortable temperature in the passenger - the electric parking brake is being applied,
compartment, - some special conditions (battery charge,
- demisting is active, engine temperature, braking assistance,
- some special conditions (battery charge, ambient temperature...) where the engine is
engine temperature, braking assistance, needed for control of a system.
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
In this case, this indicator lamp flashes In this case, this indicator lamp flashes
for a few seconds then goes off. for a few seconds, then goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal. This operation is perfectly normal.
220
Driving
Deactivation / Reactivation
In certain circumstances, such as the need With the button on the With the touch screen button
to maintain the temperature in the passenger dashboard
compartment, it may be useful to deactivate the Activation and deactivation of the
Stop & Start system. function is done in the Driving menu
The system can be deactivated at any time, of the touch screen.
once the ignition is switched on.
Select the "Driving assistance" tab, then
If the engine is in STOP mode, it then restarts.
"Stop & Start".
The Stop & Start system is reactivated
automatically every time the ignition is Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination
switchedon. of this indicator lamp and the display of a
Opening the bonnet
Before doing anything under the A new selection reactivates the system.
6
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes
system to avoid the risk of injury off, accompanied by the display of a message.
related to an automatic change to F Press this button; the associated indicator
STARTmode. lamp comes on.
Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination

of this indicator lamp and the display of a
Driving on flooded roads

Pressing the button again reactivates the
Before driving through a flooded road,
system; the associated indicator lamp goes off.
it is strongly recommended that you
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes
deactivate the Stop & Start system.
off, accompanied by the display of a message.
For more information on Driving
advice, particularly on flooded roads,
221
Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the system,

this warning lamp flashes for a few
moments in the instrument panel,
then remains on, accompanied by the
display of a message.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode,

thevehicle may stall.
All of the instrument panel warning lamps
comeon.
It is then necessary to switch off the ignition
and start the engine again with the key or the
"START/STOP" button.
The Stop & Start system requires a

12V battery of specific technology and
specification.
All work on this type of battery must be
carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
For more information on the
12 V battery, refer to the corresponding
section.
222
Driving
Under-inflation detection
System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system monitors the pressures in the four
The under-inflation detection system The inflation pressures defined for
tyres, once the vehicle is moving.
does not replace the need for vigilance your vehicle can be found on the tyre
It compares the information given by the four
on the part of the driver. pressure label.
wheel speed sensors with reference values,
This system does not avoid the need to For more information on the
which must be reinitialised every time the
check the tyre pressures (including the Identification markings, refer to the
tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel
spare wheel) every month as well as corresponding section.
changed.
before a long journey.
The system triggers an alert as soon as it
Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs
detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one Checking tyre pressures
road holding, extends braking distances
or more tyres. This check should be done when the
and causes premature tyre wear,
tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for
particularly under arduous conditions
1hour or after a journey of less than
(high loading, high speed, long journey).
6miles (10 km) at moderate speeds).
6
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures
shown on the label.
Driving with under-inflated tyres

increases fuel consumption.
Snow chains
The system does not have to be
reinitialised after fitting or removing
snow chains.
223
Driving
Under-inflation alert Reinitialisation

This is given by fixed illumination of F If you have a compressor, such as the one It is necessary to reinitialise the system every
this warning lamp, accompanied by in the temporary puncture repair kit, check time one or more tyre pressures are adjusted,
an audible signal and, depending on the pressures of the four tyres when cold. and after changing one or more wheels.
equipment, the display of a message. F If it is not possible to make this check
immediately, drive carefully at reduced
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid
speed.
excessive steering movements and sudden
or
braking.
F In the event of a puncture, use the
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
todoso.
wheel (depending on equipment).
The loss of pressure detected does not

always cause visible bulging of the tyre.
Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual
The alert is maintained until the system Before reinitialising the system, ensure
check.
is reinitialised. that the pressures of the four tyres are
correct for the use of the vehicle and in
line with the recommendations on the
tyre pressure label.
The under-inflation alert can only
be relied on if the reinitialisation of
the system has been done with the
pressures in the four tyres correctly
adjusted.
The under-inflation detection system
does not give a warning if a pressure is
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
224
Driving
Operating fault
Monochrome screen C Touch screen
Reinitialisation of the function is Reinitialisation of the function is done
done in the "Personalisation- in the Driving menu of the touch
configuration" menu of the screen. screen.
The flashing and then fixed illumination of the
F Select the "Define the vehicle F In the Driving menu, select the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied
parameters" menu. "Settings"tab. by illumination of the Service warning lamp
F Select the "Driving assistance" menu. F In the page, select the "Under-inflation indicates a fault with the system.
F Select the "Tyre inflation" menu. reinitialisation" function. A message appears, accompanied by an
F Select the "Reinitialisation" function. F Select "Yes" to confirm. audible signal.
F Select "Yes" to confirm. The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display
The reinitialisation is confirmed by an audible of a message and an audible signal. In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the
6
signal. tyres is no longer assured.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
Before doing anything to the system,

the pressures of the four tyres must be
checked and the system reinitialised.
225
Driving
Memorising speeds
This function allows speeds to be saved, which can then be offered to set the two systems: the speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle) or the
cruise control (for a vehicle cruising speed).
You can memorise up to six speed settings for each of the two systems.
By default, some speed settings are already memorised.
Modifying a speed setting "MEM" button
This function is accessible in the F Select the "Speed limiter" or "Cruise This button allows you to select a memorised
control" tab, depending on the system for speed setting for use with the speed limiter or
which you want to memorise new speed the cruise control.
F Select the "Driving assistance" tab. settings. For more information on the Speed limiter or
F Select "Speed settings". F Select the speed setting you want to the Cruise control, refer to the corresponding
modify. section.
F Enter the new value using the numerical

As a safety measure, the driver must keypad and confirm.
only modify the speed settings when F Confirm to save the modifications and quit
stationary. the menu.
226
Driving
Speed limit recognition

This system allows the speed limit detected by Principles
the camera to be displayed in the instrument
panel.
The automatic reading of road signs is a
Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy
driving assistance system and does not
goods vehicles, are not displayed.
always display speed limits correctly.
The display of the speed limit in the instrument
The speed limit signs present on the
panel is updated as you pass a speed limit sign
road always take priority over the
intended for cars (light vehicles).
display by the system.
The system cannot in any
circumstances replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
The driver must observe the driving
The units for the speed limits (mph or regulations and must adapt the speed
of the vehicle to suit the weather and
6
km/h) depend on the country you are
driving in. Using a camera at the top of the windscreen, traffic.
It should be taken into account so that this system detects and reads speed limit and It is possible for the system to not
you observe the speed limit. end of speed limit signs. display the speed limit if it does not
For the system to operate correctly The system also takes account of information detect a speed limit sign within a preset
when you change country, the units for on speed limits from the navigation system period.
speed in the instrument panel must be mapping. The system is designed to detect signs
those for the country you are driving in. that conform to the Vienna Convention
on road signs.
It is necessary to update your

navigation mapping regularly in order to To maintain correct operation of the
receive accurate information on speed system: regularly clean the area in front
limits from the system. of the camera.
227
Driving
Display in the instrument panel Display of the speed
1. Indication of the speed limit. The system is active but is not detecting speed The driver can, if desired, adjust the speed of
or limit information. the vehicle according to the information given
2. Indication of the end of the speed limit. by the system.
The system is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle parameters menu in the screen.
On detection of speed limit information, the

system displays the value.
228
Driving
Operating limits Memorising the speed

The legislation on speed limits is specific to
setting
each country. This memorisation is in addition to the display
The system does not take account of reduced of Speed limit recognition.
speed limits in the following cases:
- poor weather (rain, snow),
- atmospheric pollution,
- trailer, caravan,
- driving with a space-saver type spare
wheel or snow chains fitted,
- puncture repair using the temporary repair Steering mounted controls
kit, 1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode.
- young drivers, The driver can choose to adapt the speed 2. Memorise a speed setting.
6
- ... setting to the speed limit suggested, by
pressing the memorisation button for the speed
The system may be disrupted or not work at all
limiter, the standard cruise control and the
in the following situations:
dynamic cruise control with Stop function.
- poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
This speed setting then replaces the previous
falling snow, rain, fog),
speed setting for the speed limiter and/or cruise
- windscreen area ahead of the camera dirty,
control.
misty, frosty, covered with snow, damaged
or masked by a sticker,
- fault with the camera,
- obsolete or incorrect mapping,
- hidden road signs (other vehicles, For more information on the Speed
vegetation, snow), limiter, Cruise control, or Dynamic
Display in the instrument panel
- speed limit signs that do not conform to the cruise control with Stop function,
standard, are damaged or distorted. refer to the corresponding sections. 3. Speed limiter indication.
4. Memorise the speed.
5. Current speed setting.
229
Driving
Memorising the speed
F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control.

Speed limiter/cruise control information is
displayed.
On detection of a speed limit sign, the system F Make an initial press on this button to
displays the speed limit and offers to make it a request saving of the speed suggested.
new speed setting.
"MEM" flashes in the screen for a few seconds.
If the difference between the speed setting

and the speed displayed by the recognition
system is less than 6 mph (10km/h), the
MEM symbol is not displayed.
F Press this button again to confirm and save
the new speed setting.
After a predetermined period, the screen
returns to the current display.
230
Driving
Speed limiter
System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.
The speed limiter is switched on manually. Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
The minimum programmed speed is 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The programmed speed remains in the system
memory when the ignition is switched off.
The speed limiter is a driving aid that

cannot, in any circumstances, replace the
need to observe speed limits or the need
for vigilance on the part of the driver.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select speed limiter mode.
Decrease the programmed value.
Increase the programmed value.
Speed limiter On / Pause.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Speed limiter on / pause indication.
Speed limiter mode selection indication.
Programmed speed value.
Select a memorised speed or, depending
6
5. Display memorised speed settings or, on version,
depending on version, Speed suggested by the speed limit
Accept the speed suggested by the speed recognition system.
limit recognition system.
For more information on Memorising speeds

or Speed limit recognition, refer to the
231
Driving
Switching on Adjusting the limit speed

setting
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
in order to set the speed.
To modify the limit speed setting from the To modify the speed limiter setting using the
current speed of the vehicle: speed suggested by the speed limit recognition
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make system:
successive short presses on button 2 or 3, F the speed suggested is displayed in the
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h), instrument panel,
"LIMIT"position to select the speed press and hold button 2 or 3. F make a first press on button 5; a message
limiter; the function is paused. is displayed to confirm the memorisation
request,
To modify the limit speed setting using F press button 5 again to save the suggested
memorised speeds and from the touch screen: speed.
F press button 5 to display the six memorised This value is then displayed in the instrument
speed settings, panel as the new speed limiter setting.
F press the button for the desired speed
F If the speed setting is suitable (last speed setting.
setting programmed in the system), press This setting becomes the new limit speed.
button 4 to switch the speed limiter on.
F Pressing button 4 again temporarily

interrupts the function (pause).
232
Driving
Temporarily exceeding the Operating fault

programmed speed
F If you want to temporarily exceed the When the limit speed is exceeded but is not Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the speed
programmed limit speed, press firmlyon due to action by the driver, there is an audible limiter.
the accelerator pedal, going beyond the signal to complete the alert. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
point of resistance. Once the speed of the vehicle returns to qualified workshop.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily the programmed setting, the speed limiter
and the displayed programmed speed flashes. functions again: the display of the programmed
speed setting becomes steady again.
6
PEUGEOT may interfere with the
operation of the speed limiter.
pedals:
On a steep descent or in the event of Switching off - ensure that the mat is positioned
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter correctly,
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position:
will not be able to prevent the vehicle - do not fit one mat on top of another.
the display of information on the speed
from exceeding the programmed speed.
limiter disappears.
233
Driving
Cruise control
System which automatically maintains the cruising speed of the vehicle at a setting programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control is switched on Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
manually.
It requires a minimum vehicle speed of
25 mph (40 km/h) as well as:
- with a manual gearbox, the
engagement of third gear or higher,
- with an automatic gearbox, the gear
selector in D mode or second gear
or higher in M mode.
Speed regulation remains active after
changing gear on vehicles fitted with a
manual gearbox and Stop & Start.
1. Select cruise control mode selection. 6. Cruise control pause / resume indication.
2. Set the current speed of the vehicle as the 7. Cruise control mode selected indication.
cruise setting or lower the cruise setting. 8. Cruise speed setting.
3. Set the current speed of the vehicle as the 9. Select a memorised cruise speed or,
cruise setting or raise the cruise setting. depending on version,
4. Pause / Resume cruise control. The speed suggested by the speed limit
The operation of the cruise control can be
5. Display memorised speed settings or, recognition system.
interrupted (pause):
depending on version,
- by pressing control 4 or by pressing the
Accept the speed suggested by the speed
brake pedal, The cruise control system is a driving aid
limit recognition system.
- automatically, if operation of the dynamic that cannot, in any circumstances, replace
stability control system is triggered. the need to observe speed limits, nor the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
For more information on Memorising speeds
As a safety measure, you are advised to
Switching off the ignition cancels any or Speed limit recognition, refer to the
keep your feet near the pedals at all times.
programmed speed setting. corresponding section.
234
Driving
Switching on Modifying the cruise speed

F Pressing button 4 interrupts operation of setting
the system (pause).
The cruise control must be active.
To modify the cruise speed setting from the

current speed of the vehicle:
F in steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h), make
repeated short presses on button 2 or 3,
F continuously, in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h),
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the F Pressing button 4 again restores operation press and hold button 2 or 3.
"CRUISE"position to select cruise control of the cruise control (ON).
mode; the function is paused.
Take care: pressing and holding
button2 or 3results in a rapid change
6
in the speed of your vehicle.
F To start the cruise control and set a cruise To modify the cruise speed setting using
speed, once the vehicle has reached the memorised speeds and from the touch screen:
desired speed, press button 2 or 3: the F press button 5 to display the six memorised
current speed of your vehicle becomes the speed settings,
cruise speed setting. F press the button for the desired speed
You can release the accelerator pedal. setting.
This setting becomes the new cruise speed.
235
Driving
Temporarily exceeding the

programmed speed
To modify the cruise speed setting using the When required (overtaking manoeuvre...), it is You may have to brake to control the speed of
speed suggested by the speed limit recognition possible to exceed the programmed speed by your vehicle. In this case, the cruise control is
system: pressing the accelerator pedal. automatically paused.
F the speed suggested is displayed in the The cruise control is temporarily overridden To activate the system again, with the speed
instrument panel, and the programmed speed setting flashes. of the vehicle above 25 mph (40 km/h), press
F make a first press on button 5; a message button 4.
is displayed to confirm the memorisation
request,
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
speed.
This value is then displayed in the instrument
Switching off
panel as the new cruise speed setting. To return to the programmed speed, simply F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position:
release the accelerator pedal. the cruise control information disappears
Once the vehicle has returned to the from the screen.
As a precaution, it is recommended
that the cruise speed chosen be close programmed speed, the cruise control takes
to the current speed of your vehicle, so over again: the display of the programmed
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or speed setting becomes steady again.
deceleration of the vehicle.
When descending a steep hill, the

cruise control system cannot prevent
the vehicle from exceeding the
programmed speed.
236
Driving
Operating fault
Only use the cruise control if the traffic
Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the cruise conditions will allow you to drive for a
control system. certain time at a steady speed and at a
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
qualified workshop. Do not activate the cruise control in
urban areas, in heavy traffic, on winding
or steep roads, on slippery or flooded
roads, or in conditions of poor visibility
(heavy rain, fog, falling snow...).
In some circumstances, it may not be
possible to maintain or reach the cruise
speed set: towing, vehicle heavily
6
loaded, steep climb.

PEUGEOT may interfere with the
operation of the cruise control.
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
237
Driving
Dynamic cruise control with Stop function

This system provides two functions: Principles
- automatic regulation of the speed of the
vehicle to a value programmed by the driver, If the driver operates a direction indicator to
- automatic adjustment of the distance overtake a slower vehicle, the dynamic cruise
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. control allows your vehicle to temporarily
It manages the acceleration and deceleration approach the vehicle in front to assist the
of the vehicle by automatically acting on the overtaking manoeuvre, though never exceeding
engine and the braking system. the programmed speed.
To do this, the system has a radar, located in
the middle of the front bumper, with a maximum
range of 150 metres. This system detects a vehicle running in front of
The dynamic cruise control is a driving
your vehicle, travelling in the same direction.
aid that cannot in any circumstances
It automatically adapts the speed of your
replace the observation of speed limits
vehicle to that of the vehicle in front, to maintain
and safe distances, nor the need for
a constant distance.
If the vehicle in front is running more slowly, the
It is recommended that you always keep
system slows, or even stops your vehicle, using
your feet close to the pedals.
engine braking and the braking system.
The driver must be ready to take back
If the braking system is used to decelerate the
control of their vehicle at any time,
vehicle, the brake lamps come on.
using the brake or accelerator pedal as
If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes
appropriate.
lane, the cruise control progressively
accelerates your vehicle to return to the
programmed speed.
238
Driving
Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
6
1. Select cruise control mode. 7. Indication of the presence / absence of a 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting.
2. Use the current speed as the speed target vehicle. 13. Position of the vehicle detected by the radar.
setting/ Lower the speed setting. 8. Indication of cruise control activation /
3. Use the current speed as the speed deactivation.
setting/ Raise the speed setting. 9. Speed setting. This information is visible in the instrument
4. Pause / Resume cruise control. 10. Indication that vehicle is held stationary. panel in "DRIVING" display mode.
5. Use the speed suggested by the speed 11. Speed suggested by the speed limit
limit recognition system. recognition system.
6. Display and adjust the inter-vehicle
distance setting. If a vehicle is detected, the symbol 7is filled
with the colour associated with the cruise
control mode. By default, the symbol 7 is
empty.
For more information on Speed limit In cruise control activated mode, the symbol8
recognition, refer to the corresponding appears in green. By default, the symbol 8
section. appears in grey.
239
Driving
Switching on Pause
F With the ignition on, turn the thumbwheel1 The dynamic cruise control can be paused
to the "CRUISE" position: cruise control manually by:
mode is selected, but not started (grey). - action by the driver:
F Vehicle moving, press one of the buttons2 on button 4,
or 3: the current speed of your vehicle on the brake pedal,
becomes the cruise speed setting. on the electric parking brake control,
The cruise control is activated (green). when changing from D to N with an
By default, the inter-vehicle distance is set at automatic gearbox.
"Normal" (2 dashes). - or automatically, if operation of the ESC
Otherwise, the last setting made will be used system is triggered for reasons of safety.
when switching on the system.
The cruise control is switched on manually, it
requires a vehicle speed of between 18 and
112 mph (30 and 180 km/h). Switching off the ignition cancels any
An automatic gearbox must be in position D programmed speed setting. Following braking of the vehicle
or M. bringing it to a complete stop, the
system holds the vehicle stationary;
the cruise control is paused. The driver
When the cruise control is operating,
should press the accelerator pedal to
Stop & Start is automatically
move off, then reactivate the system
deactivated.
by exceeding 18mph (30 km/h) and
pressing button2, 3 or 4.
If the driver takes no action following
this immobilisation, the electric parking
brake is applied automatically after a
few minutes.
240
Driving
Modification of the speed

setting
When the cruise control is paused, Modification from the speed limit
it can only be reactivated when all of recognition system
the safety conditions are met. The F The speed to be memorised is displayed in
message "Activation not possible, the instrument panel.
conditions unsuitable" is displayed while F Make an initial press on button 5; a
reactivation is not possible. message is displayed to confirm the
Wait until the speed of the vehicle memorisation request.
is close to the speed setting before F Press button 5 again to save the suggested
reactivating the system - by pressing speed.
Engine running and cruise control on (green),
button 2 or 3 - in order to set your The speed is then displayed in the instrument
you can modify the speed setting.
current speed as the new speed setting. panel as the new speed setting.
Modification from the current

speed
F By successive short presses on button 2 or
For more information on Speed limit
recognition, refer to the corresponding
6
section.
3, to raise or lower the setting in steps of +
or - 1 mph (km/h),
F By a maintained press on button 2 or 3,
toraise or lower the setting in steps
of + or - 5 mph (km/h).
As a precaution, it is recommended that
you select a cruise speed setting close
Take care: a prolonged press on to the current speed of your vehicle, so
button2 or 3 will cause a very quick as to avoid any sudden acceleration or
change in the speed of your vehicle. deceleration of the vehicle.
241
Driving
Modification of the inter- Exceeding the programmed

vehicle distance setting setting
This setting remains in memory, whatever the It is possible to exceed the speed setting
state of the system and when the ignition is temporarily by depressing the accelerator
switched off. pedal.
The cruise control no longer manages the
braking system during this period.
Simply release the accelerator pedal to return
to the programmed speed.
If the programmed speed setting is exceeded,

the display of the speed setting disappears
Three predefined inter-vehicle distance settings and a message "Cruise control suspended"
are offered: is displayed until the accelerator pedal is
- "Distant" (3 dashes), released.
- "Normal" (2 dashes),
- "Close" (1 dash).
Engine running and cruise control selected
(grey), you can modify the inter-vehicle
distance setting:
F press button 6 to display the selection
screen for inter-vehicle distance,
F press button 6 repeatedly to cycle through
the predefined settings.
The selection screen closes after a
fewseconds.
The modification is then taken into account.
242
Driving
Driving situations and associated alerts

To benefit from all of the information available in the instrument panel, you must first select the "DRIVING" display mode.
The following table describes the alerts and the messages displayed for the different driving situations.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Indicator Display Associated message Comment

"Cruise control paused" System paused.
No vehicle detected.
according to the inter-vehicle
distance selected
"Cruise control paused" System paused.
A vehicle has been detected.
6
distance selected
70
"Cruise control on" System activated.
No vehicle detected.
distance selected
70
"Cruise control on" System activated.
A vehicle has been detected.

distance selected
"Cruise control suspended" System activated.
The driver has temporarily taken control of the vehicle by
or accelerating.
243
Driving
Indicator Display Associated message Comment

"Take back control of the The driver should take control of the vehicle by accelerating or
70 + vehicle" braking, depending on the circumstances.
"Take back control of the The system cannot manage the critical situation alone
70 +
vehicle" (emergency braking of the target vehicle, rapid insertion of
another vehicle between the two vehicles).
The driver must immediately take back control of the
vehicle.
"Activation not possible, The system refuses to activate the cruise control (speed outside
70 conditions unsuitable" the operating range, winding road).
or
70
"Cruise control paused" The system has brought the vehicle to a complete stop and is
(for a few seconds) holding it immobilised.
The driver should accelerate to move off again.
or The cruise control remains paused until the driver reactivates it
with the speed of the vehicle above 18 mph (30 km/h).
distance selected and the actual
distance from the target vehicle
244
Driving
Limits of operation
The system cannot exceed the limits of the
laws of physics.
It is recommended that the system be
deactivated when the "space-saver" spare
wheel is in use.
The system should not be activated when
towing a trailer.
In certain critical situations, the system will
encourage the driver to immediately take back
control:
- if the vehicle in front slows down too much
or too suddenly, and the driver does not
6
brake,
- if a vehicle comes between your vehicle As the radar's field of detection is quite narrow, The cruise control does not take account of:
and the vehicle in front. it is possible that the system may not detect: - pedestrians, cyclists, animals,
- vehicles of reduced width (motorcycles, - stationary vehicles (traffic jam, red light,
scooters...), breakdown...),
- vehicles not running in the middle of the - vehicles crossing a junction,
lane, - vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
- vehicles entering a corner,
- vehicles suddenly pulling out.
245
Driving
Operating fault
The cruise control operates by day and at The system is not intended for driving in the
In the event of a fault with the cruise
night, in fog or moderate rainfall. following situations:
control, you are alerted by the
However, it is strongly recommended that - the front end of the vehicle has been
illumination of this warning lamp
you always keep a safe distance from modified (addition of driving lamps),
and the display of a message in the
vehicles ahead, according to the driving - driving on a racing circuit,
instrument panel, accompanied by an
conditions, the weather and the road - running on a rolling road,
audible signal.
surface. - use of snow chains or non-slip covers.

Use the cruise control only where the PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation
of the cruise control. As a safety measure, do not use the
driving conditions allow running at a
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: system if the brake lamps are faulty.
constant speed and at an adequate safe
- ensure that mats are secured correctly, Do not use the system if the front
distance.
- never fit one mat on top of another. bumper is damaged.
Do not use the cruise control in urban
areas, heavy traffic, on winding or steep
roads or on slippery or flooded surfaces.
In certain circumstances, it may not
be possible for the speed setting to be The operation of the radar, located in the
maintained or even attained: loaded front bumper, may be disturbed in certain
vehicle, ascending a steep hill, ... weather conditions, for example: with
accumulations of snow, ice, mud, ...
Clean the front bumper, removing the snow,
mud, ...
246
Driving
Distance alert and Active Safety Brake

Conditions for activation and operation
The system is active from about 4 mph (7 km/h) Points on the Active Safety Brake
and is deactivated below about 3 mph (5 km/h). function
It takes account of: The speed of the vehicle must be between 3
This system includes three functions:
- registered vehicles running in the same and 87 mph (5 and 140 km/h) when a moving
- Distance alert (alert if there is a risk of
direction or stationary, vehicle is detected.
collision),
- pedestrians present in the traffic lane The speed of the vehicle must not be higher
- Intelligent emergency braking assistance,
(bicycles, motorcycles, animals and objects than 50 mph (80 km/h) when a stationary
- Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency
on the road are not necessarily detected). vehicle is detected.
braking). The speed of the vehicle must not be higher
than 36 mph (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is
Distance alert: it warns the driver if their detected.
This system is designed to assist the
vehicle is at risk of collision with the The DSC system must not be deactivated or
driver and improve road safety. faulty.
vehicle in front or a pedestrian present in
6
It is the driver's responsibility to All occupants must have fastened their seat
their traffic lane.
continuously monitor the state of belts.
Intelligent emergency braking assistance:
the traffic, observing the driving Driving at steady speed on roads with few
it completes the braking action taken by the
regulations. bends is required.
driver if this is inadequate.
This system does not avoid the need for
Active Safety Brake: it intervenes following
vigilance on the part of the driver. Following an impact, the system
the alert if the driver does not react quickly
is automatically disabled; contact
enough and does not operate the vehicle's
brakes.
workshop to have the system checked.
If the driver fails to act, it contributes
towards avoiding a collision or limiting
its severity by reducing the speed of your
vehicle.
The vehicle is fitted with a radar located in the

front bumper and a camera at the top of the
windscreen.
247
Driving
Limits of operation Distance alert

In the following cases, it is recommended Depending on the degree of risk of collision
Where the speed of your vehicle is too
that the system be deactivated in the vehicle detected by the system and the alert threshold
high approaching another vehicle, the
configuration menu: chosen by the driver, different levels of alert can be
first level of alert may not be displayed:
- when towing a trailer or caravan, triggered and displayed in the instrument panel.
the level 2 alert may be displayed
- when carrying long objects on roof bars or
directly.
a roof rack, Level 1: visual alert only, signalling
Important: the level 1 alert is never
- before using an automatic car wash, with to you that the vehicle in front is very
displayed if the "Close" threshold has
the engine running, close.
been selected.
- before placing the vehicle on a rolling road The message "Vehicle close" is
in a workshop, displayed.
- when the vehicle is being towed, with the
engine running,
This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle
- when a "space-saver" type spare wheel is
time between your vehicle and the vehicle in
fitted (depending on version),
front.
- following impact damage to the windscreen
close to the detection camera,
- if the front bumper has been damaged, Level 2: visual and audible alert,
- if the brake lamps are not working. warning you that a collision is
imminent.
The message "Brake!" is displayed.
Because of limits in the operation of the
system, it is possible that warnings are This level of alert is based on the time before
not given, are given too late or seem collision. It takes account of the vehicle
unjustified. dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the
Consequently, the driver must always one in front, the environmental conditions, the
remain attentive and able to react at any operation of the vehicle (cornering, pedals
time to avoid an accident. pressed, etc.) to trigger the alert at the best
moment.
248
Driving
Intelligent emergency
braking assistance
Modifying the alert trigger If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to
threshold avoid a collision, this system will complete the
braking, within the limits of the laws of physics.
This threshold determines how you wish to be
This assistance will only be provided if you
warned of the presence of a vehicle moving
press the brake pedal.
or stationary in front of you, or a pedestrian
present in your traffic lane.
The current threshold can be modified via the
vehicle configuration menu in the screen.
You can select one of three thresholds:
- "Distant",
- "Normal",
6
- "Close".
The last threshold selected is kept in memory
249
Driving
Active Safety Brake
If the radar and the camera have

Operation of the function may be felt by
confirmed the presence of a vehicle
slight vibration in the brake pedal.
or a pedestrian, this warning lamp
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
flashes once the function is acting on
the automatic braking is maintained for
the vehicle's brakes.
1 to 2 seconds.
Important: if operation of the

automatic emergency braking is
triggered, you should take back With a manual gearbox, in the event
control of your vehicle and brake of the automatic emergency braking
with the pedal to add to or finish the bringing the vehicle to a complete stop,
automatic braking action. the engine may stall.
With an automatic gearbox, in the event
of the automatic emergency braking
The driver can take back control of the vehicle
bringing the vehicle to a complete stop,
at any time by sharply turning the steering
keep the brake pedal pressed to stop
wheel and/or pressing the accelerator pedal.
the vehicle moving off again.
This function, also called automatic emergency

The point at which braking is triggered
braking, aims to reduce the speed of impact or
may be adjusted according to the
avoid a frontal collision by your vehicle where
reaction from the driver, such as
the driver fails to react.
movement of the steering wheel or
Using a radar and a camera, this function acts
pressing the accelerator pedal.
on the vehicle's braking system.
250
Driving
Deactivation / Activation Operating fault
By default, the system is automatically In the event of a fault, you are alerted There may be interference in the
activated at every engine start. by the illumination of this warning operation of the camera or it may not
The system can be deactivated or activated in lamp, accompanied by the display of work at all in the following situations:
the vehicle settings menu in the screen. a message and an audible signal. - poor visibility (inadequate street
Check that the sensors (camera and radar) are lighting, falling snow, heavy rain,
Deactivation of the system is
not covered by dirt, mud, frost, snow... dense fog, ...),
signalled by the illumination of this
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT - dazzle (headlamps of an
indicator lamp, accompanied by the
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the approaching vehicle on the other
display of a message.
system checked. side of the road, low sun, reflection
on a wet road, leaving a tunnel,
alternating between light and
6
Clean the windscreen regularly, shade, ...),
particularly the area in front of the - camera or radar masked (mud,
camera. frost, snow, ...).
Do not allow snow to accumulate on In these situations, detection
the bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this performance may be reduced.
could mask the camera's view.
Clean the front bumper, removing mud,
snow, ...
If the front bumper is to be repainted,

contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop. Certain types of
paint could interfere with the operation
of the radar.
251
Driving
Fatigue detection system

It is recommended that you take a break as soon as you feel tired or at least every two hours.
Depending on version, the function either has the "Driving time warning" only, or this combined with the "Fatigue detection system".
Activation / Deactivation Driving time warning

The system is activated or deactivated via the The system resets itself if one of the following
vehicle configuration menu. conditions is met:
For more information on the menu, refer to the - engine running, the vehicle has been
part covering your screen in the "Dashboard stationary for more than 15 minutes,
instruments" section. - the ignition has been switched off for a
fewminutes,
The state of the system stays in memory when
- the driver's seat belt is unfastened and
their door is open.
The system cannot in any As soon as the speed of the vehicle

circumstances replace the need for drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the
vigilance on the part of the driver. system goes into standby.
The system triggers an alert once it detects that
Do not take the wheel if you are tired. The driving time is counted again once
the driver has not taken a break after two hours
the speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h).
of driving at a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
This alert takes the form of the display of a

message encouraging you to take a break,
accompanied by an audible signal.
If the driver does not follow this advice, the
alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
stopped.
252
Driving
Fatigue detection system

The following situations may interfere
with the operation of the system or
prevent it working:
- poor visibility (inadequate lighting
of the roadway, falling snow, heavy
rain, dense fog, ...),
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on
a damp road, leaving a tunnel,
alternating shade and light, ...),
- windscreen area located in front
Depending on version, the "Driving time Once the system considers that the behaviour of the camera: dirty, misted, frost-
6
warning" may be combined with the "Fatigue of the vehicle suggests a certain level of fatigue covered, snow-covered, damaged
detection system". or inattention by the driver, it triggers the first or covered by a sticker,
level of alert. - lane markings absent, worn,
Using a camera placed at the top of the The driver is then alerted by the message masked (snow, mud) or multiple
windscreen, the system assesses the driver's "Take care!", accompanied by an audible (roadworks, ...),
level of vigilance by identifying variations in signal. - close to the vehicle ahead (lane
trajectory compared to the lane markings.
markings not detected),
This system is particularly suited to fast roads After three first level alerts, the system triggers - roads that are narrow, winding, ...
(speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)) a new alert with the message "Take a break!",
accompanied by a more pronounced audible
signal.
In certain driving conditions (poor road
surface or strong winds), the system
may give alerts independent of the
driver's level of vigilance.
253
Driving
Lane Departure Warning System

System which, using a camera which Activation / Deactivation Operating fault
recognises solid or broken lines, detects the
involuntary crossing of longitudinal traffic lane Activation and deactivation of the
markings on the ground. function is done via the Driving In the event of a fault, this warning
To provide safe driving, the camera analyses menu in the touch screen. lamp comes on in the instrument
the image then, if the driver's attention drops panel, accompanied by the display
and the speed is higher than 37 mph (60 km/h), of a message and an audible signal.
"Lane departure detection assistance.".
triggers a warning if there is an unexpected Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
change of direction. qualified workshop.
This system is particularly useful on motorways The status of the system remains in memory
and main roads. when the ignition is switched off.
The detection may be impeded:
- if the markings on the ground are
worn,
Detection - if there is little contrast between the
If an unexpected change of direction markings on the ground and the
is detected, you are alerted by road surface,
this warning lamp flashing in the - if the windscreen is dirty,
instrument panel and an audible - in certain weather conditions: fog,
signal. heavy rain, snow, shade, bright
sunlight or direct exposure to the
No warning is transmitted while the direction sun (low sun, leaving a tunnel, ...).
indicator is active and for approximately
This system is a driving aid that cannot,
20seconds after the direction indicator is
in any circumstances, replace the need
switched off.
254
Driving
Assisted Lane Departure Warning System

Using a camera placed at the top of the windscreen to identify lane markings on the ground, this system corrects the trajectory of the vehicle while
alerting the driver if it detects a risk of involuntary crossing of a line.
This system is particularly useful on motorways and main roads.
Conditions for operation

The speed of the vehicle must be between 40
This system is a driving aid which
and 112 mph (65 and 180 km/h).
cannot, in any circumstances, replace
The carriageway must have at least one lane
the need for vigilance on the part of the
marking (solid or broken) on the ground.
driver.
The driver must hold the wheel with both
The driver remains responsible for the
hands.
vehicle in all circumstances. The system
The change of trajectory is not accompanied by
helps the driver only when there is a risk
operation of the direction indicators.
of the vehicle involuntarily wandering
The ESC system must be activated.
6
from the lane it is being driven on.
It does not manage the safe driving
distance, the speed of the vehicle or the
brakes.
The driver must hold the steering wheel
in a way that allows control to be taken
back in circumstances where the system
is not able to intervene (where there are
no lane markings, for example).
It is necessary to observe the driving
regulations and take a break every
twohours.
255
Driving
Operation
Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle
If the system detects that the driver is
involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings
not holding the wheel firmly enough
detected, it makes the correction to the
during an automatic correction of
trajectory necessary to return the vehicle to its
trajectory, it interrupts the correction.
initial path.
An alert is triggered to encourage
The driver will then notice a turning movement
the driver to take back control of the
of the steering wheel.
vehicle.
This warning lamp flashes during
trajectory correction.
While the direction indicators are on and for
a few seconds after switching them off, the
system considers that any change of trajectory
If the driver wishes to maintain the is voluntary and no correction is triggered
trajectory of the vehicle, they can during this period.
prevent the correction by keeping a firm However, with the "Blind Spot Monitoring
grip on the wheel (during an avoiding System" activated, if the driver starts changing
manoeuvre, for example). lane and another vehicle is detected in the
The correction is interrupted if the vehicle's blind spot, the system will correct
direction indicators are operated. the trajectory of the vehicle even though the
direction indicators are on.
For more information on the Blind Spot
Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding
section.
256
Driving
Driving situations and associated alerts

To benefit from all of the information needed in the instrument panel, you must first select the "DRIVING" display mode.
The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed according to the driving situation.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
State of the Warning Associated display

Comment
system lamp and message
OFF System deactivated.
ON System active, conditions not met:

- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
- no lane marking recognised,
6
- ESC deactivated or operation triggered,
- "sporty" driving.
ON Automatic deactivation / standby of the system (for example: detection of a trailer, use of the
"space-saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle).
ON Detection of lane markings.

Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side concerned or the risk of involuntary crossing is
detected (orange line).
ON - If, during correction, the system detects that the driver has not held the wheel for a few
seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns control to the driver.
"Take back the wheel". - During correction of the trajectory, the system determines that the correction will not be
enough and a solid line is crossed: the driver is warned that they must complete the correction
of trajectory.
257
Driving
Limits of operation
The system goes into standby automatically in Risk of undesirable operation
The system may not operate correctly
the following cases:
or at all in the following situations:
- ESC deactivated or operation triggered,
- conditions of poor visibility Deactivation of the system is recommended in
- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or above
(inadequate street lighting, the following situations:
112 mph (180 km/h),
snowfall, rain, fog), - driving on a road surface in poor condition,
- connected electrically to a trailer,
- dazzle (headlamps of on oncoming - unfavorable weather conditions,
- use of the "space-saver" spare
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a - driving on slippery surfaces (black ice).
wheel detected (as detection is not
wet road surface, leaving a tunnel,
immediate, deactivation of the system is
alternating light and shade),
recommended),
- area of the windscreen in front of The system is not designed for the following
- dynamic driving style detected, pressure
the camera dirty, misted, frosted, driving situations:
on the brake or accelerator pedal,
snow-covered, damaged or - driving on a speed circuit,
- driving where there are no lane markings,
covered by a sticker, - driving with a trailer,
- operation of the direction indicators,
- road markings absent, worn, - driving on a rolling road,
- driving in a tight corner,
hidden (snow, mud) or multiple - driving on unstable surfaces.
- inactivity by the driver detected during
(roadworks),
correction.
- running close to the vehicle in front
(the lane markings may not be
detected),
- narrow, twisty roads.
258
Driving
Activation / Deactivation Operating fault

Activation / deactivation of the
system is done in the Driving menu
of the touch screen.
Select the "Driving assistance" tab then
"Help staying in lane". In the event of a fault with the system, you are
alerted by the illumination of these warning
lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by
The state of the system stays in memory when
the display of a message and an audible signal.
259
Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring System

Activation and deactivation of the
system is done in the Driving menu
"Blind spot monitoring".
This indicator lamp comes on in the

instrument panel.
This system warns the driver of the presence of Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on
another vehicle in the blind spot angle of their monitor the blind spots.
the side in question:
vehicle (areas masked from the driver's field
- immediately, when being overtaken,
of vision), as soon as this presents a potential To deactivate the system, select
- after a delay of about one second, when
danger. "Blind spot monitoring" again in the
overtaking a vehicle slowly.
"Driving assistance" tab.
This system is designed to improve The indicator lamp goes off.
safety when driving and is in no
circumstances a substitute for the use
of the interior rear view mirror and door The state of the system remains in memory on
mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to switching off the ignition.
constantly check the traffic, to assess
the distances and relative speeds
of other vehicles and to predict their The system is automatically deactivated
movements before deciding whether to when towing with a towbar approved by
change lane. PEUGEOT.
This system is a driving aid that cannot,
in any circumstances, replace the need
260
Driving
Operation
The alert is given by a warning lamp which
comes on in the door mirror on the side in
question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry,
bicycle - is detected.
The following conditions must be met for this:
- all vehicles are moving in the same
direction and in adjacent lanes,
- the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and
87 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
- you overtake a vehicle with a speed
difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
- a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
6
difference of less than 15 mph (25 km/h),
- the traffic is flowing normally, No alert will be given in the following situations: - when overtaking (or being overtaken by) a
- in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre, - in the presence of non-moving objects very long vehicle (lorry, coach...) which is
if this is prolonged and the vehicle being (parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, at the same time detected at the rear in the
overtaken remains in the blind spot, road signs...), blind spot angle and present in the driver's
- you are driving on a straight or slightly - with vehicles moving in the opposite forward field of vision,
curved road, direction, - in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
- your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, - driving on a winding road or a sharp corner, front and behind are confused with a lorry
acaravan... or a stationary object,
- when overtaking quickly.
261
Driving
Operating fault Assisted Blind Spot

Monitoring System
In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door
The system may suffer temporary
mirror on the side in question, a correction of
interference in certain weather
trajectory will be felt if you cross a lane marking
conditions (rain, hail...).
with the direction indicators on, to help you
In the event of a fault, this warning lamp flashes In particular, driving on a wet surface
avoid a collision.
for a few moments in the instrument panel, or moving from a dry area to a wet area
accompanied by illumination of the Service can cause false alerts (for example, the
warning lamp and the display of a message. presence of a fog of water droplets in
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the blind spot angle is interpreted as a Conditions for operation
workshop to have the system checked. vehicle). The following systems must be activated:
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that - Blind Spot Monitoring System,
the sensors are not covered by mud, ice - Assisted Lane Departure Warning System.
or snow.
Take care not to cover the warning zone
in the door mirrors or the detection
zones on the front and rear bumpers
with adhesive labels or other objects;
they may hamper the correct operation
of the system.
For more information on the Blind Spot
Monitoring System and the Assisted Lane
Departure Warning System, refer to the
corresponding sections.
High pressure jet wash

When washing your vehicle, direct the
lance at least 30 cm away from the
sensors.
262
Driving
Parking sensors
Rear parking sensors
The system is switched on by engaging reverse

gear.
This is confirmed by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you come out
of reverse gear.
This system indicates the proximity of an

obstacle (examples: pedestrian, vehicle, tree,
gate) which comes within the field of detection
6
of sensors located in the bumper.
Certain types of obstacle (examples: stake,
roadworks cone) detected initially will no longer
be detected at the end of the manoeuvre, if
they are located in blind spots in the sensors'
field of detection.
Audible assistance Visual assistance
The proximity information is given by an This supplements the audible signal by
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which displaying bars in the screen which move
This system cannot in any circumstances replace increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. progressively nearer to the vehicle.
the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The sound emitted by the speaker (right or When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger"
left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is symbol is displayed in the screen.
located.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle becomes less than approximately
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous.
263
Driving
Front parking sensors Deactivation / Activation Operating fault
In addition to the rear parking sensors, the The deactivation or activation of the system In the event of a fault, when reverse
front parking sensors are triggered when an is done in the vehicle parameters menu in the gear is engaged this warning lamp
obstacle is detected in front and the speed of screen. comes on in the instrument panel,
the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). The state of the system is held in memory when accompanied by the display of a
The front parking sensors are interrupted if the ignition is switched off. message and an audible signal
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds (short beep).
in forward gear, if no further obstacles are Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
detected or when the speed of the vehicle workshop to have the system checked.
The system will be deactivated
exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
automatically if a trailer is being
towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted on In bad or wintry weather, ensure that
a towbar (vehicle fitted with a towbar the sensors are not covered with mud,
The sound emitted by the speaker (front installed in line with the manufacturer's ice or snow. When reverse gear is
or rear) indicates whether the obstacle recommendations). engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
is in front or behind. indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
Certain sound sources (motorcycle,
lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger
The parking sensors are deactivated while the
the audible signals of the parking
Park Assist system is measuring a space.
sensor system.
For more information on Park Assist, refer to
High pressure jet wash

When washing your vehicle, do not
direct the lance within 30 cm of the
sensors.
264
Driving
Panoramic vision
General points
Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 The screen is divided into two parts: on the AUTO mode is activated by default.
6
left, a contextual view; on the right, a view from In this mode, the system chooses the best view
With the engine running, this system allows
above the vehicle. to display (standard or zoom) according to the
views of the vehicle's surroundings to be
The parking sensors complete the information information from the parking sensors.
displayed in the touch screen, using one
on the view from above the vehicle. You can change the type of view at any time
camera for Visiopark 1, and two cameras for
Different contextual views can be displayed in during a manoeuvre.
Visiopark 2.
the left-hand part: F Press the button at the bottom left-hand
- standard view, corner of the touch screen.
- 180 view, F Select the type of view:
- reconstructed view. "Standard view",
"180 view",
"Zoom view",
"AUTO view".
The display is immediately updated with the
type of view selected.
The state of the system is not kept in memory

265
Driving
Principle of image reconstruction Maintenance

With Visiopark 2, the view is reconstructed In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
using both cameras, when going forward and sensors and camera lenses are not covered
when reversing. with mud, ice or snow.
On activation of the system, it is possible Check the cleanliness of the camera lenses
that the central view is not reconstructed. If regularly.
the system is activated after the vehicle has If necessary, clean the camera lenses with a
already been driven, the central view may be soft, dry cloth.
completely reconstructed.
Using one or both cameras, this system This system is a visual aid that cannot
records the vehicle's surroundings during the in any circumstances replace the need High pressure jet wash
manoeuvre. for vigilance on the part of the driver. When washing your vehicle, keep the tip of the
An image from above your vehicle in its near lance at least 30 cm from the cameras.
surroundings is reconstructed in real time, as
you progress in the manoeuvre.
This representation facilitates the alignment of
your vehicle when parking and allows obstacles The images provided by the camera(s)
close to the vehicle to be seen. may be distorted by the relief.
This reconstructed view is automatically In the presence of areas in shade,
deleted if the vehicle remains stationary for or in conditions of bright sunlight or
toolong. inadequate lighting, the image may be
darkened and with lower contrast.
266
Driving
Visiopark 1
Rear vision AUTO mode Standard view
6
To activate the camera, located in the tailgate, This mode is activated by default. The area behind the vehicle is displayed in the
engage reverse and keep the speed of the Using sensors in the rear bumper, the screen.
vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h). automatic view changes from a rear view to a The blue lines represent the width of your
The system is deactivated: view from above, as an obstacle is approached vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their
- automatically above about 6 mph during a manoeuvre. direction changes with the position of the
(10 km/h), steering wheel.
- automatically on opening the tailgate, The red line represents a distance of 30 cm
- when coming out of reverse (the image from the rear bumper, and the two blue lines,
remains displayed for 7 seconds), 1 m and 2 m respectively.
- by pressing the red cross in the top left- This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
hand corner of the touch screen. view selection menu.
267
Driving
Zoom view Obstacles may appear further away

The camera records the vehicle's surroundings than they actually are in reality.
during the manoeuvre in order to reconstruct It is important to check the sides of the
a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be mirrors.
180 view
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. The rear parking sensors also
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the provide information on the vehicle's The 180 view facilitates reversing out of a
view selection menu. surroundings. parking bay, making it possible to see the
approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
This view is not recommended for carrying out
a complete manoeuvre.
It is made up of 3 areas: left A, centre B and
right C.
This view is available only from the view
selection menu.
268
Driving
Visiopark 2
The vehicle has a camera at the front, fitted
in the grille, and a camera at the rear, located
close to the tailgate opening control.
Using these cameras, the system displays
the vehicle's near surroundings in the touch
screen, offering views from the rear of the
vehicle (rear vision), when reverse gear is
engaged and views from the front of the vehicle
(front vision), when the gearbox is in neutral or
a gear is engaged.
Rear vision
6
If a trailer is connected or a bicycle
The system is activated automatically on carrier fitted to the towball, the area
engaging reverse. behind the vehicle in the view from
The system is deactivated: above becomes black.
- automatically above about 6 mph Reconstruction of the surroundings is
(10 km/h), achieved by the front camera only.
- when coming out of reverse (the image
remains displayed for 7 seconds),
- by pressing the red cross in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
269
Driving
Front and rear vision AUTO mode Standard view

With the engine running and the This mode is activated by default. The area in front of your vehicle is displayed in
speed below 12 mph (20 km/h), the Using sensors in the front bumper, the the screen.
system is activated in the Driving automatic view changes from front view to the The blue lines represent the width of your
menu of the touch screen: view from above as an obstacle is approached vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their
F Select "Panoramic visual aid". during a manoeuvre. direction changes with the position of the
steering wheel.
AUTO mode is displayed by default, with front
The red line represents a distance of 30 cm
vision, if the gearbox is in neutral or with a
from the front bumper, and the two blue lines,
gear engaged, or with rear vision, if reverse is
1 m and 2 m respectively.
engaged.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
The system is deactivated:
view selection menu.
- automatically above about 18 mph
(30km/h) (the image disappears
temporarily from 12 mph (20 km/h)),
- by pressing the red cross in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
270
Driving
Zoom view
6
Obstacles may appear further away
The camera records the vehicle's surroundings than they actually are in reality.
during the manoeuvre in order to reconstruct It is important to check the sides of the
a view from above the front of the vehicle in its vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be mirrors.
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. The front and rear parking sensors also 180 view
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the provide information on the vehicle's The 180 view facilitates the exit from of a
view selection menu. surroundings. parking bay in forward gear, making it possible
to see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians
and cyclists.
This view is not recommended for carrying out
The rear vision views are similar to those for a complete manoeuvre.
the Visiopark 1. It is made up of 3 areas: left A, centre B and
For more information on Visiopark 1, refer to right C.
the corresponding section. This view is available only from the view
selection menu.
271
Driving
Park Assist
This system provides active assistance with The Park Assist system provides assistance for
parking. It detects a parking space then the following manoeuvres:
operates the steering to park in the space.
It operates the steering while the driver
manages the accelerator, brakes, gears and
clutch (manual gearbox). During phases of
entry into and exit from a parking space, the
system provides visual and audible information
to the driver in order to make the manoeuvres
safe. It may be necessary to move forwards
and backwards more than once.
A. Entry into a parallel parking space C. Bay parking
The driver can take control at any time by

gripping the steering wheel. During a manoeuvre, the steering
wheel turns quickly: do not hold the
This manoeuvring assistance system steering wheel, do not place your
cannot, in any circumstances, replace hands between the spokes of the
the need for vigilance on the part of the steering wheel and take care with
driver. loose and bulky clothing (scarves, ties,
The driver must remain in control of their handbags...) - Risk of injury!
vehicle ensuring that the space remains
clear throughout the manoeuvre.
In some circumstances, the sensors may B. Exit from a parallel parking space
not detect small obstacles located in When Park Assist is activated, it
their blind spots. prevents a change to STOP mode of
Stop & Start. In STOP mode, activation
of Park Assist restarts the engine.
The Park Assist system cannot work
with the engine off.
272
Driving
The Park Assist system takes control The sequence of manoeuvres and the The parking sensors function is
of the power steering for a maximum driving instructions are displayed in the not available during parking space
of 4 manoeuvre cycles. The function instrument panel. measurement. It intervenes later when
is deactivated after these 4 cycles. manoeuvring to warn you that your
The assistance is
If you think that your vehicle is not vehicle is approaching an obstacle: the
activated: the display of this
positioned correctly, you should then audible signal becomes continuous
symbol and a speed limit
take control of the steering to carry out when the obstacle is less than thirty
indicate that the steering
the manoeuvre. centimetres away.
manoeuvres are controlled
If you have deactivated the parking
by the system: do not touch
sensors, they are automatically
the steering wheel.
reactivated during assisted parking
manoeuvres.
The assistance is
6
deactivated: the display of
this symbol indicates that
the steering manoeuvres
are no longer controlled by
the system: you must take Activation of Park Assist deactivates the
control of the steering. Blind Spot Monitoring System.
You should always check the

surroundings of your vehicle before
starting a manoeuvre.
273
Driving
Operation
Assistance with parallel parking
manoeuvres
F When you have identified a parking space.
F Select "Park Assist" in the

Driving menu of the touch
screen to activate the function.
This indicator lamp comes on in the F Operate the direction indicator on the
instrument panel to confirm activation F Limit the speed of the vehicle to
parking side chosen to activate the
of the function. a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
measurement function. You should drive
and select "Enter parking slot"
at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m
in the touch screen.
from the row of parked vehicles.
To enter a parking space, the system

does not identify spaces that are clearly
smaller or larger than the vehicle.
F Drive slowly following the instructions until

the system finds a free space.
274
Driving
F Move forwards slowly until a message is F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in F At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator
displayed, accompanied by an audible progress. lamp goes out in the instrument panel,
6
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move accompanied by the display of a message
forwards and backwards, aided by the and an audible signal.
warnings from the "Parking sensors" The assistance is deactivated: you can
system, until the indication of the end of the take over control.
manoeuvre.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel

and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
(7 km/h).
275
Driving
Assistance in exiting from a

parallel parking space
F When you want to leave a parallel parking
space, start the engine.

"Driving" menu of the touch
F Operate the direction indicator for the exit The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's
side chosen. front wheels are clear of the parking space.
This indicator lamp comes on in
F Engage reverse or forward gear and At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
the instrument panel to confirm the
release the steering wheel. in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
activation of the function.
by the display of a message and an audible
F Press on "Exit parking slot" in signal.
the touch screen. The assistance is deactivated: you can take
over control.
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in

progress. Without exceeding 3 mph
(5km/h), move forwards and backwards,
aided by the warnings from the "Parking
sensors" system, until the indication of the
end of the manoeuvre.
276
Driving
Assistance with bay parking When several successive bays are

manoeuvres found, the vehicle will be directed
towards the last one.
F Once you have identified a parking zone:

"Driving" menu of the touch
F Operate the direction indicator on the
This indicator lamp comes on in parking side chosen to activate the
the instrument panel to confirm the measurement function. You should drive
6
activation of the function. at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m
from the row of parked vehicles.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to
a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
and select "Start parking in a
bay" in the touch screen.
F Move forwards slowly until a message is

displayed, accompanied by an audible
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
F Drive slowly following the instructions until

the system finds a free space.
277
Driving
During a bay parking manoeuvre, the

Park Assist system is automatically
deactivated once the rear of the vehicle
is within 50 cm of an obstacle.
During parking and exit from parking

F Select reverse, release the steering wheel At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
manoeuvres, the reversing camera and
and start moving without exceeding 4 mph goes out in the instrument panel, accompanied
360 Vision functions may come into
(7 km/h). by the display of a message and an audible
operation. They facilitate monitoring
signal.
of the surroundings of the vehicle, by
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
displaying additional information in the
over control.
instrument panel.
For more information on Panoramic
vision, refer to the corresponding
section.
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in

progress.
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow
the instructions displayed in the instrument
panel, aided by the warnings from the
"Parking sensors" system, until the
indication of the end of the manoeuvre.
278
Driving
Deactivation Switching off

The system is deactivated by pressing the control. The system is switched off automatically:
If the lateral distance between your
The system is deactivated automatically: - when towing a trailer, connected
vehicle and the space is too great, the
- on switching off the ignition, electrically,
system may not be able to measure the
- if the engine stalls, - if the driver's door is opened,
space.
- if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes - if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph
Anything projecting beyond the envelope
of selection of the type of manoeuvre, (70 km/h).
of the vehicle (a ladder on the roof, for
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during To switch the system of for a prolonged period,
example) is not taken into account by the
a manoeuvre, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Park Assist system during a manoeuvre.
- if the road wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) workshop.
is triggered,
- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the Operating faults In bad weather or in winter, ensure that
stated limit,
the sensors are not covered by road
6
- when the driver interrupts movement of the
In the event of a fault, this warning dirt, ice or snow.
steering wheel,
lamp flashes for a few seconds, In the event of a fault, have the system
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,
accompanied by an audible signal. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
- on opening the driver's door,
If the fault occurs during the use qualified workshop.
- if one of the front wheels encounters an
obstacle. of the system, the warning lamp
The operation indicator lamp goes off in the goesoff.
instrument panel and a message is displayed
accompanied by an audible signal. In the event of a fault with the power High pressure jet washing
The driver should then take back control of the steering, this warning lamp flashes in When washing your vehicle, keep the lance at
vehicle's steering. the instrument panel, accompanied least 30 cm away from the sensors.
by a message.
If the system is deactivated during a Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified

manoeuvre, the drive should reactivate workshop.
it to repeat the measurement.
279
PEUGEOT & TOTAL,
A PARTNERSHIP TO DELIVER
BETTER PERFORMANCE!
2015 was marked by PEUGEOT's return to Rally-Raid,
one of the most difficult motorsport disciplines in the
world. To obtain the best performance in these trials,
PEUGEOT Sport chose TOTAL QUARTZ for the
PEUGEOT 2008 DKR, a lubricant of high technology
which protects the engine in the most severe
conditions.
TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects

of time.
TOTAL QUARTZ Ineo First is a high performance lubricant,
the result of work done together by PEUGEOT and TOTAL
R&D. Specially formulated for the engines in PEUGEOT
vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces CO2
emissions and keeps your engine clean.
RECOMMENDS
Practical information
Fuel tank
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 53 litres.
Low fuel level Refuelling

When the low fuel level is reached in the
fuel tank, this warning lamp comes on on
the instrument panel, accompanied by
the display of a message and an audible
signal. When it first comes on there remains
approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank.
Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp
appears every time the ignition is switched on,
accompanied by the display of a message and
an audible signal. When driving, this message
and audible signal are repeated with increasing
A label affixed to the inside of the flap reminds To fill the tank in complete safety:
frequency as the fuel level drops towards "0".
you of the type of fuel to be used depending on F the engine must be switched off,
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out
your engine. F with the vehicle unlocked, press the rear
of fuel.
7
Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres, in part of the filler flap,
For more information on Running out of fuel
order to be registered by the fuel gauge. F turn the filler cap to the left,
(Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.
Opening the filler cap may create a noise a F remove the filler cap and hook it onto the
caused by an inrush of air. This vacuum is clip located on the inside of the filler flap,
entirely normal, resulting from the sealing of the F fill the tank, but do not continue after the
fuel system. 3rd cut-off of the pump; this could cause
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop&Start, malfunctions.
never refuel with the engine in
STOPmode; you must switch off the
ignition using the key, or the START/ When you have filled the tank:
STOP button if your vehicle has Keyless F put the filler cap back in place,
Entry and Starting. F turn it to the right,
F close the filler flap.
281
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)*

Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the
wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
Operation
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the

fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
It remains possible to use a fuel can to Travelling abroad
fill the tank.
into contact with the flap. The system remains As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
closed and prevents filling. be different in other countries, the
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type presence of the misfuel prevention
in direct contact with the flap of the
filler nozzle. device may make refuelling impossible.
misfuel prevention device and pour
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
slowly.
misfuel protection, so before travelling
abroad, we recommend that you check
with the PEUGEOT dealer network,
whether your vehicle is suitable for the
fuel pumps in the country in which you
intend to travel.
* Depending on the country of sale.
282
Fuel used for petrol Fuel used for Diesel

engines engines
The petrol engines are compatible with The Diesel engines are compatible with The use of B20 or B30 fuel
bio-fuels that conform to current and future biofuels that conform to current and future meeting standard EN16709
European standards and can be obtained from European standards and can be obtained from is possible in your Diesel
filling stations: filling stations: engine. However, this use,
even occasional, requires
- Petrol that meets the EN228 - Diesel fuel that meets
strict application of the special
standard, mixed with a bio- standard EN590 mixed with
servicing conditions referred to as
fuel meeting the EN15376 a biofuel that meets standard
"Arduous conditions".
standard. EN14214 (possibly containing
up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester), For more information, contact a PEUGEOT
- Diesel fuel that meets
standard EN16734 mixed with
The only petrol additives authorised for a biofuel that meets standard
7
use are those that meet the B715001 EN14214 (possibly containing The use of any other type of (bio)
standard. up to 10 % Fatty Acid Methyl fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure
Ester), or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly
prohibited (risk of damage to the engine
and fuel system).
- Paraffinic Diesel fuel that
meets standard EN15940
mixed with a biofuel that
meets standard EN14214
(possibly containing up to 7 %
The only Diesel additives authorised for
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
use are those that meet the B715000
standard.
283
Towing a trailer
Your vehicle is primarily designed for

Driving with a trailer places greater You must observe the maximum trailer
transporting people and luggage, but it may
demands on the towing vehicle and the weight, indicated on the registration
also be used for towing a trailer.
driver must take particular care. certificate or in the technical
For more information on Driving specification for your vehicle.
advice, particularly when towing, refer
We recommend the use of genuine to the corresponding section.
PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a For more information on Weights (and
qualified workshop. the towed loads which apply to your
If the towbar is not fitted by a vehicle) refer to the corresponding
PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be section.
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
284
Towbar with quickly detachable towball

Presentation
A. Locked position B. Unlocked position

The latch is positioned to the right. The latch is positioned to the left.
The trigger is facing toward the rear. The trigger is facing toward the front.
No tools are required to install or remove the
7
towball on this genuine towbar system.
1. Carrier.
2. Protective plug. Observe the legislation in force in the
3. Safety eye. country in which you are driving.
4. Trauiler wiring harness connection socket.
5. Detachable towball.
6. Locking / unlocking latch. For information on the trailer weights
7. Locking / unlocking trigger. for your vehicle, refer to the "Technical
8. Key-operated safety lock. data" section.
9. Safety lock protective cap. For driving safely when Towing a
10. Stowing bag. trailer, refer to the corresponding
section.
285
Maintenance
Correct operation is only possible if the towball
Before each use and its carrier are kept clean.
Check that the towball is correctly fitted, verifying the follow points: Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-
- the towball is correctly engaged (position A), pressure jet wash, the towball must be removed
- the safety lock is on and the key removed; the trigger can no longer be operated, and the protective plug fitted to the carrier.
- the towball must not be able to move in its carrier; test by shaking it with your hand.
If the towball is not locked, the trailer could separate - Risk of an accident!
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for any work on the towbar system.
During use
Never release the locking system with a trailer or load carrier on the towball.
Never exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle plus trailer - the Gross Train
Weight or GTW.
You must not exceed the maximum nose weight on the towbar: if exceeded, this could result
in detachment from the vehicle - Risk of an accident!
Check that the trailer lighting and signalling work correctly.
Before setting off, check the adjustment of the headlamp beam height.
For more information on Adjusting the headlamp beam height, refer to the corresponding
section.
Following use
When travelling without a trailer or load on a towbar-mounted carrier, the towball must be
removed and the protective plug inserted in the carrier. This measure applies particularly
where the towball might obscure visibility of the number plate or its lighting.
286
Fitting the towball
F Below the rear bumper, unclip and remove F On the towball, push the latch to the left
the protective plug from the carrier. and hold it in this position.
F At the same time press the trigger forward
to release the mechanism (position B).
F Ensure that the two pins are in contact with

the cut-outs in the carrier, that the trigger
has returned to rear and the latch to the
7
right to secure the mechanism (position A).
F Insert the key in the lock and turn it to the
right.
F Remove the key from the lock.
F Install and clip in place the protective cap
by rotating it to the left.
F Insert the end of the towball into the carrier,
pushing it in as far as it will go.
287
Removing the towball
F Attach the trailer to the towball. F Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from
F Attach the trailer safety cable to the eye the socket on the carrier.
provided on the towball carrier. F Detach the trailer safety cable from the eye
F Raise the protective cover on the socket on the carrier.
and connect the trailer wiring harness. F Detach the trailer from the towball.
F Unclip and remove the protective cap, by

turning it to the right.
F Insert the key in the lock and turn it to the
left.
F Remove the key from the lock.
288
F On the towball, push the latch to the left F Install the protective plug on the carrier,
and hold it in this position. located below the rear bumper.
F At the same time, push the trigger forward F Stow the towball in its bag.
to release the mechanism (position B).
F Press the trigger fully in and remove the

towball by pulling it toward you.
7
289
Load reduction mode Energy economy mode

System which manages the use of certain System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of
functions according to the level of charge charge in the battery.
remaining in the battery. After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics
When the vehicle is being driven, the load system,windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps,courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum
reduction function temporarily deactivates combined duration of about forty minutes.
certain functions, such as the air conditioning,
the heated rear screen... Switching to economy mode Exiting economy mode
The deactivated functions are reactivated A message appears in the instrument panel These functions are reactivated automatically
automatically as soon as conditions permit. screen indicating that the vehicle has switched next time the vehicle is driven.
to economy mode and the active functions are In order to restore the use of these functions
put on standby. immediately, start the engine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
If a telephone call is being made at this equipment for approximately five minutes,
time, it will be maintained for around - for more than ten minutes, to use the
10minutes with the Bluetooth hands- equipment for up to approximately
free system of your audio system. thirtyminutes.
Let the engine run for the duration specified to
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
engine in order to charge the battery.
A flat battery prevents the engine from

starting.
For more information on the 12 V
battery, refer to the corresponding
section.
290
Very cold climate screens*

Removable protective screens which prevent
Before fitting or removing a screen, It is recommended that the screens
the accumulation of snow at the radiator
ensure that the engine is off and the be fitted and removed by a PEUGEOT
cooling fan.
cooling fan has stopped. dealer or a qualified workshop.
Fitting Removing
The arrangement is of two symmetrical parts F Offer up the corresponding screen to the
which are placed either side of the radar lower grille in the bumper.
location in the front bumper. F First engage the two lower fixing lugs in the
bumper.
F Raise the screen until the three upper
fixing lugs engage in the bumper.
F Check that the screen is secure by
pressing around its edge.
Repeat these operations for the other screen.
7
F Insert a finger into the cut-out at the top of
the screen.
F Pull toward you to unclip the screen.
Repeat these operations for the other screen.
Do not forget to remove the very cold

climate screens:
- when the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 C,
- when towing,
- for running at speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h). * Depending on the country of sale.
291
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the Advice on installation

type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
F If you have to fit the chains during a
journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
on the side of the road.
Original Maximum F Apply the parking brake and position any
tyre size link size wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions
215/65 R17 9 mm
provided by the manufacturer.
225/55 R18 9 mm F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
205/55 R19 9 mm (50km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
235/50 R19 cannot be fitted with chains
chains are correctly tightened.
The snow chains must be fitted only
to the front wheels. They must never It is strongly recommended that before
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare you leave, you practise fitting the snow
wheels. For more information on snow chains, contact a chains on a level and dry surface.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads

that have been cleared of snow, to
avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and
the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted
Take account of the legislation in force with alloy wheels, check that no part of
in your country on the use of snow the chain or its fixings is in contact with
chains and the maximum running speed the wheel rim.
authorised.
292
Fitting roof bars

As a safety measure and to avoid Fitting directly to the roof Maximum load on the roof bars, evenly
damaging the roof, it is essential to use spread and with a load height not
the transverse bars approved for your exceeding 40 cm (except for bicycle
vehicle. carriers): 80 kg.
Observe the instructions on fitting and For more information, contact a
use contained in the guide supplied with PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
the roof bars. workshop.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars
and the vehicle's anchorage points.
Fitting on longitudinal For transporting objects which are
bars longer than the vehicle, refer to local
legislation.
Recommendations
You must attach the transverse bars only at - Distribute the load evenly, avoiding
7
the four anchorage points located at the edge overloading on one side.
of the roof. These points are hidden by the - Arrange the heaviest part of the load
vehicle's doors when closed. as close as possible to the roof.
The roof bar fixings include a stud which - Lash the load securely.
must be fitted to the aperture at each of the - Drive gently: the vehicle will be
anchorage points. more susceptible to the effects of
side winds and the stability of the
vehicle may be affected.
You must attach the transverse bars at the - On a long journey, check the
engraved markings on the longitudinal bars. security of the load at every stop.
- Remove the roof bars once they are
no longer needed.
293
Bonnet
Opening
Before doing anything under the When the engine is hot, handle the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start exterior safety catch and the stay with
system to avoid any risk of injury care (risk of burns), using the protected
resulting from an automatic change to area.
START mode. When the bonnet is open, take care not
to damage the safety catch.
Do not open the bonnet under very
windy conditions.
The cooling fan may start after

F Lift the safety catch and raise the bonnet. switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
be caught by the fan blades.
Because of the presence of electrical

equipment under the bonnet, it is
F Open the left hand front door. recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, ...) be limited.
F Pull the release lever, located at the bottom
of the door aperture, towards you.
Closing
F Take the stay out of its support slot.
The location of the interior bonnet F Clip the stay back into its housing.
release lever prevents opening of the F Unclip the stay from its housing and place F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
bonnet when the left hand front door it in the support slot to hold the bonnet of its travel.
is shut. open. F Pull on the bonnet to check that it has
latched correctly.
294
Petrol engines
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir.
2. Coolant header tank.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery / Fuses.
5. Remote earth point (-).
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.
295
Diesel engines
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir.
2. Coolant header tank.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery / Fuses.
5. Remote earth point (-).
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.
The Diesel fuel system operates under

very high pressure.
All work on the system must only be
carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
296
Checking levels
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Take care when working under the Checking using the dipstick
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine
may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and The location of the dipstick is shown in the If you find that the level is above the A mark or
the cooling fan could start at any time corresponding underbonnet layout view. below the B mark, do not start the engine.
(even with the ignition off). F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and - If the level is above the MAX mark (risk
remove it completely. of damage to the engine), contact a
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
non-fluffy cloth. - If the level is below the MIN mark, you
Engine oil level F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then must top-up the engine oil.
The check is carried out either when pull it out again to make the visual check:
the ignition is switched on using the the correct level is between the marks A
oil level indicator in the instrument and B.
panel for vehicles so equipped, or
using the dipstick.
7
Oil grade
To ensure that the reading is correct,
Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil,
your vehicle must be parked on a level
check that the oil is the correct grade for your
surface with the engine having been off
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
for more than 30 minutes. A = MAX recommendations.
It is normal to top-up the oil level between

two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT
recommends that you check the level, and top- B = MIN
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).
297
Brake fluid level

Topping-up the engine oil level Engine oil change The brake fluid level should be close
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check
The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
the brake pad wear.
corresponding underbonnet layout view. for details of the interval for this operation.
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
aperture. and emission control system, never use
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any additives in the engine oil. Changing the fluid
spills on engine components (risk of fire). Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
F Wait a few minutes before checking the for details of the interval for this operation.
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the Fluid specification
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
After topping-up the oil, the check when

switching on the ignition with the oil
level indicator in the instrument panel
is not valid during the 30 minutes after
topping-up.
298
Coolant level Screenwash fluid level
Check the coolant level regularly. When the engine is hot, the temperature of the Top up the level when necessary.
It is normal to top-up this fluid coolant is regulated by the fan.
between services. In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised,
The check and top-up must only be done with wait at least one hour after switching off the
the engine cold. engine before carrying out any work. Fluid specification
A low coolant level presents a risk of serious To avoid the risk of scalding in the event of For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing,
damage to your engine. an urgent need to top-up, with a cloth around this fluid must not be topped up or replaced
The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" the cap, unscrew it by two turns to allow the with plain water.
mark but should never exceed it. pressure to drop. When the pressure has In wintry conditions, it is recommended that you
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, dropped, remove the cap and top-up the level. use an ethyl alcohol or methanol based fluid.
it is essential to top-up. Once the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top-up the level.
Fluid specification
7
The cooling fan may start after The coolant must conform to the
switching off the engine: take care manufacturer's recommendations.
with articles and clothing that might
be caught by the fan blades.
299
Diesel fuel additive level Used products

(Diesel with particle filter)
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
The additive reservoir low level is fluids with the skin.
indicated by fixed illumination of this Most of these fluids are harmful to
warning lamp, accompanied by an health or indeed very corrosive.
audible signal and a message that
the particle filter additive level is too
low.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Topping-up Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or
The reservoir must be topped-up without delay a qualified workshop (France) or to an
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. authorised waste disposal site.
300
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the manufacturer's service schedule and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
12 V battery Air filter and passenger compartment filter Particle filter (Diesel)
The battery does not require any Refer to the manufacturer's The start of saturation of the particle
maintenance. service schedule for details of the filter is indicated by the temporary
However, check regularly that the replacement intervals for these illumination of this warning lamp accompanied
terminals are correctly tightened components. by a message in the multifunction screen.
(versions without quick release terminals) and Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
that the connections are clean. atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
For more information and the precautions to city driving), replace them twice as often if least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
take before starting work on the 12 V battery, necessary. goes off.
refer to the corresponding section. A clogged passenger compartment filter may If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a
have an adverse effect on the performance low additive level.
of the air conditioning system and generate For more information on Checking levels,
undesirable odours. refer to the corresponding section.
7
On a new vehicle, the first particle
Oil filter filter regeneration operations may be
Replace the oil filter each time the accompanied by a "burning" smell,
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are engine oil is changed. which is perfectly normal.
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of Refer to the manufacturer's Following prolonged operation of the
specific technology and specification. service schedule for details of vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
Its replacement should be carried the replacement interval for this you may, in exceptional circumstances,
out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a component. notice the emission of water vapour at
qualified workshop. the exhaust on acceleration. This does
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
or the environment.
301
Manual gearbox Brake pads Electric parking

The gearbox does not require any Brake wear depends on the style brake
maintenance (no oil change). of driving, particularly in the case This system does not require any
Refer to the manufacturer's service of vehicles used in town, over short routine servicing. However, in
schedule for the checking interval distances. It may be necessary to the event of a problem, have the
for this component. have the condition of the brakes checked, even system checked by a PEUGEOT
between vehicle services. dealer or a qualified workshop.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
For more information on the Electric parking
pads are worn.
brake, refer to the corresponding section.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any Brake disc wear

maintenance (no oil change). Only use products recommended by
Refer to the manufacturer's service PEUGEOT or products of equivalent
For information on checking brake quality and specification.
schedule for the checking interval disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT
for this component. In order to optimise the operation of
dealer or a qualified workshop. units as important as those in the
braking system, PEUGEOT selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
on the brake discs and pads: braking
efficiency may be reduced. Make light
brake applications to dry and defrost
the brakes.
302
AdBlue and SCR system

for BlueHDi Diesel engines
To assure respect for the environment and The AdBlue is held in a special tank with
Once the AdBlue tank is empty, a
conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions a capacity of about 17 litres: this provides
system required by regulations prevents
standard, without adversely affecting the a driving range of about 12 500 miles
starting of the engine.
performance or fuel consumption of Diesel (20000km). An alert is triggered automatically
If the SCR system is faulty, the level
engines, PEUGEOT has taken the decision to to warn you when the reserve level is
of emissions from your vehicle will no
equip its vehicles with an effective system that reached: you can then drive about 1 500 miles
longer meet the Euro 6 standard: your
associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) (2400km) before the tank is empty.
vehicle becomes polluting.
with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of
In the event of a confirmed fault
exhaust gases.
with the SCR system, you must go
to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
SCR system During each scheduled service of your vehicle workshop as soon as possible: after
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, a running distance of 650 miles
Using a fluid called AdBlue containing urea, a
the AdBlue tank is refilled in order to allow (1100 km), a system will be triggered
catalytic converter turns up to 85% of nitrogen
normal operation of the SCR system. automatically to prevent engine starting.
oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and water, which are
In either case, a range indicator gives
harmless to health and the environment.
7
you the distance you can travel before
the vehicle is immobilised.
If the estimated mileage of your vehicle

between two services is greater than
12500miles (20 000 km), it will be necessary
to top-up the AdBlue . Freezing of the AdBlue
AdBlue freezes at temperatures below
around -11C.
The SCR system includes a heater
for the AdBlue tank, allowing you
to continue driving in all weather
conditions.
303
Topping-up the AdBlue

Filling the AdBlue tank is an operation Precautions in use
included in every routine service on your
AdBlue is a urea-based solution. This liquid is Use only AdBlue fluid that meets the
vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
non-flammable, colourless and odourless (kept ISO22241 standard.
workshop.
in a cool area).
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it Never dilute AdBlue with water.
In the event of contact with the skin, wash
may be necessary to top-up the fluid between Never pour AdBlue into the Diesel fuel
the affected area with soap and water. In the
services, more particularly if an alert (warning tank.
event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate)
lamps and a message) signals the requirement.
the eyes with large amounts of water or with
You can go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes.
workshop.
If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get
If you envisage topping-up yourself, please
medical attention.
read the following warnings carefully.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (high ambient
temperature, for example), the risk of release of
ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale the
fluid. Ammonia vapour has an irritant effect on
mucous membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
The supply in a non-drip container or bottle
simplifies topping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre
(half a US gallon) bottles or 5 litre containers
from a PEUGEOTdealer or a qualified
Keep AdBlue out of the reach of workshop.
children, in its original container or
bottle.
Never transfer AdBlue to another Never top-up from an AdBlue
container: it would lose its purity. dispenser reserved for heavy goods
vehicles.
304
Recommendations on storage Procedure

AdBlue freezes at about -11C and Before topping-up, in wintry conditions, ensure
deteriorates above 25C. It is recommended that the temperature is above -11C. Otherwise
that bottles be stored in a cool area and the AdBlue may be frozen and so cannot be
protected from direct sunlight. poured into its tank.
Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept Park your vehicle in a warmer area for a
for at least a year. fewhours to allow the top-up to be carried out.
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it
has completely thawed out.
Never store bottles of AdBlue in your Park the vehicle

vehicle. F Before topping-up, ensure that the vehicle
is parked on a flat and level surface.
7
F Switch off the ignition to stop the engine
and remove the key from the switch.
Do not dispose of AdBlue bottles or or
containers in the household waste. F With Keyless Entry and Starting, press
Place them in a container provided for the"START/STOP" button to stop the
Open the filler
this purpose or take them to your dealer. engine. F With the vehicle unlocked, open the fuel
filler flap; the blue filler cap for the AdBlue
tank is located to the left of the black fuel
filler cap.
F Turn the blue cap a 6th of a turn anti-
clockwise.
F Remove the blue cap downwards.
305
F After emptying the bottle, wipe away any

Important: when topping-up after
spillage around the tank filler using a damp
running out of AdBlue, signalled
cloth.
by the message "Top-up AdBlue:
starting impossible", you must wait for
about 5 minutes before switching the
ignition on again, without opening the
driver's door, unlocking the vehicle,
If any fluid is spilt or splashed, wash introducing the remote control key
immediately with cold water or wipe with into the ignition switch, or placing
Top-up a damp cloth. the Keyless Entry and Starting
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue . After first If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off electronic key inside the vehicle.
checking the use-by date, read carefully using a sponge and hot water. Switch on the ignition, then wait for
the instructions on use on the label before 10seconds before starting the engine.
pouring the contents of the bottle into your
vehicle's AdBlue tank.
Refit the filler cap

F Refit the blue cap and turn it a 6th of a turn
clockwise, to its stop.
Important: if your vehicle's AdBlue F Close the filler flap.
tank is completely empty - which is
confirmed by the alert messages and
the impossibility of starting the engine-
you must add at least 4 litres and no
more than 10 litres.
306
Warning triangle
As a safety precaution, before leaving your vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your high visibility
vest.
Storage compartment Assembling the triangle Positioning the triangle
F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as

required by local legislation.
A compartment for stowing a warning triangle is For versions supplied with a triangle as original
provided in the tailgate interior trim. equipment:
F Open the tailgate. F remove the triangle from its case,
F Release the cover by turning the fixing a F unfold the legs,
8
quarter turn anti-clockwise. F open out the two sides of the triangle,
F clip together to complete the assembly.
For other versions, refer to the

instructions provided with the triangle.
307
Running out of fuel (Diesel)

On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel BlueHDi engines
system must be primed if you run out of fuel.
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of

Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
For more information on Misfuel
engine).
prevention (Diesel), refer to the
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
If the engine does not start first

time, don't keep trying, but start the
procedure again from the beginning.
308
Tool kit
This is a set of tools provided with the vehicle. Access to the tools
Its content depends on your vehicle's
equipment:
- temporary puncture repair kit,
- spare wheel.
The main tools are stowed in the boot under For versions with a temporary
the floor. puncture repair kit:
For access to them:
F unclip the two fixings to open its cover.
F open the boot,
F place the adjustable boot floor in the high
position,
F raise the floor past the two retractable
stops,
8
F lay the floor on these two stops to hold it
up.
309
All of these tools are specific to your The jack must only be used to change
vehicle and can vary according to a wheel with a damaged or punctured
equipment. tyre.
Do not use them for any other Do not use any jack other than the one
purposes. supplied with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original
jack, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop to obtain the correct
jack for it.
The jack meets European standards,
as defined in the Machinery
Directive2006/42/CE.
For versions with a spare wheel:
The jack does not require any
F unclip the carrier box by pulling it up, maintenance.
F unclip the two fixings to open its cover.
310
List of tools
1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle For versions with a temporary For versions with a spare wheel:
(depending on equipment). puncture repair kit:
2. Socket for the security bolts (located in the
5. Wheelbrace.
glove box) (depending on equipment).
4. Temporary puncture repair kit. For removing the wheel trim and removing
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
Includes a 12 V compressor and a the wheel bolts.
"security" bolts.
cartridge of sealant, to effect a temporary 6. Jack with integral handle.
3. Removable towing eye.
repair to a tyre and adjust the tyre For raising the vehicle.
8
pressure. 7. Wheel bolt cover remover (depending on
For more information on Towing the vehicle equipment).
and using the removable towing eye, refer to For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
the corresponding section. on alloy wheels.
For more information on the Temporary
puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding
section. For more information on the Spare wheel, refer
to the corresponding section.
311
Temporary puncture repair kit

Comprising a compressor and a sealant Composition of the kit
cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of
a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest
garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
The vehicle's electric system allows the 1. 12 V compressor, with integral pressure
The speed limit sticker must be secured
connection of the compressor for long gauge.
to the interior of the vehicle in the
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture 2. Sealant cartridge, with integral hose.
driver's field of vision, to remind you
repair. 3. Speed limit sticker.
that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
312
Repair procedure
F Switch off the ignition. F Turn the sealant cartridge and secure it in F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
F Secure the speed limit sticker inside the the cut-out provided on the compressor. repaired, and place it in a clean area.
vehicle. F Connect the hose from the sealant
cartridge to the valve of the tyre to be
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
repaired and tighten firmly.
compressor.
F Connect the pipe from the compressor to
the sealant cartridge.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies

which have penetrated into the tyre.
8
313
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the

pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
workshop for assistance.
Take care, the sealant product is

harmful if swallowed and causes
F Check that the compressor switch is at F Start the compressor by placing the switch
irritation to the eyes.
the"O" position. at the "I" position and leave it running until
Keep this product out of the reach of
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bar.
children.
the compressor. The sealant product is injected into the tyre
The use-by date is marked on the
F Connect the compressor's plug to the under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe
cartridge.
vehicle's 12 V socket. from the valve during this operation (risk of
After use, do not discard the
F Switch on the ignition. splashing and stains).
cartridge by the roadside, take it to a
PEUGEOTdealer or an authorised
waste disposal site.
Don't forget to obtain a new sealant
Only the 12 V sockets located at the front of the vehicle and in the boot can be used to cartridge, available from a PEUGEOT
power the compressor. dealer or a qualified workshop.
The 12 V socket located at the back of the centre console is not suitable for this purpose.
314
Checking / adjusting tyre pressures
F Place the switch in the "O" position. You can also use the compressor, without F Check that the compressor switch is at
F Remove the kit. injecting sealant, to check and if necessary the"O" position.
F Drive immediately for approximately adjust the tyre pressures F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under
three miles (five kilometres), at reduced the compressor.
speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and F Connect the compressor's plug to the
60km/h)), to plug the puncture. F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre place it in a clean area. F Switch on the ignition.
pressure using the kit. F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
8
compressor.
F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
firmly.
315
Should the pressure of one or more

tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to
reinitialise the under-inflation detection
system.
For more information on Under-
inflation detection, refer to the
F Start the compressor by placing the switch

at the "I" position and adjust the pressure
to the value shown on the vehicle's tyre
pressure label.
To deflate: press the black button on the
compressor pipe, at the valve connector. The tyre inflation pressures are given
F Once the correct pressure is reached, put on this label.
the switch to the "O" position.
F Remove the kit then stow it.
316
Spare wheel
Procedure for replacing a wheel with a punctured or damaged tyre by the spare wheel, using the
tools provided with the vehicle.
Access to the spare wheel
The spare wheel is installed in the boot under Removing the wheel
the floor.
F Slacken the central nut.
For access to the spare wheel, first refer to
F Remove the fixing parts (nut and bolt).
section on Access to the tools.
F Raise the spare wheel towards you from
the rear.
8
F Take the wheel out of the boot.
Depending on version, the spare wheel

is a standard size steel or alloy wheel.
For some countries of sale, it is the
"space saver" type.
317
Tyre under-inflation detection

The spare wheel is not fitted with a
sensor.
The punctured tyre must be repaired or
replaced by by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Putting the wheel back in place F Tighten fully until the central nut clicks, to
retain the wheel correctly.
F Put the wheel back in its housing.
F Return the tool box to the middle of the
F Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns.
wheel and clip it in place.
F Position the fixing parts (nut and bolt) in the
middle of the wheel.
318
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and non-slippery.
Apply the parking brake unless it has
been programmed to automatic mode,
switch off the ignition and engage first
gear* to lock the wheels.
Check that the braking warning lamps
in the instrument panel are on (not
flashing).
Wheel with wheel trim The occupants must get out of the
List of operations
When removing the wheel, first vehicle and wait where they are safe.
remove the wheel trim by pulling at the If necessary, place a chock under the
valve aperture using the wheelbrace. wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
When refitting the wheel, after be changed. F Remove the bolt cover from each of
tightening the wheel bolts, refit the Never go underneath a vehicle raised the bolts using the tool 7 (according to
wheel trim, starting by placing its using a jack; use an axle stand. equipment).
8
aperture in line with the valve and then F Fit the security socket 2 on the
pushing it into place all round its edge wheelbrace5 to slacken the security bolt.
with the palm of your hand. F Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
* mode P for an automatic gearbox.
319
F Place the foot of the jack 6 on the ground F Extend the jack 6 until its head comes into F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
and ensure that it is directly below the contact with the jacking point A or B used; place.
frontA or rear B jacking point provided on the contact area A or B on the vehicle must F Remove the wheel.
the underbody, whichever is closest to the be engaged with the central part of the
wheel to be changed. head of the jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may slip or drop -
Risk of injury!
Take care to position the jack only at one of the jacking points A or B under the vehicle,
ensuring that the head of the jack is centred under the contact area of the vehicle.
Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or the jack dropping - Risk of injury!
320
Fitting a wheel
Fitting a steel or "space-
saver" spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on fitting it is
normal to notice that the washers do
not come into contact with the steel or
"space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel
is secured by the conical contact of
each bolt.
List of operations
F Put the wheel in place on the hub.
F Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 5 fitted with the security
socket2.
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
8
wheelbrace 5 only.
F Lower the vehicle fully.
F Fold the jack 6 and detach it.
321
After changing a wheel

To store the punctured wheel in the
boot correctly, first remove the central
cover.
When using the "space-saver" type
spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph
(80km/h).
Have the tightening of the bolts and the
pressure of the spare wheel checked
workshop without delay.
F Tighten the security bolt using the F Tighten the other bolts using the Have the punctured wheel repaired and
wheelbrace 5 fitted with the security wheelbrace 5 only. replace it on the vehicle as soon as
socket2. F Refit the bolt covers to the bolts (according possible.
to equipment).
F Store the tools.
322
Changing a bulb
The headlamps have polycarbonate In some weather conditions (e.g. low Front lamps
lenses with a protective coating: temperature or humidity), the presence
F do not clean them using a dry of misting on the internal surface of the
or abrasive cloth, nor with a glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
detergent or solvent product, is normal; it disappears after the lamps
F use a sponge and soapy water or a have been on for a few minutes.
pH neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
so as not to damage their protective
coating and seals.
Model with "Full LED" headlamps
1. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(LEDs).
2. Main beam / dipped beam headlamps
Changing a bulb should only be done (LEDs).
after the headlamp has been switched 3. Direction indicators (LEDs).
off for several minutes (risk of serious 4. Foglamps (LEDs).
burns).
8
F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
It is imperative to use only anti- For the replacement of this type of lamp, go to
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
damaging the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
323
Model with halogen headlamps Daytime running lamps / sidelamps Changing direction indicator
1. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps bulbs
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp
(LEDs)*. and lighting guides, contact a PEUGEOT dealer (on models with halogen
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7). or a qualified workshop. headlamps)
3. Main beam headlamps (HB3). A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from
4. Direction indicators (PWY24W). Rapid flashing of the direction indicator
PEUGEOT dealers.
5. Foglamps (H11). warning lamp (right or left) indicates the
failure of a bulb on that side.
For bulbs with lugs (type H7...) take

care to observe their correct installation F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
so as to ensure the best lighting pull it out.
performance. F Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and
change it.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
* LEDs: light-emitting diodes.
324
Amber coloured bulbs, such as the Changing dipped beam headlamp Changing main beam headlamp
direction indicators, must be replaced bulbs bulbs
with bulbs of identical specifications (on models with halogen (on models with halogen
and colour. headlamps) headlamps)
F Remove the protective cover by pulling the F Remove the protective cover by pulling the
tab. tab.
F Pull the connector toward the rear to F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
8
When refitting, close the protective disconnect it. it out.
cover carefully to preserve the sealing F Pull the bulb toward the rear to extract it. F Pull the bulb out and change it.
of the headlamp. F Change the bulb. To reassemble, carry out these operations in
To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.
reverse order.
325
Changing foglamp bulbs F Disconnect the bulb holder connector.

(on models with halogen F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
headlamps) pull it out.
F Change the assembly.
F Introduce a flat screwdriver in the hole in
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
the finisher.
order.
F Pull and lever to unclip the front bumper
finisher.
F Using a Torx screwdriver, remove the two
module fixing screws. To replace this type of bulb, you can
F Remove the module from its housing. also contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
326
Changing direction indicator side Changing the side spotlamps

repeaters (LEDs) (LEDs)
For the replacement of this type of light- For the replacement of this type of light emitting
emitting diode lamp, contact a PEUGEOT diode lamp, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
dealer or a qualified workshop. qualified workshop.
327
Rear lamps
Direction indicators
(on the wings)
F Open the tailgate then unclip the access F From the outside, carefully remove the
cover on the side in question. lamp by pulling it to the rear, then up.
F Slacken the lamp fixing nut using a 10 mm F Disconnect the lamp connector.
box spanner or socket. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
F To avoid losing the nut if it drops into the it out using a standard pair of pliers.
wing trim, first place a cloth below it. F Pull the bulb out and replace it.
1. Brake lamps (LEDs). F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp
fixing nut. For reassembly, carry out these operations in
2. Sidelamps / daytime running lamps
(LEDs). F Disengage the retaining clip, while pushing reverse order.
3. Direction indicators (WY16W amber). the lamp out slightly.
4. Reversing lamps (W16W).
5. Foglamp (P21W).
LEDs: light-emitting diodes.
328
Reversing lamp Changing foglamp bulbs

(tailgate) These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear
F Open the tailgate, then introduce a flat bumper:
F From the outside, carefully remove the
screwdriver into the cut-out to unclip the F pass your hand under the bumper,
lamp by pulling it to the rear.
F turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and
access cover on the side in question. F Disconnect the lamp connector by pressing
F Slacken the lamp fixing nut using a 10 mm remove it,
on each side.
F turn the bulb a quarter turn, pull it out and
box spanner or socket. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
8
F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp fit a new bulb.
it out.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
fixing nut. F Pull the bulb out and replace it.
F Disengage the retaining clip, while pushing reverse order.
the lamp out slightly. For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverse order. Take care not to touch the silencer;
there is a risk of burns if changing a
bulb within a few minutes of switching
off the ignition.
329
Third brake lamp (light emitting Number plate lamps

diodes - LEDs) F Insert a thin screwdriver into the slot in the
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified lens.
workshop. F Push it outwards to unclip it.
F Remove the lens.
F Pull the bulb out and change it.
330
Changing a fuse
Changing a fuse
Before changing a fuse:
The fuse allocation tables and Installing electrical
F the cause of the failure must be identified
corresponding layout diagrams are accessories
and rectified,
available at the following website:
F all electrical consumers must be switched Your vehicle's electrical system is
off, designed to operate with standard or
You can also contact a PEUGEOT
F the vehicle must be immobilised with the optional equipment.
ignition off, Before installing other electrical
F identify the failed fuse using the allocation equipment or accessories on your
tables and layout diagrams available. vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
To change a fuse, you must: PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility

F use the special tweezer to extract the fuse for the cost incurred in repairing your
from its housing and check the condition of vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions
Good Failed
its filament. resulting from the installation of
F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse accessories not supplied and not
of the same rating (same colour); using a recommended by PEUGEOT and
different rating could cause faults (risk of
8
not installed in accordance with its
fire). instructions, in particular when the
If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, Tweezer
combined consumption of all of the
have the vehicle's electrical system checked by additional equipment connected
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The replacement of a fuse not shown
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
in the allocation tables may cause a
serious malfunction of your vehicle.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
331
12 V battery
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.
General points Access to the battery

Lead-acid starter batteries
Batteries contain harmful substances Protect your eyes and face before
such as sulphuric acid and lead. handling the battery.
They must be disposed of in All operations on the battery must be
accordance with regulations and must carried out in a well ventilated area and
not, in any circumstances, be discarded away from naked flames and sources
with household waste. of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
Take used remote control batteries and explosion or fire.
vehicle batteries to a special collection Wash your hands afterwards.
point.
The battery is located under the bonnet.

For access to the (+) terminal:
If your vehicle has an automatic
F release the bonnet using the interior lever,
gearbox, do not try to start the engine
then the exterior safety catch,
by pushing the vehicle.
F raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay.
(+) Positive terminal.

It has a quick-release clamp.
(-) Negative terminal.

As the battery negative terminal is not
accessible, a remote earth point is located
close to the battery.
332
Starting using another battery

When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the F Start the engine of the vehicle with the
engine can be started using a slave battery good battery and leave it running for a
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead fewminutes.
cables or a battery booster. F Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run.
If the engine does not start straight away,
Never try to start the engine by switch off the ignition and wait a few
connecting a battery charger. moments before trying again.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery
booster. F Wait until the engine returns to idle then
First check that the slave battery has a disconnect the jump lead cables in the
nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity reverse order.
F Raise the plastic cover on the (+) terminal,
at least equal to that of the discharged F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal,
if your vehicle has one.
battery. ifyour vehicle has one.
F Connect the red cable to the positive
The two vehicles must not be in contact F Allow the engine to run for at least
terminal (+) of the flat battery A (atthe
with each other. 30minutes, by driving or with the vehicle
metal elbow) then to the positive
Switch off the electrical consumers on stationary, so that the battery reaches an
terminal(+) of the slave battery B or the
both vehicles (audio system, wipers, adequate state of charge.
booster.
lighting, ...).
F Connect one end of the green or black
8
Ensure that the jump lead cables do
cable to the negative terminal (-) of the Some functions, including Stop & Start,
not pass close to moving parts of the
slave battery B or the booster (or earth are not available if the battery is not
engine (cooling fan, belts, ...).
point on the other vehicle). sufficiently charged.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
F Connect the other end of the green or black
the engine is running.
cable to the earth point C on the broken
down vehicle.
333
Charging the battery using a battery charger

For optimum service life of the battery, it is Follow the instructions for use provided
essential to maintain an adequate state of by the manufacturer of the charger.
charge. Never reverse polarities.
In some circumstances it may be necessary to
charge the battery:
- if you use your vehicle essentially for short It is not necessary to disconnect the
journeys, battery.
- if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks. F Switch off the ignition.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
workshop. system, lighting, wipers, ...).
F Switch off the charger B before connecting
If you envisage charging your vehicle's the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
battery yourself, use only a charger dangerous sparks.
compatible with lead-acid batteries of a F Ensure that the charger cables are in good
nominal voltage of 12 V. condition.
F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has
one, on the (+) terminal.
F Connect the charger B cables as follows: Never try to charge a frozen battery.
- the positive (+) red cable to the (+) If the battery has been frozen, have it
terminal of the battery A, checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
- the negative (-) black cable to the earth qualified workshop, who will check that
point C on the vehicle. the internal components have not been
If this label is present, it is essential
F At the end of the charging operation, switch damaged and the casing is not cracked,
to use only a 12 V charger, to avoid
off the charger B before disconnecting the which could cause a leak of toxic and
causing irreversible damage to the
cables from the battery A. corrosive acid.
electrical components related to the
Stop & Start system.
334
Disconnecting the battery

In order to maintain an adequate state of charge Following reconnection of the
for starting the engine, it is recommended that battery
the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is
After reconnecting the battery, switch on the
taken out of service for a long period.
ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to
Before disconnecting the battery:
allow initialisation of the electronic systems.
F close all openings (doors, tailgate, windows,
However, if minor problems persist following
sunroof),
this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
qualified workshop.
system, wipers, lighting, ...),
Referring to the corresponding section, you
F switch off the ignition and wait for
must yourself initialise or reset certain systems,
fourminutes.
such as:
At the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect
Reconnecting the (+) terminal - the remote control or electronic key
the (+) terminal.
F Raise the lever A fully. (depending on version),
F Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal. - the sunroof and its electric blind,
F Push the clamp B fully down. - the electric windows,
Quick-release terminal clamp
F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B. - the date and time,
- the radio preset stations.
The Stop & Start system may not be
8
Do not force the lever as locking will
operational during the trip following the
not be possible if the clamp is not
first engine start.
positioned correctly; start the procedure
In this case, the system will only be
again.
available again after a continuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle,
a period which depends on the ambient
Disconnecting the (+) terminal temperature and the state of charge of
F Raise the lever A fully to release the the battery (up to about 8 hours).
clampB.
F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off.
335
Towing the vehicle

Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
Access to the tools General recommendations

Observe the legislation in force in your In the following cases, you must always call
country. on a professional recovery service:
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle - vehicle broken down on a motorway or
is higher than that of the towed vehicle. fast road,
The driver must remain at the wheel of the - four-wheel drive vehicle,
towed vehicle and must have a valid driving - when it is not possible to put the
licence. gearbox into neutral, unlock the
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels steering, or release the parking brake,
on the ground, always use an approved - towing with only two wheels on the
towing arm; rope and straps are prohibited. ground,
The towing vehicle must move off gently. - where there is no approved towing arm
The towing eye is stowed in a tool box, under When towing a vehicle with the engine off, available...
the boot floor. there is no longer any power assistance for
For more information on access to the Tool kit, braking or steering.
336
Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle
F Place the gear lever in neutral

(position N on an automatic
gearbox).
Failure to observe this instruction
could result in damage to
certain components (braking,
transmission...) and the absence
of braking assistance the next time
the engine is started.
F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by F Unlock the steering and release the parking F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at the top. brake. pressing at the left.
F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towing arm. both vehicles. F Install the towing arm.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
distance. both vehicles.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
8
distance.
337
Technical data
Petrol engines and gearboxes

1.6 litre THP 165
Petrol engine 1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S 1.6 litre THP 150 1.6 litre THP 160
S&S
EAT6 EAT6 EAT6 EAT6
Manual
Gearbox automatic automatic automatic automatic
(6-speed)
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
Model code: HNYH/S HNYW/S
5FEA 5FMA 5GZW/S
MR... M4... HNYH/1S HNYW/1S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 199 1 598 1 598 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 90.5 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8
Max power*: EU standard (kW) 96 110 120 121
Max power speed (rpm) 5 500 6 050 6 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 230 240 240 240
Max torque speed (rpm) 1 750 1 400 1 400 1 400
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres) (with filter

3.5 4.25 4.25 4.25
replacement)
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
.../S: model fitted with Stop & Start.

.../1: model fitted with low rolling resistance tyres.
338
Technical data
Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg)

1.6 litre THP 165
Petrol engine 1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S 1.6 litre THP 150 1.6 litre THP 160
S&S
EAT6 EAT6 EAT6 EAT6
Manual
Gearbox automatic automatic automatic automatic
(6-speed)
Model code: HNYH/S - HNYW/S -
5FEA 5FMA 5GZW/S
MR... M4... HNYH/1S HNYW/1S
Unladen weight 1 250 - 1 254 - - - 1 300
Kerb weight* 1 325 - 1 329 - - - 1 375
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 910 - - - 1 950
Gross train weight (GTW)

3 310 - 3 210 - - - 3 500
on a 12% gradient
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
1 400 - 1 300 - - - 1 550
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer 660 - - - 685
Recommended nose weight 70 - - - 70
9
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
When towing the maximum authorised speed is reduced (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 C,
limit the towed load.
339
Technical data
Diesel engines and gearboxes

1.6 litre BlueHDi
Diesel engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 115 S&S 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 S&S
100 S&S
EAT6 EAT6
Manual Manual Manual
Gearbox automatic automatic
(5-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
(6-speed) (6-speed)
Model code: BHXH/S BHXW/S BHZH/S BHZW/S
BHY6/S
MC... BHXH/1S BHXW/1S BHZH/1S BHZW/1S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560 1 560
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 75 x 88,3
Max power*: EU standard (kW) 73 85 88
Max power speed (rpm) 3 750 3 750 3 750
Max torque: UE standard (Nm) 254 300 300
Max torque speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes
Particle filter Yes Yes Yes
3.75 3.75 3.75
replacement)

340
Technical data
Diesel engines and gearboxes

2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 2.0 litre BlueHDi 180
Diesel engine 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150
S&S S&S
EAT6 EAT6
Manual Manual
(6-speed) (6-speed)
(6-speed) (6-speed)
AHRH/S
Model code:
- - AHSH/S AHWW/S
MJ...
AHXH/S
Cubic capacity (cc) - - 1 997 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) - - 85 x 88 85 x 88
Max power*: EU standard (kW) - - 110 132
Max power speed (rpm) - - 4 000 3 750
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) - - 370 400
Max torque speed (rpm) - - 2 000 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes
Particle filter Yes Yes Yes Yes
- - 6.1 5.1
replacement)

9
341
Technical data
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)

1.6 litre BlueHDi
Diesel engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 115 S&S 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 S&S
100 S&S
EAT6 EAT6
Manual Manual Manual
(5-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
(6-speed) (6-speed)
Model code: BHXH/S - BHZH/S -
BHY6/S BHXW/S BHZW/S
MC... BHXH/1S BHZH/1S
Unladen weight - 1 300 - 1 304 1 315 1 300 - 1 304 1 315
Kerb weight* - 1 375 - 1 379 1 390 1 375 - 1 379 1 390
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) - 1 970 - 1 980 1 990 1 970 - 1 980 1 990

- 3 470 - 3 380 3 290 3 470 - 3 380 3 290
on a 12% gradient
- 1 500 - 1 400 1 300 1 500 - 1 400 1 300
Unbraked trailer - 685 695 685 695
Recommended nose weight - 70 70 70 70
When towing, the maximum authorised speed is reduced (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
342
Technical data
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)

Diesel engine 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 S&S 2.0 litre BlueHDi 180 S&S
Manual EAT6 automatic Manual EAT6 automatic

Gearbox
AHRH/S
Model code:
- - AHSH/S AHWW/S
MJ...
AHXH/S
Unladen weight - - 1 425 1 465
Kerb weight* - - 1 500 1 540
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) - - 2 050 2 090

- - 3 700 3 730
on a 12% gradient
- - 1 650 1 640
Unbraked trailer - - 745 750
Recommended nose weight - - 70 70
9
When towing, the maximum authorised speed is reduced (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
343
Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.
344
Technical data
Identification markings
Different visible markings for the identification of your vehicle. D. Tyres / paint code label.
This label is affixed to the driver's door
aperture.
It bears the following information on the tyres:
- the tyre pressures, unladen and laden,
- the reference, size, type, load index and
speed rating,
- the spare tyre pressure.
It also indicates the paint colour code.
Checking tyre pressures

A. Vehicle identification number (VIN), C. Manufacturer's label.
The tyre pressures should be checked when
under the bonnet. This self-destructing label is affixed to the right-
cold at least monthly.
The number is engraved on the body structure. hand door aperture.
The pressures given on the label are valid for
It bears the following information:
cold tyres. If you have driven for more than
- the name of the manufacturer,
10minutes or more than 6 miles (10 kilometres)
B. V
ehicle identification number (VIN), - the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval
at more than 30 mph (50 km/h), the tyres will be
on the dashboard. number,
warm; in this case 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be
The number is on a label, visible through the - the vehicle identification number (VIN),
added to the pressures given on the label.
windscreen. - the maximum authorised vehicle weight
(the Gross Vehicle Weight or GVW),
9
- the maximum authorised vehicle + trailer Never reduce the pressure of a warm
weight (the Gross Train Weight or GTW), tyre.
- the maximum weight on the front axle,
- the maximum weight on the rear axle. Low tyre pressures increase fuel
consumption.
345
Alphabetical index
180 rear vision..............................................267 Air intake........................................................ 111 Brakes......................................................26, 302

Air vents.........................................................104 Braking assistance
Alarm................................................................70 system..........................................................160
Amplifier, audio..............................................122 Braking, automatic
Anti-lock braking emergency............................... 21, 26, 247, 250
system (ABS).......................................160, 161 Braking, dynamic
Anti-theft........................................................197 emergency.......................................... 203, 208
A Armrest, front.................................................124
Armrest, rear..................................................134
Bulbs (changing)........................... 323, 328, 330
Accessories...........................................156, 201 Assistance call...............................................158

Active Safety Brake................... 21, 26, 247, 250 Assistance, emergency
AdBlue ......................................30, 37, 303, 304 braking.................................................160, 249
Additive, Diesel..............................................301 Audio system
(radio).............................................................45
C
Adjusting headlamps.....................................145
Adjusting head restraints.................................93
Adjusting seat......................................90, 91, 94
Adjusting the air distribution.......................... 111 Capacity, fuel tank.........................................281
Adjusting the air flow...................................... 111 Cartridge, fragrance..............................125, 126
Adjusting the date............................................45 Central locking...........................................60, 68
B
Adjusting the height and reach Changing a bulb............................ 323, 328, 330
of the steering wheel.....................................99 Changing a fuse.............................................331
Adjusting the lumbar support...............90, 91, 94 Changing a wheel..........................................309
Adjusting the seat belt height........................168 Backrest, folding..............................................92 Changing a wiper blade.................................154
Adjusting the temperature............................. 111 Battery.................................... 290, 301, 332-335 Changing the remote control
Adjusting the time............................................45 Battery, charging............................................334 battery............................................................66
Advanced Grip Control..................................164 Battery, remote control..............................63, 66 Charger, induction..........................................122
Advice on driving...................................195, 196 Blanking screen Charger, wireless...........................................122
Airbags.....................................................28, 172 (snow shield)................................................291 CHECK.............................................................40
Airbags, curtain...................................... 175, 176 Blind.................................................................84 Checking the engine
Airbags, front......................................... 173, 176 Blind spot monitoring system.......... 20, 260, 262 oil level...........................................................36
Airbags, lateral....................................... 175, 176 Blind spot monitoring system, Checking the levels................................ 297-300
Air conditioning.................................10, 107, 110 active.....................................................20, 262 Checking tyre pressures
Air conditioning, automatic............................105 Blind spot sensors...................................20, 260 (using the kit)............................................... 312
Air conditioning, digital...........................111, 116 BlueHDi......................................37, 40, 303, 308 Checks.................................. 295, 296, 301, 302
Air conditioning, dual-zone Bonnet............................................................294 Checks, routine......................................301, 302
automatic..............................................111, 116 Boot......................................................75, 76, 79 Child lock................................................193, 194
Air conditioning, manual................105, 106, 116 Brake discs.....................................................302 Children.................................. 184, 186-188, 190
Air conditioning, mono-zone.................. 108, 116 Brake lamps...................................................328 Children (safety).....................................193, 194
346
Alphabetical index
Child seats ..............171, 177, 178, 182-184, 192 Demisting....................................................... 116 Emergency switching off................................202
Child seats, conventional.......................183, 184 Demisting, front.............................................. 116 Emergency warning lamps.................... 157, 307
Child seats, i-Size..........................................190 Demisting, rear............................................... 118 Emissions control system,
Child seats, ISOFIX....................... 186-188, 190 Demisting, rear screen.................................. 118 SCR...............................................................31
Cigarette lighter.............................................120 Dials and gauges.............................................12 Energy economy mode..................................290
Closing the boot.............................56, 61, 62, 75 Dimensions....................................................344 Engine compartment............................ 295, 296
Closing the doors........................... 56, 60-62, 74 Dipstick.....................................................36, 297 Engine, Diesel.......................283, 296, 308, 340
Configuration, vehicle......................... 45, 48, 50 Direction indicators............... 144, 323, 324, 328 Engine, petrol................................ 283, 295, 338
Control, emergency Display screen, Engines................................................. 338, 340
boot release...................................................81 instrument panel.......................................... 218 Environment...............................................10, 63
Control, emergency door.................................64 Distance alert............................. 21, 26, 247, 248
Control, heated seats.......................................97 Door pockets.................................................. 119
Controls, steering mounted........................... 211 Doors................................................................ 74
Control stalk, lighting........................17, 141, 144 Doors, rear.....................................................194
Control stalk, wipers......................152, 153, 155 Drivers attention
Courtesy lamps..............................................128 warning........................................................253
Cover, load space..........................................136
Cruise control........................ 226, 229, 234, 238
Driving..............................................................88
Driving abroad...............................................143 F
Cruise control by speed Driving economically.......................................10 Fatigue detection...................................252, 253
limit recognition...........................................229 Driving positions (storing)................................96 Filling the fuel tank..................................281-283
Cruise control, dynamic Driving time warning......................................252 Filter, air.........................................................301
with Stop function............................... 229, 238 Dynamic pack................................................ 217 Filter, Diesel fuel............................................296
Cup holder...................................................... 119 Dynamic stability control Filter, oil..........................................................301
(DSC).................................... 26, 160, 162, 164 Filter, particle........................................ 300, 301
Filter, passenger
compartment...............................................301
Fitting a wheel................................................ 319
Fitting roof bars..............................................293
D
Fittings, boot..................................................135
E
Fittings, interior...................................... 119, 120
Fittings, rear...................................................133
Date (setting)....................................................45 Flap, fuel filler.........................................281, 282
Daytime running lamps..................143, 323, 324 Eco-driving (advice).........................................10 Flashing indicators.................................144, 324
Deactivating the passenger Economy mode..............................................290 Floor, boot, adjustable...................................138
.
airbag...........................................................173 Electronic brake force distribution Foglamps....................................................... 142
Deadlocking...............................................56, 62 (EBFD).................................................160, 161 Foglamps, front.............. 142, 151, 323, 324, 326
Defrosting............................................... 116, 118 Emergency braking assistance (EBA)...........160 Foglamps, rear.......................................142, 329
Defrosting, front............................................. 116 Emergency call..............................................158 Folding the rear seats....................................130
347
Alphabetical index
Fuel..........................................................10, 283 Headlamps, automatic dipping................ 17, 149 Inflating tyres...........................................10, 345
Fuel consumption.............................................10 Headlamps, automatic Inflating tyres and
Fuel tank................................................281, 282 illumination................................... 141, 146, 147 accessories (using the kit)........................... 312
Fuses..............................................................331 Headlamps, dipped beam.................17, 323-325 Instrument panel......................12, 13, 40, 42, 43
Headlamps, halogen......................................324 Intelligent Traction
Headlamps, main beam....................17, 323-325 Control.........................................................161
Head restraints, front.......................................93 ISOFIX...........................................................187
Head restraints, rear......................................130 Isofix mountings.............................................186
Heating.....................................10, 104, 106, 108
Hi-Fi system...................................................122
G
Hill Assist Descent
Control...................................................20, 166
Hill start assist................................................216
Gauge, fuel....................................................281 Horn...............................................................157
J
Gearbox,
automatic........10, 211, 216, 217, 219, 302, 332
Gearbox, manual..... 10, 210, 216, 217, 219, 302
Gear lever........................................................10 Jack................................................................ 310
Gear lever, automatic Jump starting.................................................333
gearbox........................................................ 211
I
Gear lever, manual
gearbox........................................................210
Gear shift indicator........................................218
Glove box.......................................................120 i-Cockpit amplify
Grab handles................................................. 119 function..................................98, 102, 125, 217
Ignition....................................................199, 201
K
Immobiliser, electronic.............................63, 197
Indicator, AdBlue
range........................................................30, 37
Indicator, coolant Key...................................................... 54, 63, 64
temperature...................................................32 Key, electronic......................................58, 60-62
H
Indicator, engine Keyless Entry
oil level.....................................................36, 40 and Starting....................... 58, 61-63, 197, 200
Indicator lamps, Key not recognised........................................202
Hands-free access...........................................78 operation............................................ 17, 19, 21 Key with remote
Hands-free tailgate..............................76, 78, 79 Indicator lamps, control..........................................................197
Hazard warning lamps........................... 157, 307 status.............................................................19 Kit, temporary puncture
Headlamp adjustment....................................145 Indicators, direction...............................144, 324 repair....................................................309, 312
348
Alphabetical index
L M
Labels, identification......................................345 Maintenance, routine.......................................10 Opening the boot.......................................58, 75
Lamp, boot.....................................................140 Map reading lamps........................................128 Opening the doors.....................................58, 74
Lamps, parking..............................................144 Markings, identification..................................345 Opening the fuel filler flap..............................281
Lamps, rear....................................................328 Massage function ............................................98 Opening the windows......................................55
Lamps with "Full LED" Massage, multi-point.......................................98
technology........................................... 151, 323 Mat.................................................................127
Lane departure warning Memorising a speed......................................226
active....................................... 21, 27, 255, 262 Mirror, rear view.............................................101
Lane Departure Warning Mirrors, door............................99, 100, 118, 260
System (LDWS)..................................... 27, 254 Mirror, vanity..................................................120
P
LEDs - Light-emitting Misfuel prevention..........................................282
diodes................................. 143, 323, 324, 328 Motorised tailgate................................ 76, 77, 79
Level, brake fluid............................................298 Mountings, Isofix............................................186
Level, Diesel additive............................ 300, 301 Pads, brake....................................................302
Level, engine coolant...............................32, 299 Paint...............................................................345
Level, engine oil.......................................36, 297 Paint colour code...........................................345
Levels and checks.................................295-300 Parcel shelf, rear............................................136
Level, screenwash Park Assist.............................................272, 274
fluid......................................................154, 299 Parking brake.................................................302
N
Light-emitting Parking brake, electric.................... 25, 203, 208
diodes - LEDs..................... 143, 323, 324, 328 Parking sensors, front....................................264
Lighting............................................................. 17 Parking sensors, rear....................................263
Lighting, cornering......................................... 151 Net, high load retaining.................................. 137 Personalisation................................................ 13
Lighting dimmer...............................................42 Number plate lamps.......................................330 Peugeot Connect
Lighting, exterior............................................ 141 Assistance...................................................158
Lighting, guide-me Peugeot Connect Packs............................158
home...............................................57, 146-148 Peugeot Connect SOS..............................158
Lighting, interior.....................................128, 129 Plates, identification......................................345
Lighting, mood.........................................42, 129 Player, USB.................................................... 121
Lighting, welcome.......................................... 147 Port, USB....................................................... 121
O
Loading............................................ 10, 137, 293 Pre-heater, Diesel............................................18
Load reduction mode.....................................290 Pressures, tyres.....................................316, 345
Locating your vehicle.......................................56 Pre-tensioning seat
Locking.................................................55, 61, 63 Oil change......................................................297 belts............................................................. 171
.
Locking from Oil consumption.............................................297 Priming the fuel system.................................308
the inside.......................................................68 OIl, engine......................................................297 Protecting children.........................173, 177, 178,
Long objects, transporting.............................134 On-board tools.......................................139, 309 182, 184, 186-188, 190
Low fuel level.................................................281 Opening the bonnet.......................................294 Puncture......................................................... 312
349
Alphabetical index
R
Range, AdBlue.....................................30, 37, 38 Saturation of the particle Starting using another
Rear screen, demisting.................................. 118 filter (Diesel)................................................301 battery................................................. 202, 333
Recharging the battery..................................334 Scented air freshener............................125, 126 Stay, bonnet...................................................294
Reduction of electrical load...........................290 Screen, monochrome......................................45 Steering wheel,
Regeneration of Screens, very cold adjustment.....................................................99
the particle filter...........................................301 conditions ...................................................291 Stopping the vehicle...................... 197, 200, 211
Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Screenwash, front..........................................153 Stop & Start......................... 18, 21, 44, 105, 116,
detection system..................................224, 225 Screenwash, rear...........................................153 219, 281, 294, 301, 335
Reinitialising the remote SCR (Selective Catalytic Storage........................... 119, 120, 124, 134, 135
control............................................................67 Reduction).............................................31, 303 Storage box....................................................139
Reminder, key in ignition................................199 SCR system.............................................31, 303 Storage compartments.................................. 119
Remote control.........................54-56, 60, 62, 63 Seat belts........................................168-171, 183 Storage wells.........................................135, 139
Removing a wheel......................................... 319 Seat belts, rear....................................... 169, 170 Storing driving positions..................................96
Removing the mat..........................................127 Seats, electric..................................................96 Stowing rings.................................................135
Replacing bulbs............................ 323, 328, 330 Seats, front.................................................90, 96 Sunroof, panoramic.........................................84
Replacing fuses.............................................331 Seats, heated...................................................97 Sun visor........................................................120
Replacing the air filter....................................301 Seats, rear......................................................130 Switching off the engine................................197
Replacing the oil filter....................................301 Selector, gear................................................. 211 Synchronising the remote
Replacing the passenger Serial number, vehicle...................................345 control............................................................67
compartment filter.......................................301 Service indicator........................................33, 40
Reservoir, screenwash..................................299 Servicing....................................................10, 33
Resetting the service indicator........................35 Settings, equipment............................ 45, 48, 50
Resetting the trip recorder............................... 41 Sidelamps..................... 143, 144, 323, 324, 328
Reset trip..........................................................43 Side repeater.................................................327
T
Rev counter......................................................12 Ski flap...........................................................134
Reversing lamps............................................328 Snow chains.......................................... 223, 292
Roof bars........................................................293 Snow screen..................................................291
Running out of fuel (Diesel)...........................308 Socket, 12V.................................................... 314 Table of weights.....................................339, 342
Socket, 12 V accessory......... 120, 133, 136, 314 Table position...................................................92
Socket, 230 V.................................................133 Tables of engines.................................. 338, 340
Speakers........................................................122 Tailgate.............................................................75
Speed limiter................................. 226, 229, 231 Tank, fuel................................................281, 282
Speed limit recognition..................................227 Technical data................................338-340, 342
S
Speedometer...................................................12 Telephone......................................................122
Spotlamps, side.....................................148, 327 Temperature, coolant.......................................32
Stability control (ESC)...................160, 163, 164 Third brake lamp............................................330
Safety, children......................173, 177, 178, 182, Starting the vehicle........................ 197, 200, 211 Three flashes
184, 186-188, 190 (direction indicators)....................................144
350
Alphabetical index
V
Ticket holder.................................................. 119 Ventilation................................ 10, 104-106, 108
Time (setting)...................................................45 Visibility.......................................................... 116
Tool box..........................................................139 Vision, 180 forward......................................269
Tools...............................................................309 Vision, panoramic..........................................265
Total distance recorder.................................... 41 Visio Park.......................................265, 267, 269
Touch screen.......................42, 48, 50, 102, 121
Towball, quickly
detachable...................................................285
Towbar........................................... 163, 196, 284
Towbar with quickly
detachable towball.......................................285
Towed loads...........................................339, 342
Towing another vehicle..................................336
Traction control (ASR)............ 26, 160, 162, 164
Trailer............................................ 163, 196, 284
W
Trailer stability assist (TSA)...................160, 163 Warning and indicator
Trajectory control systems.............................160 lamps.................................................16, 21, 22
Triangle, warning...........................................307 Warning lamp, braking
Trip computer.............................................43, 44 system............................................................26
Trip distance recorder...................................... 41 Warning lamp, Diesel
Tyres.........................................................10, 345 engine pre-heater..........................................18
Tyre under-inflation Warning lamps...............................19, 22, 25, 40
detection..............................................223, 316 Warning lamp, Service....................................23
Weights..................................................339, 342
Welcome lighting..................................... 57, 148
Wheel, spare..................................309, 317, 345
Window controls..............................................82
Windscreen, heated....................................... 117
Wiper blades (changing)................................154
Wiper, rear.....................................................153
U Wipers..............................................20, 152, 155

Wipers, automatic
rain sensitive........................................152, 155
Under-inflation
(detection)....................................................223
.
Unlocking...................................................55, 58
Unlocking from the inside................................68
Unlocking the boot..................................... 57, 59
Unlocking the tailgate................................ 57, 59
351
Automobiles PEUGEOTdeclares, by Reproduction or translation of all or part of
application of the provisions of the European this document is prohibited without written
legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives
set by this legislation and that recycled
materials are used in the manufacture of the
products that it sells.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
04-16
Anglais
www.peugeot.com *16P84.0040* 16P84.0040
Audio and Telematics
PEUGEOT Connect Nav

GPS satellite navigation - Applications - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth telephone
Contents
First steps 2
Steering mounted controls 5
Menus 6
Voice commands 8
Navigation 14
Connected navigation 30
Applications 40
Radio Media 56
Telephone 68
Settings 80
Frequently asked questions 90
The different functions and settings

described vary according to the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
As a safety measure and because it

requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands- The system is protected in such a way The link below gives access to OSS
free system of your audio system must that it will only operate in your vehicle. (Open Source Software) codes for the
be done with the vehicle stationary Displaying of the Energy Economy system.
.
and the ignition on. Mode message signals that a change http://www.psa-peugeot-citroen.com/oss
to standby is imminent.
1
First steps
With the engine running, a press Use the buttons either side of or below the
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
mutes the sound. touch screen for access to the menus, then
type.
With the ignition off, a press turns the press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
system on. All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) with
Press the cross to go back a level.
no additional product.
Volume. Press "OK" to confirm.
Do not use sharp objects on the
screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet
hands.
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
2
Certain information is displayed permanently in Select the audio source (depending on

In the "Settings" menu you can create
the upper band of the touch screen: version):
a profile for just one person or a group
- Reminder of the air conditioning - FM / DAB* / AM* radio stations.
of people with common points, with
information and direct access to the - USB memory stick.
the possibility of entering a multitude
corresponding menu. - CD player.
of settings (radio presets, audio
- Go directly to the selection of the audio - Media player connected via the auxiliary
settings, navigation history, contact
source, to the list of radio stations (or list of socket (Jack, cable not supplied).
favourites, ...); these settings are taken
titles depending on the source). - Telephone connected by Bluetooth* using
into account automatically.
- Go to the message notifications, emails, Bluetooth* audio streaming.
map updates and, depending on the
services, the navigation notifications.
- Go to the settings for the touch screen and
the digital instrument panel.
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13 In very hot conditions, the volume may

be limited to protect the system. It may
go into standby (screen and sound off)
for at least 5 minutes.
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped.
* Depending on equipment.
.
3
Steering mounted controls

Voice commands: Increase volume. Radio (rotate): automatic search for
Short press, system voice the previous / next station.
commands. Media (rotate): previous / next track,
Long press, smartphone voice move in a list.
commands via the system. Mute / Restore the sound. Short press: confirm a selection;
Or other than selection, access to
Mute by pressing the volume presets.
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
Restore the sound by pressing one of
the two volume buttons.
Decrease volume. Radio: display the list of stations.

Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
Media (short press): change the
multimedia source.
Telephone (short press): call.
Call in progress (short press):
access to telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
incoming call, end call, access to
telephone menu.
.
5
Menus
According to version
Air conditioning Connected navigation Applications
23 C 12:13 23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13 23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
18,5 21,5
Manage the various temperature and air flow Enter navigation settings and choose a Operate certain applications on a smartphone
settings. destination. connected via CarPlay or MirrorLinkTM.
Use services available in real time, depending Check the state of the Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
on equipment. connections.
Driving
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
Activate, deactivate and configure certain

vehicle functions.
6
Radio Media Telephone Settings
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13 23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13 23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
Select an audio source, a radio station, display Connect a telephone by Bluetooth , read Configure a personal profile and/or configure
photographs. messages and emails and send quick the sound (balance, ambience, ...) and the
messages. display (language, units, date, time, ...).
.
7
Voice commands
Steering mounted controls First steps Information - Using the system
Pressing this button activates the Example of a "voice command" for
Press the Push To Talk
voice commands function. navigation:
button and tell me what you'd
"Navigate to address 11 Regent
like after the tone. Remember
Street, London".
you can interrupt me at any
Example of a "voice command" for time by pressing this button. If you
To ensure that voice commands are the radio and media: press it again while I'm waiting for you
always recognised by the system, "Play artist Madonna" . to speak, it'll end the conversation. If
please observe the following you need to start over, say "cancel".
Example of a "voice command" for
recommendations: If you want to undo something, say
the telephone:
- speak in a normal tone without "undo". And to get information and tips
"Call David Miller".
breaking up words or raising your at any time, just say "help". If you ask
voice. to me do something and there's some
- always wait for the "beep" (audible The voice commands, with a choice
information missing that I need, I'll
signal) before speaking. of 12 languages (English, French,
give you some examples or take you
- for best operation, it is Italian, Spanish, German, Dutch,
through it step by step. There's more
recommended that the windows Portuguese, Polish, Turkish, Russian,
information available in "novice" mode.
and opening roof be closed to Arabic, Brazilian), are made using the
You can set the dialogue mode to
avoid extraneous interference language previously chosen and set in
"expert" when you feel comfortable.
(according to version). the system.
- before making a voice command,
ask other passengers to not speak. Alternative synonyms can be used for
some voice commands.
E.g. Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ...
The voice commands in Arabic for:

"Navigate to address" and "Display POI
in the city", are not available.
8
Global voice commands

These commands can be made from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button located on the steering
wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.
"Voice command" Help message
Help
Voice command help
Navigation help There are lots of topics I can help you with.
You can say: "help with phone", "help with navigation", "help with media" or "help with
radio". For an overview on how to use voice controls, you can say "help with voice
Radio help controls".
Media help
Telephone help
Set dialogue mode as <...> Select "beginner" or "expert" mode.
Select profile <...> Select profile 1, 2 or 3.
Yes
.
Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" and we'll start that again.
No
9
"Navigation" voice commands

These commands can be issued from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button on the steering wheel, as
long as there is no telephone call in progress.
Navigate home
To start guidance or add a stopover, say "navigate to" and then the address or contact
Navigate to work name.
For example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, London", or "navigate to contact, John
Navigate to preferred address <...> Miller".
You can specify if it's a preferred or recent destination.
For example, "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", "navigate to recent destination,
Navigate to contact <...> 11 Regent Street, London". Otherwise, just say, "navigate home".
To see points of interest on a map, you can say things like "show hotels in Banbury" or
Navigate to address <...> "show nearby petrol station".
For more information you can ask for "help with route guidance".
Show nearby POI <...>
Remaining distance
Remaining time To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time",
"distance" or "arrival time".
Arrival time Try saying "help with navigation" to learn more commands.
Stop route guidance
Depending on the country, give the destination instructions (address) in the language used by the system.
10
"Radio Media" voice commands

These commands can be issued from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button on the steering wheel, as
long as there is no telephone call in progress.
You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" and the station name or frequency.
For example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 FM".
Tune to channel <...>
To listen to a preset radio station, say "tune to preset number". For example "tune to preset
number five".
To display the details of the current "track", "artist" and "album", you can say "What's
What's playing
playing"
Play song <...>
Use the command "play" to select the type of music you'd like to hear.
You can pick by "song", "artist", or "album".
Play artist <...>
Just say something like "play artist, Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play album,
Thriller".
Play album <...>
Media voice commands are available only for a USB connection. .

11
"Telephone" voice commands

If a telephone is connected to the system, these voice commands can be issued from any main screen page after pressing the "Telephone"
button on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.
If there is no telephone connected by Bluetooth, a voice message announces: "Please first connect a telephone" and the voice session will be
closed.
Call contact <...>*
To make a phone call, say "call" followed by the contact name, for example: "Call David
Dial <...>* Miller".
You can also include the phone type, for example: "Call David Miller at home".
To make a call by number, say "dial" followed by the phone number, for example,
"Dial 107776 835 417".
Display contacts* You can check your voicemail by saying "call voicemail".
To send a text, say "send quick message to", followed by the contact, and then the name of
the quick message you'd like to send.
For example, "send quick message to David Miller, I'll be late".
Display calls* To display the list of calls, say "display calls".
For more information on SMS, you can say "help with texting".
Call (message box | voicemail)*
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has
been done.
12
"Test message" voice commands

If a telephone is connected to the system these voice commands can be issued from any main screen page after pressing the "Telephone"
button on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.
If no telephone has been connected by Bluetooth, a voice message announces: "Please first connect a telephone" and the voice session will be
closed.
To hear your messages, you can say "listen to most recent message".
Send text to <...> When you want to send a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for you to use. Just
use the quick message name and say something like "send quick message to Bill Carter,
I'll be late".
Check the phone menu for the names of the supported messages.
Please say "call" or "send quick message to", and then select a line from the list.
To move around a list shown on the display, you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next
page" or "previous page".
Listen to most recent message* To undo your selection, say "undo". To cancel the current action and start again, say
"cancel".
The system only sends pre-recorded "Quick messages".
* This function is only available if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has
been done. .
13
Navigation
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
1
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
14
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Select the orientation of the map; north up,
vehicle direction up or perspective.
Navigation
Display the traffic information available.
Manually locate an area on the world map or enter

World map
the latitude and longitude coordinates.
Around the vehicle
Around home Display the location criteria selected.
Navigation Around the destination
2D mode Switch to a 2D map.
Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or

with two fingers on the screen.
Start navigation to the current address.
Save the current address.

with two fingers on the screen. .
15
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13

2 3 4 5 6
1 23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13 7
16

Stations
Activate or deactivate the content available
Car park
(stations, car parks, risk areas and danger areas).
Danger area
Map color Select day or night mode for display of the map.
2 Travel
3 Active life
4 Commercial Select the POIs available.
POI on map 5 Public
6 Geographic
Navigation
Select all Select or deselect all.
Save your choice or selection.
7 Modify city Select or modify a city.
Weather
Petrol Station
Display on the map the content available in non-
Car park
connected mode.
View map Traffic
Danger area
Select POI Select from the POIs available.

17
18
Zoom in Zoom in around the city selected.
Around the vehicle
On the route Select a location option.
At the destination
Weather Weather information transmitted in TMC mode.
Filling stations around the vehicle
Filling stations Filling stations on the route
Filling stations at the destination

Display the list of POIs.
Car parks around the vehicle
Car park Car parks on the route
Car parks at the destination

.
19
20
Traffic Traffic observed Traffic information sent in real time.
Display the list of danger areas (roadworks,

Danger area List of danger areas
breakdowns, accidents, ...).
Select POI Configure a category of POI to display.
.
21
8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15
16
17
18
22
Navigation Select the country.
1 MENU Save the current address.
Enter address Confirm the current address.
8 Recent
Navigation
My home Display the lists of destinations and start
9 Preferred
navigation.
1 MENU My work
My destinations 10 Contact
Delete one or more destinations.
11 Travel
Navigation
12 Active life
List of categories available.
13 Commercial After selection of category, select the point of
1 MENU interest.
14 Public
Points of interest
15 Geographic
Search Search for a point of interest.
16 Point of interest Enter a point of interest.

Navigation
17 Address Enter the address of a point of interest.
1 MENU Enter settings for the POI search mode in a local
.
18 Local / Connected or connected database depending on the services
Search subscribed to.
Confirm the entry.
23
19 20
21 22 23 24 25
24

Fast
Navigation Short Select the guidance criteria (motorways, tolls and

Compromise how traffic is taken into account).
1 MENU
Ecological
Guidance criteria See on map Display the route selected using the criteria.
Save your selections.
19 Waypoints Display the waypoints saved.
20 Route Display details of the route.

Navigation
Add waypoint Add a waypoint Add a waypoint from a list offered.
1 MENU Preview Display the map.
Finish Press to calculate the route.

Routes / waypoints
Delete one or more waypoints.
Move a waypoint in the list.
21 Aspects
Navigation 22 Options
Enter choices and select the volume for the voice
23 Alerts
and stating the names of streets.
1 MENU
24 Vocal
25
.
Settings Mapping
Save the selections adopted.

25
Choosing a new destination

Towards a new destination Towards a recent destination
Press Navigation to display the
To use the navigation system, it is Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
necessary to enter the "City", the primary page.
" Street " and the " Number " using the
Press the " MENU " button to go to the virtual keypad, or to take them from the
1 secondary page. list of "Contacts" or from the " History" Press the " MENU " button to go to the
Select " Enter address".

of addresses.
1 secondary page.
Select " My destinations".

Without confirmation of the street
number, you will be guided to one end
Select the "Country".
of the street.
Select the " Recent " tab.
Enter the "City", the " Street " and the 8

" Number " and confirm by pressing
on the suggestions displayed. Select the address chosen in the list to display
the "Guidance criteria".
Press "OK " to select the "Guidance
criteria". Press "OK " to start navigation.
And / Or
Select " See on map" to select the
"Guidance criteria". Select " Position" to see the point of
arrival geographically.
Press "OK " to start navigation.
26
Towards "My home" or "My Towards a contact Towards points of interest (POI)
work"
Press Navigation to display the Press Navigation to display the Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
primary page. primary page. categories.
Press the " MENU " button to go to the Press the " MENU " button to go to the Press Navigation to display the
1 secondary page.
1 secondary page. primary page.
Select " My destinations". Select " My destinations". Press the " MENU " button to go to the
1 secondary page.
Select the " Preferred" tab.
9 Select the "Contact " tab. Select " Points of interest ".
Select " My home".

10
Select a contact in the list offered to start Select the " Travel", or " Leisure"
navigation. or "Commercial" or " Public" or
Or "Geographic" tab.
Select " My work ". Or
Select " Search" to enter the name
and address of a POI.
Or
Select a previously saved favourite destination. Press "OK " to start calculation of the
route.
.
27
Towards a point on the map Towards GPS coordinates
Press Navigation to display the Press Navigation to display the A marker is displayed in the middle of
primary page. primary page. the screen, with the " Latitude" and
" Longitude" coordinates.
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
screen. screen.
Press this button to start navigation.
Select the destination by pressing on the map. Press this button to display the world
map.
Or
Using the grid, select by zoom the
Press this button to save the address
Tap the screen to place a marker and desired country or region.
displayed.
display the sub-menu.
Press this button to enter the GPS

Press this button to start navigation.
coordinates. Or
Press this button to enter the value

Or for " Latitude" using the virtual
Press this button to save the address keypad.
displayed And
Press this button to enter the value
for " Longitude" using the virtual
A long press on a point opens a list of keypad.
POIs nearby.
28
TMC (Traffic Message

Channel)
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)

messages are linked to a European
standard on the broadcasting of traffic
information via the RDS system on FM
radio, transmitting traffic information in
real time.
The TMC information is then displayed
on a GPS Navigation system map and
taken into account straight away during
navigation, so as to avoid accidents,
traffic jams and closed roads.
The display of danger areas depends

on the legislation in force and
subscription to the service.
.
29
Connected navigation
Depending on the equipment level of the vehicle
Network connection provided by the vehicle
OR
Network connection provided by the user
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
30
Connected navigation connection

Network connection provided by On the arrival of "TOMTOM

the user TRAFFIC", the services are
available.
driver, using a smartphone when USB connection
driving is prohibited.
Connect the USB cable.
All operations must be done with the
The smartphone is in charge mode The services offered with connected
vehicle stationary.
when connected by USB cable. navigation are as follows.
A Connected Services pack:
Bluetooth connection - Weather,
For access to connected navigation, you
can use the connection provided by the Activate the Bluetooth function on - Filling stations,
vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance the telephone and ensure that it is - Car park,
call" services or use your smartphone as visible to all (see the "Connect-App" - Traffic,
a modem. section). - POI, local search.
Activate and enter settings for A Danger area pack (option).
sharing the smartphone connection. Wi-Fi connection
Select a Wi-Fi connection found by
the system and connect to it (see the
"Connect-App" section).
The principles and standards

Restrictions of use: are constantly changing. For
Network connection provided by - With CarPlay , connection sharing is communication between your
the vehicle only with a Wi-Fi connection. smartphone and the system to operate
- With MirrorLinkTM, connection correctly, we recommend that you
The system is automatically
sharing is only with a USB keep your smartphone's operating
connected to the modem included
connection. system up to date, and the time and
for the "Emergency or assistance
.
calls" services and does not require date on your smartphone and the
The quality of services depends on the system correct.
a connection provided by the user via
quality of the network connection.
their smartphone.
31
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
26 27 28 29 30
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13 23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
1
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
7
32

Navigation
Select the orientation of the map; north up,
vehicle direction up or perspective.
On connection of the system to a network,

Navigation
"TOMTOM TRAFFIC" is displayed instead of
"TMC", for use of all of the options available, in
TOMTOM TRAFFIC
real time.
Weather
Stations
Select the options.
Car park The map display the route chosen, depending on
options.
Traffic
Danger area
Map color Select the display mode for the map.

Navigation
26 Commercial
27 Geographic
28 Leisure Select the POIs available.

POI on map
29 Public
30 Travel
Save the options.
View map 7 Modify city Select or change a city.

.
33
31 32
34

Select city Select or change a city.
Around the vehicle
On the route Select or change a city.
At the destination
Display the weather forecast for the day or the

Weather Weather information
following days.
Filling stations around the vehicle
Filling stations on the route

Display the list of filling stations and the
Filling stations Filling stations at the destination
associated information (address, prices, fuels, ...).
31 By distance
32 By price
Car parks around the vehicle
Car parks on the route
Car parks at the destination Display the list of car parks and the associated
Car park information (address, distance, spaces available,
Sort by distance price, ...).
Sort by spaces
Sort by price

35
36
Display traffic information in real time: type,

Traffic Traffic observed
description and duration (in minutes).
Display danger areas (roadworks, breakdowns,

Danger areas List of danger areas
accidents, ...) in real time.
Points of
Points of interest Select POI Display the list of POIs for the location selected.
interest
.
37
Display the weather Settings specific to

connected navigation
Press Navigation to display the Press Navigation to display the
For access to connected navigation,
primary page. primary page.
you have to select the option:
"Authorise sending information".
Press the " MENU " button to go to the
1
Press this button to display the list of
secondary page.
services.
Select " Settings". The display of danger zones is

Select " View map". conditioned by the legislation in force
and subscription to the service.
Select "Options".
Select " Weather ".
22
Activate or deactivate:
Press this button to display the first - "Allow declaration of danger
level of information. areas"
- "Guidance to final destination
Press this button to display the on foot "
detailed weather information. - "Authorise sending
information"
Select "Alerts".
The temperature displayed at 6 o'clock
in the morning will be the maximum 23
temperature for the day.
The temperature displayed at 6 o'clock Activate or deactivate " Warn of
in the evening will be the minimum danger zones".
temperature for the night.
38
Declaration of "Danger "Danger areas" pack

areas" updates
Press Settings to display the primary
To distribute information on the
page.
declaration of danger zones, you
should check the option: "Allow
declaration of danger areas". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
Press Navigation to display the

1 the secondary page.
primary page. Select " System settings".
Press the " Declare a new danger

area" button located in the upper bar Select the " System info" tab.
Select the option " Type" to choose Select " View " to view the version of
the type of "Danger area". the various modules installed in the
system.
Select the " Speed" option and enter Select " Update(s) due".
it using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK " to save and distribute the

You can download the system and map
information.
updates from the Brand's website.
.
The update procedure can also be
found on the website.
39
Applications
According to version / according to equipment
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
1 2 3
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
40
Internet Browser Connectivity Applications

Press Applications to display the Press Applications to display the Press Applications to display the
primary page. primary page. primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the Press "Connectivity" to go to the Press "Applications" to display the
2 " Internet Browser " function.
2 CarPlay or MirrorLinkTM function.
3 applications home page.
Press " Internet Browser " to display

the browser home page.
Select your country of residence.
Press "OK " to save and start the

browser.
Connection to the internet is via one of

the network connections provided by
the vehicle or the user.
.
41
CarPlay smartphone connection
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
42
Connect a USB cable. The

As a safety measure and because it On connecting the USB cable, the
smartphone charges when connecte
requires the sustained attention of CarPlay function deactivates the
d by a USB cable.
the driver, using a smartphone when system's Bluetooth mode.
Press " Telephone" to display the
Operation must be with the vehicle
CarPlay interface.
stationary.
The synchronisation of a smartphone

Or
allows applications on a smartphone that
are adapted to the CarPlay technology
to be displayed in the vehicle's screen, Connect a USB cable. The
having first activated the CarPlay smartphone charges when
function in the smartphone. connected by a USB cable.
As the principles and standards are
constantly changing, it is recommended In the system, press "Applications"
that you keep your smartphone's to display the primary page.
operating system updated.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your Press "Connectivity" to go to the
country.
2 CarPlay function.
Press "CarPlay" to display the

CarPlay interface
.
43
MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
44
During the procedure, several screen

As a safety measure and because it As a safety measure, applications
pages relating to certain functions
requires the sustained attention of can only be viewed with the vehicle
are displayed.
the driver, using a smartphone when stationary; display is interrupted once
Accept to start and end the
driving is prohibited. the vehicle is moving.
connection.
stationary. Once connection is established, a page
The " MirrorLinkTM" function requires
the use of a compatible smartphone is displayed with the applications already
and applications. downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
to MirrorLinkTM technology.
The synchronisation of a smartphone When connecting a smartphone to
the system, it is recommended that Access to the different audio sources remains
allows applications on a smartphone
Bluetooth be started on the smartphone accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM
that are adapted to the MirrorLinkTM
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
technology to be displayed in the Connect a USB cable. The
Access to the menus for the system is possible
vehicle's screen. smartphone charges when
at any time using the dedicated buttons
The principles and standards connected by a USB cable.
are constantly evolving. For the
From the system, press on
communication process between the
"Applications" to display the primary There may be a wait for the availability
smartphone and the system to work
page. of applications, depending on the
correctly, the smartphone must be
unlocked; update the operating system Press "Connectivity" to go to the quality of your network.
of your smartphone as well as the date
and time in the smartphone and the 2 MirrorLinkTM function.
system.
Press " MirrorLinkTM" to start the
For the list of eligible smartphones,
system's application.
connect to the Brand's internet website
in your country.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
.
necessary to activate the " MirrorLinkTM"
function.
45
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
46
Go to or return to the applications already

downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to
MirrorLinkTM technology.
Go to a menu list depending on the application

chosen.
Applications
"Back": abandon the current operation, go up one
level.
MirrorLinkTM
"Home": go to or return to the "Car mode" page on
your smartphone.
Go to the primary page of the "Applications"

menu.
.
47
According to equipment
Level 2 Level 3
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
4 5 6
1 2 3 7 8
7 8
48
Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Select the fragrance.
Off Switch off the scented air freshener.
Applications Low
Scented air Medium Adjust the intensity of diffusion of the fragrance.

freshener
High
Confirm the selection and settings.
4 Instant
System providing information about the current
Applications 5 Trip 1
journey (range, fuel consumption).
Trip computer 6 Trip 2
Back to the Applications page.
7 Relax
Applications
Select an ambience combining each of the
8 Boost
equipment presets and/or save it in a user profile.
i-Cockpit Amplify
Profile management
7 Relax
8
.
i-Cockpit Amplify Boost
equipment presets and/or save it in a user profile.
Profile management
49
7 8
9 10
7 8
11 12 13 14
50
Lighting Adjust the intensity of the ambience lighting.
Ambience Adjust the sound ambience.
Dynamic Set the driving mode.
Fragrance Select a fragrance.
Applications Settings Driver massage Select and configure the driver massage.
i-Cockpit Amplify Passenger Massage Select and configure the passenger massage.
7 Relax 9 Save settings Save the settings.

Boost
8
10 Reset the mode Reset the parameters of the ambience.
OR Confirm the selections and settings.
Deactivate Deactivate the "i-Cockpit Amplify" function.

i-Cockpit Amplify
11 Profile 1
7 Relax
Boost 12 Profile 2
8 Configure the profiles.
Profile management 13 Profile 3
14 Common profile
.
Save the settings.
Confirm the selections and settings.
51
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13 15 16
1 2 3
17 18 19
20 21
52
Applications 15 All Display all telephones detected and saved.
1 OPTIONS
16 Connected Display all telephones connected.
Bluetooth
connection Search Start the search for a device to be connected.
Applications 17 Secured Display the secured Wi-Fi networks.
1 OPTIONS
18 Not secured Display the not secured Wi-Fi networks.
Wi-Fi network
connection
19 Stored Display the stored Wi-Fi networks.
Applications
Display the status of the subscription to the
1 OPTIONS connected services, the status of the network
connection and the connection mode.
Manage connection
Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi connection

Applications 20 Activation
sharing.
1 OPTIONS Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and

21 Settings
connect.
Share Wi-Fi
.
connection Save the settings.
53
Bluetooth connection
Procedure from the system Connection sharing
requires sustained attention by the Press on "Connect-App" to display The system offers to connect the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile the primary page. telephone with 3 profiles:
telephone with the Bluetooth hands- - " Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
free system of your audio system must only),
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1
be done with the vehicle stationary - " Streaming" (wireless play of audio files
the secondary page.
and the ignition on. on the telephone),
- " Mobile internet data".
Press on " Bluetooth connection".
The " Mobile internet data" profile
must be activated for connected
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
Select " Search". navigation (where the vehicle does not
telephone and ensure that it is "visible
The list of detected telephones is have "Emergency and assistance call"
to all" (telephone configuration).
displayed. services), having first activated sharing
of this connection on your smartphone.
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
list of devices detected. that you deactivate and then reactivate the
"Bluetooth" function in your telephone.
Select one or more profiles.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone. Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
Press "OK " to confirm.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code Depending on the type of telephone, you
is the same in the system and in the may be asked to accept or not the transfer
telephone. of your contacts and messages.
54
Wi-Fi connection Sharing the Wi-Fi connection Managing connections

Network connection by the smartphone Wi-Fi. Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the Press Connect-App to display the
system. primary page.
Press "Connect-App" to display the Press Connect-App to display the

primary page. primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to


Select " Manage connection".
Select " Wi-Fi network connection". Select " Share Wi-Fi connection".
With this function you can view the access

Select the " Secured", " Not secured" Select the "Activation" tab to to connected services, the availability of
or " Stored" tab.
20 activate or deactivate sharing of the
Wi-Fi connection.
connected services and modify the connection
mode.
Select a network. And / Or
Select the " Settings" to change the
21 name of the system network and the

password.
Using the virtual keypad, enter the
" Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the Press "OK " to confirm.
" Password".
Press "OK " to start the connection.

To protect from any piracy and provide
maximum security for your systems,
.
it is recommended that you use a
The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing security code or a complex password.
of the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive.
55
Radio Media
Level 1 Level 2
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
AM/531 kHz
PO kHz
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
56
Radio
USB
Radio Media iPod

Select change of source.
Source CD
AUX
Bluetooth
Radio Media Carry out an automatic or manual search for radio

Frequency
stations.
Frequency / Make a long press on an empty location to preset
2 Presets Presets
a station.
FM
Radio Media
DAB Press the Band button to change waveband.
3 Band
AM
Radio Media
.
Radio stations Open the list and press a radio station to select it.
4 List
57
Level 2 Level 3
1
5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9
10 11
5 6 7 8 9
12 13 14 15
58
5 Ambience Select the sound ambience.
6 Distribution Sound distribution by the Arkamys system.

Radio Media
Adjust the volume or activate volume linked to
7 Sound
speed.
1 OPTIONS
Audio settings
8 Voice Adjust the voice volume.
9 Ringtone Adjust the ringtone volume.
Save settings.
Radio Media 10 General

Activate or deactivate settings.
1 OPTIONS 11 Announcements
Radio settings Save settings.
12 FM
Display the list of radio stations for the band
13 DAB
selected.
Radio Media 14 AM
15 Presets Select a preset radio station.

1 OPTIONS
Frequency Enter a frequency manually.

Radio stations
.
Change the screen display mode.
Update the list according to reception.
59
Level 2 Level 3
16 17 18 19 20
21
60
16 Albums
Radio Media 17 Artists
1 OPTIONS 18 Genres Choose a selection mode.
Music files 19 Playlists
20 Folders
Radio Media
Display photos.
The system supports the following image formats:
1 OPTIONS 21 USB
.gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .bmp, .png, .raw and .tiff with a
maximum file size of 10 Mb per image.
Managing photos
.
61
Radio
Selecting a station Preset a station
Press Radio Media to display the Press " Frequency". Select a radio station or frequency.
menu.
2 (refer to the corresponding section)
Press " Presets".
2
Press " Frequency". Enter the values using the virtual
2 keypad.
First enter the units then click on the
Press one of the buttons for an decimals zone to enter the figures Make a long press on one of the
automatic search for radio stations. after the decimal point. buttons to preset the station.

Or
Move the cursor for a manual search

for frequencies up or down. Radio reception may be affected by
the use of electrical equipment not
approved by the Brand, such as a USB
Or charger connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills,
Press Radio Media to display the buildings, tunnel, car park, below
primary page. ground...) may prevent reception,
even in RDS station tracking mode.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to This phenomenon is normal in the
1 the secondary page. propagation of radio waves and is in no
way indicative of a fault with the audio
.
system.
Select " Radio stations" in the
secondary page.
63
Activate/Deactivate RDS Display text information Play TA messages

Press Radio Media to display the
The "Radio Text" function allows The TA (Traffic Announcement)
primary page.
information transmitted by the radio function gives priority to TA alert
station, relating to the station or the messages. To operate, this function

song playing, to be displayed. needs good reception of a radio station
that carries this type of message. While
Select " Radio settings". traffic information is being broadcast,
Press Radio Media to display the the current media is automatically
primary page. interrupted so that the TA message can
Select "General". be heard. Normal play of the media
10 1
the secondary page.
previously playing is resumed at the
end of the message.
Activate/deactivate " Station follow ".
Select " Radio settings".

Select "General". Select "Announcements".
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue

10 11
listening to the same station by automatic Activate / Deactivate " Display radio Activate / Deactivate " Traffic
retuning to alternative frequencies. text ". announcement ".
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
Press "OK " to confirm. Press "OK " to confirm.
throughout the entire country as radio
stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of
reception of the station during a journey.
64
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting)

Terrestrial Digital Radio DAB-FM auto tracking
Activate / Deactivate " Station
Digital radio provides higher quality "DAB" does not cover 100% of the
follow ".
reception. territory.
The different multiplexes offer a When the digital radio signal is poor,
choice of radio stations arranged in "DAB-FM auto tracking" allows you to Press "OK ".
alphabetical order. continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding "FM" analogue station
(if there is one).
If "DAB-FM auto tracking" is activated,
there is a difference of a few seconds
when the system switches to "FM"
Press Radio Media to display the Press Radio Media to display the analogue radio with sometimes a
primary page. primary page. variation in volume.
Once the digital signal is restored, the
system automatically changes back to
Select the audio source. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to "DAB".
Press " Band" to select the " DAB" Select " Radio settings". If the "DAB" station being listened to
3 waveband. is not available on "FM" (" DAB-FM "

option greyed out), or "DAB/FM auto
tracking" is not activated, the sound
Select "General". will cut out while the digital signal is too
10 weak.
.
65
Media
USB port Auxiliary (AUX) socket Selecting the source
(depending on equipment)
primary page.
Select " Source".
Choose the source.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Bluetooth audio streaming
or connect the USB device to the USB port has been checked in the audio settings.
using a suitable cable (not supplied). Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your telephone.
To protect the system, do not use a Connect the portable device (MP3 player) to
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First
USB hub. the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
adjust the volume on your portable device (to a
(not supplied).
high level).
The system builds playlists (in temporary First adjust the volume of your portable device Then adjust the volume of your audio system.
memory), an operation which can take from (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
a few seconds to several minutes at the first If play does not start automatically, it may be
audio system.
connection. necessary to start the audio playback from the
Display and management of the controls are
Reduce the number of non-music files and the telephone.
via the portable device.
number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Control is from the portable device or by using
The playlists are updated every time the the system's touch buttons.
ignition is switched off or connection of a USB CD player
memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they (depending on equipment)
Insert the CD in the player. Once connected in streaming mode,
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
the telephone is considered to be a
will be shorter.
media source.
66
Connecting Apple players Information and advice

Connect the Apple player to the USB port

It is advisable to restrict file names to
The system supports USB mass
using a suitable cable (not supplied). 20 characters, without using of special
storage devices, BlackBerry devices
Play starts automatically. characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ) to avoid any playing
or Apple players via USB ports. The
and displaying problems.
Control is via the audio system. adaptor cable is not supplied.
Control of the peripheral device is with
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT 32
the audio system controls.
(file allocation table).
Other peripherals, not recognised on
The classifications available are those connection, must be connected to the
of the portable device connected auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not It is recommended that the original USB
(artists / albums / genres / playlists / supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, cable for the portable device is used.
audiobooks / podcasts). depending on compatibility.
The default classification used is by
artist. To modify the classification used,
return to the first level of the menu
then select the desired classification To protect the system, do not use a In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
(playlists for example) and confirm USB hub. CDRW, when burning it is preferable to select
to go down through the menu to the The audio equipment will only play audio standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet.
desired track. files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3" If the disc is burned in another format, it may
file extensions and with a bit rate of between not be played correctly.
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It is recommended that the same burning
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. standard is always used on an individual disc,
The version of software in the audio system
No other type of file (.mp4,...) can be played. with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
may not be compatible with the generation of
".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. for the best sound quality.
your Apple player.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD,
.
The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
48 KHz. the Joliet standard is recommended.
67
Telephone
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
4 5 6 7
12 13 14
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
1 2 3 8 9 10 11
68
4 All
5 Telephone View contacts according to presentation choices.

Select a contact or a favourite saved in the
6 Address system via the profile selected to start the call.
7 Favourites
Sort the contacts by Surname-First name or First

Telephone name-Surname.
Bluetooth Update the contacts from the telephone.

2
Contact Search Search for a contact in the directory.
12 Telephone
13 Address
Create Create a new contact in the system.
14 Email
8 All
Telephone 9 Incoming
View calls according to choice of presentation.
Select a contact to start the call.
Bluetooth 10 Outgoing
3 Calls 11 Missed
View details for the contact.

.
69
Level 2 Level 3
1
15 16
17 18 19
20 21 22
70
Telephone 15 All Display all telephones detected and saved.
1 OPTIONS
16 Connected Display all connected telephones.
Bluetooth
connection Search Start the search for a device to connect.
17 All
Telephone
1 OPTIONS 18 Received Display messages according to the choice made.
Messages
19 Sent
20 Received
Telephone
21 Sent
1 OPTIONS Display emails according to the choice made.

22 Not read
Email
Mailbox
.
71
Level 2 Level 3
23 24 25 26
23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30
72
23 Security Make driving safe.
Enter and save the number for the telephone

24 Voicemail
voicemail.
Telephone
1 OPTIONS 25 Ringtone Adjust the ringtone volume.
Settings
26 Statistics Display data for the telephone connected.
Save the options.
27 Delayed
Telephone
28 My arrival
Select a quick message from the categories, as
1 OPTIONS
required.
Quick messages 29 Not available
30 Other
.
73
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone

Procedure from the system Connection sharing
requires sustained attention by the Press on Telephone to display the The system offers to connect the telephone
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile primary page. with 3 profiles:
telephone with theBluetooth hands-free - Telephone (hands-free kit, telephone
system of your audio system must be only),
done with the vehicle stationary and Press on " Bluetooth search".
- Streaming (wireless play of audio files on
the ignition on. the telephone),
- Mobile internet data.
Or
The " Mobile internet data" profile
Select " Search".
must be activated for connected
Activate the Bluetooth function on the The list of telephones detected is
navigation, having first activated
telephone and ensure that it is "visible displayed.
sharing of the connection on your
to all" (telephone configuration). smartphone.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
Procedure from the telephone that you deactivate and then reactivate the Select one or more profiles.
"Bluetooth" function in your telephone.
Select the system name in the list of
devices detected.
Select the name of the chosen Press "OK " to confirm.
from the telephone.

procedure used (from the telephone or Depending on the type of telephone,
from the system), ensure that the code you may be asked to accept or not
is the same in the system and in the the transfer of your contacts and
telephone. messages.
74
Automatic reconnection
To modify the connection profile:
On return to the vehicle, if the last The ability of the system to connect
telephone connected is present again, Press Telephone to display the with just one profile depends on the
it is automatically recognised and primary page. telephone.
within about 30 seconds of switching All three profiles may connect by default.
on the ignition, the connection is
1
established without any action on your
the secondary page.
part (Bluetooth activated).
The services available depend on
Select " Bluetooth connection" to the network, the SIM card and the
display the list of paired devices. compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check in your telephone's
manual and with your service provider
Press the "details" button. for the services available to you.
The profiles compatible with the system

are HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
Press "OK " to confirm. MAP and PAN.
.
Go to the Brand's website for more information
(compatibility, additional help, ...).
75
Managing paired telephones Deleting a telephone Receiving a call

Select the basket at top right of the An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
This function allows the connection or
screen to display a basket alongside superimposed display in the screen.
disconnection of a peripheral device as
the telephone chosen.
well as the deletion of a pairing. Make a short press on the steering
Press the basket alongside the mounted TEL button to accept an
Press Telephone to display the incoming call.
primary page. telephone chosen to delete it.
And
1
Make a long press
the secondary page.
Select " Bluetooth connection" to on the steering mounted TEL button

display the list of paired peripheral to reject the call.
devices.
Or
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it. Select " End call".
Press again to connect it.
76
Making a call Calling a contact Calling a recently used number

Press Telephone to display the
Using the telephone is not Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
recommended while driving. primary page.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering Or make a long press
Or
mounted controls.
Make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button.
on the steering mounted button.

Calling a new number
Press Telephone to display the Select "Contact ".
primary page. 2 Select "Calls".
Enter the phone number using the Select the desired contact from the list offered. 3
digital keypad.
Select "Call".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Press "Call" to start the call.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; as a safety
measure, first park the vehicle.
.
77
Managing contacts / entries Managing messages

Press Telephone to display the Press Telephone to display the
The access to " Messages" depends on
the compatibility of the smartphone and
the integral system.
Select "Contact ". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to Depending on the smartphone, access
2 1 the secondary page. to your messages or email may be
slow.
Select "Create" to add a new contact. Select " Messages" to display the list
of messages.
Select the "All" or " Received" or the network, the SIM card and the
In the " Telephone" tab, enter the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
12
" Sent " tab.
telephone numbers for the contact. used.
Check in the manual for your
Select the detail of the message smartphone and with your service
In the "Address" tab, enter the chosen in one of the lists
13
provider for the services available to
addresses for the contact.
you.
Press "Answer " to send a quick
In the " Email" tab, enter the email message stored in the system.
14 addresses for the contact.

The " Email" function allows email
addresses to be entered for a contact,
but the system is not able to send Press " Play" to hear the message.
emails.
78
Managing quick messages Managing email

Press on the "OPTIONS" button to Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 go to the secondary page.

Select "Quick messages" to display Select " Email" to display the list of
the list of messages. messages.
Select the " Delayed" or " My arrival" Select the " Received" or " Sent " or
or " Not available" or "Other " tab " Not read" tab.
with the possibility of creating new
messages.
Select the email chosen in the list.
Press "Create" to write a new

message. Press " Play" to start playing the
email.
Select the message chosen in one of
the lists.
Access to " Email" depends on the
compatibility of the smartphone and the
Press " Transfer " to select the
integral system.
addressee(s).
.
Press " Play" to start playing the
message.
79
Settings
Level 1 Level 2
23 C 18,5 21,5 12:13
3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 4 5 6 7
80
Settings Color schemes: 1,2,3, ...

Having chosen the color scheme, save the
setting.
Color schemes
3 Ambience Select the sound ambience.
4 Distribution Sound distribution by the Arkamys system.
Settings Sound Adjust the volume or activate linked to speed.

5
Audio settings Voice Adjust the voice volume.
6
7 Ringtone Adjust the ringtone volume.
Save the settings.
Settings
Function allowing the display to be switched off.
Pressing the screen reactivates it.
Turn off screen
Settings
Activate the profile selected.
2 Profile (1, 2, 3)
.
81
1
8 9 10
11 12 13 14
15 16
15 16
82

Distance and fuel
consumption Set the units used for distance, fuel consumption
8 Units
and temperature.
Temperature
Settings
9 Factory settings Reinitialize Restore the factory settings.
1 OPTIONS
System View the versions of the different modules

settings 10 System info View (system, mapping, risk areas) installed in the
system as well as the updates available.
Save the settings.
11 All
Settings 12 Europe
Select the language then confirm.
1 OPTIONS 13 Asia
Languages
14 America
Having selected the language, save the setting.
Settings
15 Animation Activate or deactivate settings.
OPTIONS Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the

1 16 Brightness
.
screen and/or of the instrument panel.
Screen configuration
Save the settings.
83
1
17 18
19 20 21 22
84
Date
17 Date Enter the date and select the date format.
Date format:
Settings Time Set the time.
1 OPTIONS Time Zone Define the time zone.

18 Time
Setting Time format: Select the time format: 12h / 24h.
the time-date
Synchronisation with Activate or deactivate synchronisation with the
GPS (UTC): satellites.
Save the settings.
19 Profile 1
Settings
20 Profile 2
Enter settings for the profiles.
1 OPTIONS
21 Profile 3
Setting of the
profiles
22 Common profile
Save the settings.
Settings Personalisation of the Choose and select the display information

dashboard required on the dashboard.
OPTIONS
1
.
Driver screen Confirm the selections.
configuration
85
Audio settings Profile settings

The sound distribution (or spatialisation As a safety measure and because it
page.
with the Arkamys system) is audio requires the sustained attention of the
processing that allows the quality of the driver, changes to settings must only be
Select "Audio settings". sound to be adapted according to the done with the vehicle stationary.
number of passengers in the vehicle.
Available only with the front and rear
Select "Ambience" speakers configuration. Press Settings to display the primary
3 The audio Ambience settings
page.
Or
(6 ambiences available) as well as the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1
" Position"
4
Bass, Medium and Treble settings the secondary page.
are different and independent for each
sound source.
Or Select " Setting of the profiles".
Activate or Deactivate " Loudness".
" Sound"
5 The settings for " Position" (All

passengers, Driver and Front only) are
Select " Profile 1", " Profile 2 ",
19
Or common to all sources.
" Profile 3" or "Common profile".
" Voice"
6 Activate or Deactivate " Touch tones",

" Volume linked to speed" and Press this button to enter a name for
Or the profile using the virtual keypad.
"Auxiliary input ".
" Ringtone".
7 On-board audio: Arkamys Sound

Press "OK " to save the settings. Staging optimises the distribution of
sound in the passenger compartment.
86
Press this button to add a photograph Press this button to initialise the Select a " Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to
to the profile. profile selected.
2 associate the "Audio settings" with
it.
Insert a USB memory stick containing Select "Audio settings".

the photograph in the USB port. Initialisation of the profile selected
Select the photograph. activates the English language by default.
Select "Ambience".
Press "OK " to accept the transfer of
the photograph. 3
Or
" Distribution".
4
Press "OK " again to save the
settings.
Or
" Sound".
5
The location for the photograph is
square; the system deforms the original
photograph if in another format.
Or
" Voice".
6
Or
" Ringtone".
7
.
Press "OK " to save the settings.
87
Modifying system settings Select the language

Press Settings to display the primary Press Settings to display the primary Press Settings to display the primary
page. page. page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to

Select " Screen configuration". Select " System settings". Select " Languages" to change the
language.
Select "Animation". Select " Units" to change the units
15 8 for distance, fuel consumption and

temperature.
Setting the date
Activate or deactivate "Automatic Select " Factory settings" to return
scrolling".
9 to the initial settings. Press Settings to display the primary
page.
Select " Brightness".
16 Returning the system to factory settings

activates the English language by
1
the secondary page.
default.
Move the cursor to adjust the
brightness of the screen and/or of the Select " Setting the time-date".
instrument panel. Select " System info" to display the
10 versions of the different modules

installed in the system.
88
Select " Date". Setting the time

17 Press Settings to display the primary Press "OK " to confirm.
page.
Press this button to define the date.

1 the secondary page. The system does not automatically
manage the change between winter
and summer time (depending on
Select " Setting the time-date".
country).
Select the display format of the date.

Select " Time". Color schemes
18 As a safety measure, the procedure
for changing the color scheme is only
Adjustment of the time and date is only Press this button to adjust the time possible with the vehicle stationary.
available if "GPS synchronisation" is using the virtual keypad.
deactivated.
The change between winter and Press "OK " to confirm. Press Settings to display the primary
summer time is done by changing the page.
time zone.
Select "Color schemes".
Press this button to define the time
zone.
Select a color scheme in the list then
Select the display format for the time press "OK " to confirm.
(12h / 24h).
.
Every time the color scheme is
Activate or deactivate
changed, the system restarts,
synchronisation with the satellites
temporarily displaying a black screen.
(UTC).
89
Frequently asked questions

The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
Navigation
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is not The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
successful. toll roads on a toll motorway). menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The audible warning of The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings (without the possibility
"Danger areas" does not of adjusting the volume) in the "Navigation" menu.
work.
The system does not The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select setting for the "Traffic info" function in
suggest a detour around an the list of route settings (Without, Manual or
incident on the route. Automatic).
I receive a "Danger area" Other than guidance, the system announces all "Danger areas" Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the
alert which is not on my positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an "Danger area". Select "On the route" to no longer
route. alert for "Danger areas" located on nearby or parallel roads. receive alerts other than navigation instructions or
to reduce the time for the announcement.
90

Certain traffic jams along On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive Wait until the traffic information is being received
the route are not indicated the traffic information. correctly (display of the traffic information icons
in real time. on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely so
displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the This phenomenon is normal. The system
weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
.
91
Radio
The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area short-cut menu to enable the system to check
to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
or the stored stations do the geographical area.
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
block reception, including in RDS mode. a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio
stations in the list of stations" secondary menu.
stations received.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name

The name of the radio (the title of the song for example).
station changes. The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
92
Media
Playback of my USB Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
memory stick starts only access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
after a very long wait catalogue time). structure on the memory stick.
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not data or contains an audio format which the player does not recognise. right way up.
played by the player. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf, ...). played if it is too badly damaged.
Check the content in the case of a recorded CD:
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
not recognised by the audio system. The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
Some recorded CDs will not be played by the
audio system because they are not of adequate
quality.
There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain This phenomenon is normal.
period following the insertion amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few
of a CD or connection of a seconds to a few minutes.
USB memory stick.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
.
unsuitable. an ambience.
93

Some characters in the The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
media information are not folders.
displayed correctly while
playing.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
does not start.
The names of tracks and The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
Telephone
I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is
Bluetooth telephone. telephone may not be visible. switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible
to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone
at the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
telephone connected maximum if required, and increase the volume of
in Bluetooth mode is the telephone if necessary.
inaudible.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
communication. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).
94

Some contacts are The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
duplicated in the list. contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. telephone contacts".
When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be
duplicated.
Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings Modify the display setting in the telephone
alphabetical order. chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. directory.
The system does not receive The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to
SMS text messages. the system.
Settings
In changing the setting The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the settings for treble Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings
of treble and bass the and bass and vice-versa. to obtain the desired musical ambience.
equalizer setting is
deselected.
In changing the equalizer

setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings Modify the balance or distribution settings to
balance settings, the and vice-versa. obtain the desired musical ambience.
distribution setting is
deselected.
When changing an
.
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
95

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings can be adapted to Check that the audio settings are adapted to the
sound quality between the the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences sources listened to. Adjust Balance, Treble, Bass
different audio sources. when changing source. to the middle position, select the "None" musical
ambience and set the loudness correction to the
"Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive"
position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
system switches off after a depends on the state of charge of the battery. charge.
few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
The date and time cannot Setting of the date and time is only available if the synchronisation Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting.
be set. with the satellites is deactivated. Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
synchronisation" (UTC).
96
PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Multimedia audio system - Applications - Bluetooth telephone
Contents
First steps 98
Steering mounted controls - Type 1 100
Menus 102
Applications 104
Radio Media 112
Telephone 124
Settings 138
The different functions and settings


driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands- The system is protected in such a way The link below gives access to OSS
free system of your audio system must that it will only operate in your vehicle. (Open Source Software) codes for the
be done with the vehicle stationary The display of the Energy Economy system.
.
and the ignition on. Mode message signals that a change http://www.psa-peugeot-citroen.com/oss
to standby is imminent.
97
First steps
With the engine running, a press Use the buttons either side of or below the
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
mutes the sound. touch screen for access to the menus, then
type.
With the ignition off, a press turns the press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. All
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
system on. of the touch areas of the screen are white.
abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) with
Press in the grey zone to go back a level or
no additional product.
Volume. confirm.
Do not use sharp objects on the
Press the back arrow to go back a level or
screen.
confirm.
Do not touch the screen with wet
hands.
98
Certain information is displayed permanently in Select the audio source (depending on

In the "Settings" menu you can create
the upper band of the touch screen: version):
a profile for just one person or a group
- Reminder of the air conditioning - FM / DAB* / AM* stations.
of people with common points, with the
information, and direct access to the - Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and
possibility of entering a multitude of
corresponding menu. using Bluetooth* audio streaming.
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
- Reminder of the Radio Media and - CD player.
ambiences, ...); these settings are
Telephone menu information. - USB memory stick.
taken into account automatically.
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen - Media player connected to the auxiliary
and digital instrument panel. socket (Jack, cable not supplied).
In very hot conditions, the volume may

be limited to protect the system. It may
go into standby (screen and sound off)
for at least 5 minutes
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped.
* Depending on equipment.
.
99
Steering mounted controls - Type 1

Radio: Radio: Increase volume.
Select the previous / next preset Short press: display the list of radio
radio station. stations.
Select the previous / next item in a Long press: update the list.
menu or a list. Media: Decrease volume.
Media: Short press: display the list of folders.
Select of the previous / next track Long press: display the sorting
Select the previous / next item in a options.
menu or a list. Mute / Restore sound by
simultaneously pressing the increase
and decrease volume buttons.
Change audio source (Radio; USB;
AUX (if a device is connected); CD;
Streaming)
Confirm a selection.
100

Voice commands: Increase volume. Radio (rotate): previous / next preset.
Short press, smartphone voice Media (rotate): previous / next track,
commands via the system. move in a list.
Short press: confirm a selection;
Decrease volume.
other than selection, access to
presets.
Mute/ Restore the sound.

Or
Mute by pressing the volume
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
Restore the sound by pressing one of
the two volume buttons.
Media (short press): change the Radio: display the list of stations.
multimedia source. Media: display the list of tracks.
Telephone (short press): call. Radio (press and hold): update the
Call in progress (short press): list of stations received.
access to telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
incoming call, end call, access to
telephone menu.
.
101
Menus
According to version.
Air conditioning Applications Radio Media
18,5 21,5
Manage the different temperature and air flow Access configurable equipment. Select an audio source or radio station.
settings.
Navigation
Configure the guidance and select your

destination via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay .
102
Telephone Settings Driving
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth . Configure a personal profile and/or configure Activate, deactivate or configure certain vehicle
Operate certain applications on a smartphone the sound (balance, ambience, ...) and the functions.
connected via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay . display (language, units, date, time, ...).
.
103
Applications
According to version / according to equipment.
Level 1 Level 2
2 3 2 3
1 4 5
4 5
104
Select the fragrance.
OFF Deactivate the scented air freshener.
Applications Low
Scented air Medium Adjust the intensity of diffusion of the fragrance.

freshener
High
Confirm the selection and the settings.
2 State Activate/deactivate the temperature conditioning.
Applications 3 Settings Configure the pre-conditioning
Temperature Save the parameters.

conditioning
Confirm the settings.
4 Relax
Applications
5 Boost
equipment pre-sets and/or save it in a user profile.
i-Cockpit Amplify
Profile management
4 Relax
5
.
i-Cockpit Amplify Boost
equipment pre-sets and/or save it in a user profile.
Profile management
105
6 7 8
106
6 Instant
System providing information about the current

Applications 7 Trip 1
journey (range, consumption).
Trip computer
8 Trip 2
Go to the Applications page.
Photos Go to the photo gallery.

Applications
Photo gallery
Photos
Go back a level.
Search Start the search for a device to be connected.

Applications
Bluetooth connection
1 OPTIONS Delete Delete one or more devices.
.
107
4 5
4 5
9 10
11 12 13 14
108
Fragrance Select a fragrance.
Lighting Adjust the intensity of the ambience lighting.
Ambience Adjust the sound ambience.
Driver massage Select and configure the driver massage.
Applications Settings Passenger Massage Select and configure the passenger massage.
i-Cockpit Amplify Dynamic Set the driving mode.
4 Relax 9 Save settings Save the settings.

Boost
5
10 Reset the mode Reset the ambience parameters.
OR Confirm the selections and settings.
Deactivate Deactivate the "i-Cockpit Amplify function.

i-Cockpit Amplify
11 Profile 1 Configure the profiles.
4 Relax
Boost 12 Profile 2
5
Profile management 13 Profile 3
14 Common profile
.
Save the settings.
Confirm the selections and settings.
109
Viewing photos
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.
To protect the system, do not use a

USB hub.
The system can read folders and image files in

the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp; .png.
Press Applications to display the

primary page.
Press " Photos".
Select a folder.
Select an image to view.
Press this button to display the

details of the photo.
.
Press the back arrow to go back a
level.
111
Radio Media
Level 1 Level 2
1 2 3 4 5
112

Radio
Bluetooth
Radio Media CD
Select change of source.
AUX
1 SOURCES
USB
iPod
Radio Media
FM / DAB / AM Display the current radio station.
2 Frequency
Radio Media Update the list according to the stations received.
3 List Preset Make a short press to preset the station.
Radio Media
Select a preset station or preset a station.
4 Preset
AM band / DAB band / FM band Press the Band button to change waveband.
Audio settings Configure the audio settings.

Radio Media
News
5 OPTIONS TA
Activate or deactivate the options.
RDS
FM-DAB Follow-up
.
Radio Media
Enter a frequency of the FM and AM bands on the
virtual keypad.
87.5 MHz
113
1
2 3 4 5
114
2 Frequency Display the current radio station.
3 List Display the list of stations received.
Radio Media 4 Preset Select a preset station or preset a station.
1 SOURCES FM band / DAB band /

Press the band button to change band.
AM band
Radio Audio settings Configure the audio settings.
News
5 OPTIONS
TA
Activate or deactivate the options.
RDS
FM-DAB Follow-up
Radio Media
1 SOURCES 5 OPTIONS Audio settings Configure the audio settings.
Bluetooth
Radio Media Display the details of the music being played.
1 SOURCES
CD 5 OPTIONS Audio settings Configure the audio settings.
.
115
6 7 8 5
116

Radio Media
1 SOURCES 5 OPTIONS Audio settings Configure the audio settings.
AUX
6 Player Display the details of the music being played.
Radio Media
7 Tracks list Display the current selection.
1 SOURCES
8 Library Display the music library.
USB
5 OPTIONS Audio settings Configure the audio settings.
.
117
Radio
Selecting a station Radio reception may be affected by
Preset a station
Press Radio Media to display the the use of electrical equipment not Select a radio station or frequency.
menu. approved by the Brand, such as a USB
charger connected to the 12V socket. Make a short press on the star
The exterior environment (hills, outline. If the star is solid, the radio
Press one of the buttons for an buildings, tunnel, car park, below station is already preset.
automatic search for radio stations. ground...) may prevent reception,
Or
even in RDS station tracking mode.
Or This phenomenon is normal in the Select a radio station or frequency.
propagation of radio waves and is in no
Move the cursor for a manual search way indicative of a fault with the audio Press " Preset ".
for frequencies up or down. system.
4
Or
Make a long press on one of the
Press the frequency. Changing waveband buttons to preset the station.

primary page.
Enter the FM and AM waveband
values using the virtual keypad. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to

Press " Band" to change waveband.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
118
Activate/ Deactivate RDS Display text information Play TA messages

The "Radio Text" function allows The TA (Traffic Announcement)
primary page.
information transmitted by the radio function gives priority to TAalert
station and related to the station or the messages. To operate, this function
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to song playing to be displayed. needs good reception of a radio station
5 the secondary page. that carries this type of message. While
traffic information is being broadcast,
Press Radio Media to display the the current media is automatically
Activate/deactivate " RDS".
primary page. interrupted so that the TA message can
be heard. Normal play of the media
previously playing is resumed at the
Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
5
end of the message.
the secondary page.

Activate / Deactivate " News".
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue primary page.
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
5
However, in certain conditions, coverage Press in the grey zone to confirm.
the secondary page.
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as radio
Activate / Deactivate " TA".
stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of
reception of the station during a journey.
.
119
Audio settings
On the " Tone" tab, the Ambience audio The sound distribution (or spatialisation
primary page.
settings and Bass, Medium and Treble with the Arkamys system) is audio
are different and independent for each processing that allows the quality of the
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to audio source. sound to be adapted according to the
5 the secondary page. number of passengers in the vehicle.
On the " Balance" tab, the All

Press "Audio settings". passengers, Driver and Front only
settings are common to all sources.
Select the "Tone" or "Balance"

or " Sound" or "Ringtones" tab to On the " Sound" tab, activate or
On-board audio: Arkamys Sound
configure the audio settings. deactivate " Volume linked to speed",
Staging optimises the distribution of
"Auxiliary input " and " Touch tones".
sound in the passenger compartment.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
120
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting)

Terrestrial Digital Radio FM-DAB Follow-up
Digital radio provides higher quality "DAB" does not cover 100% of the If the "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated,
reception. territory. there is a difference of a few seconds
The different multiplexes offer a When the digital radio signal is poor, when the system switches to "FM"
choice of radio stations arranged in the "FM-DAB Follow-up" allows you to analogue radio with sometimes a
alphabetical order. continue listening to the same station, variation in volume.
by automatically switching to the Once the digital signal is restored, the
corresponding "FM" analogue station system automatically changes back to
(if there is one). "DAB".
Press Radio Media to display the Press Radio Media to display the
If the "DAB" station being listened
to is not available on "FM", or if the
"FM-DAB Follow-up" is not activated,
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the sound will cut out while the digital
5 the secondary page. signal is too weak.
Press " Band" to select " DAB band". Activate / Deactivate " FM-DAB
Follow-up".
Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press in the grey zone to confirm.
.
121
Media
USB port Auxiliary socket (AUX) Selecting the source
primary page.
Press the " SOURCES" button.
1
Choose the source.
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Bluetooth Streaming
connect the USB device to the USB port using has been checked in the audio settings.
a suitable cable (not supplied). Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your telephone.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player) to
To protect the system, do not use a The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
USB hub. adjust the volume on your portable device (to a
(not supplied).
high level).
The system builds playlists (in temporary First adjust the volume of your portable device
Then adjust the volume of your system.
memory), an operation which can take from (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
a few seconds to several minutes at the first audio system. If play does not start automatically, it may be
connection. Display and management of the controls are necessary to start the audio playback from the
Reduce the number of non-music files and the via the portable device. smartphone.
number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Control is from the portable device or by using
The playlists are updated every time the the system's touch buttons.
ignition is switched off or connection of a USB
memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they
are not modified, the subsequent loading time Once connected in Streaming mode,
will be shorter. the smartphone is considered to be a
media source.
122
Connecting Apple players Information and advice

Connect the Apple player to the USB port

The system supports USB Mass It is advisable to restrict file names to
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Storage devices, BlackBerry devices 20 characters, without using of special
Play starts automatically.
or Apple players via USB ports. The characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ) to avoid any playing
Control is via the audio system. adaptor cable is not supplied. and displaying problems.
Control of the peripheral device is with
the audio system controls.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32
Other peripherals, not recognised on
(file allocation table).
The classifications available are those connection, must be connected to the
of the portable device connected auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
(artists / albums / genres / playlists / supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, It is recommended that the original USB
audiobooks / podcasts), you can also depending on compatibility. cable for the portable device is used.
use a classification structured in the
form of a library.
The default classification used is by
To protect the system, do not use a In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
artist. To modify the classification used,
USB hub. CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
return to the first level of the menu
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
then select the desired classification
The audio equipment will only play audio If the disc is burned in another format, it may
(playlists for example) and confirm
files with ".wav, .wma, .aac, .ogg and .mp3" not be played correctly.
to go down through the menu to the
file extensions and with a bit rate of between It is recommended that the same burning
desired track.
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. standard is always used on an individual disc,
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played. for the best acoustic quality.
The version of software in the audio system ".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
.
may not be compatible with the generation of The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 Joliet standard is recommended.
your Apple player. and 48 KHz.
123
Telephone
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
124
Search Start the search for a device to be connected.

Telephone Bluetooth connection
Delete Delete one or more devices.
Bluetooth
search
MirrorLink Open the MirrorLink function.
1 PHONE
CarPlay Open the CarPlay function.
Telephone
Bluetooth
Enter a telephone number.
search
2 Keypad
All
Telephone
Outgoing View the calls according to the presentation
Bluetooth
selected.
search
Missed Select a contact to make the call.
3 Recent calls
Incoming
Telephone
Search Confirm Search for a contact in the contacts directory.
Bluetooth
.
search
Telephone Go to the details of the contact sheet.
4 Contacts
125
Level 1 Level 2
126
Telephone
5 Activate or deactivate the automatic placing on

OPTIONS ON - OFF
hold of the current conversation.
On hold (auto)
Telephone
OPTIONS
Sort the contacts by Surname-first name or First
5
name-surname.
Sort contacts by name
Sort contacts by first
name
Telephone
5 OPTIONS Adjust the volume of the ringtone.
Ring volume
.
127
MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection
128
When connecting a smartphone to

As a safety measure and because it As a safety measure, applications
the system, it is recommended that
requires the sustained attention of can only be viewed with the vehicle
"Bluetooth" be started on the smartphone
the driver, using a smartphone when stationary; display is interrupted once
driving is prohibited. the vehicle is moving. Telephone connected by Bluetooth
stationary. From the system, press " Telephone"
The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires
to display the primary page.
a compatible smartphone and
applications.
Press the " PHONE " button to display
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a Telephone not connected by 1 the secondary page.
smartphone that are adapted to the Bluetooth Press " MirrorLinkTM" to start the
MirrorLinkTM technology to be displayed Connect the USB cable. The application in the system.
in the vehicle's screen. smartphone charges when
The principles and standards connected by a USB cable.
are constantly evolving. For the Once connection is established, a page
communication process between From the system, press " Telephone" is displayed with the applications already
the smartphone and the system to to display the primary page. downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
work correctly, the smartphone must to the MirrorLinkTM technology.
be unlocked; update the operating Press " MirrorLinkTM" to start the
system of your smartphone as Access to the different audio sources remains
application in the system.
well as the date and time in the accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM
smartphone and the system. display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be Access to the menus for the system is possible
For the list of eligible smartphones,
necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" function. at any time using the dedicated buttons
connect to the Brand's internet website
in your country. During the procedure, several screen
pages relating to certain functions
.
are displayed. There may be a wait for the availability
Accept to start and end the of applications, depending on the
connection. quality of your network.
129
130
Go to or return to the applications already

downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to
the MirrorLinkTM technology.
Go to a menu list depending on the application

chosen.
Telephone
"Back": abandon the current operation, go up one
level.
MirrorLinkTM
"Home": go to or return to the "Car mode" page on
your smartphone.
Go to the primary page of the "Telephone" menu.
.
131
CarPlay smartphone connection
132
Connect the USB cable. The

As a safety measure and because it On connecting the USB cable, the
smartphone charges when
requires the sustained attention of CarPlay function deactivates the
connected by a USB cable.
the driver, using a smartphone when system's Bluetooth mode.
From the system, press Telephone
to display the CarPlay interface.
stationary.
You can go to the CarPlay
navigation at any time by pressing
The synchronisation of a smartphone the system's Navigation button.
Or
allows applications on a smartphone that
are adapted to the CarPlay technology If the smartphone is already
to be displayed in the vehicle's screen, connected by Bluetooth .
having first activated the CarPlay
function in the smartphone.
As the principles and standards are
constantly changing, it is recommended Connect the USB cable. The
that you keep your smartphone's smartphone charges when
operating system updated. connected by a USB cable.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go From the system, press Telephone
to the Brand's internet website in your to display the primary page.
country.
Press the " PHONE " button to go to
Press "CarPlay" to display the

CarPlay interface.
.
133

Procedure from the telephone Procedure from the system
requires sustained attention by the Select the name of the system in the Press Telephone to display the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile list of devices detected. primary page.
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-
free system of your audio system must
be done with the vehicle stationary Press " Bluetooth search".
and the ignition on. The list of telephones detected is
from the telephone.
displayed.

Select the name of the chosen
procedure used (from the telephone or
Activate the Bluetooth function on the from the system), ensure that the code
telephone and ensure that it is "visible is the same in the system and in the
to all" (telephone configuration). telephone.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth function in your telephone.
Depending on the type of telephone,

you may be asked to accept or not
the transfer of your contacts and
messages.
134
Automatic reconnection
To modify the connection profile:
On return to the vehicle, if the last The ability of the system to connect
telephone connected is present again, with just one profile depends on the
primary page. telephone.
it is automatically recognised and
within about 30 seconds of switching All three profiles may connect by
on the ignition, the connection is Press the " PHONE " button to go to default.
established without any action on your
part (Bluetooth activated).
Press " Bluetooth connection" to The services available depend on

display the list of paired devices. the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check in your telephone's
Press the "details" button of a paired
manual and with your service provider
device.
for the services available to you.
The system offers to connect the telephone

with 3 profiles:
- " Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only), The profiles compatible with the system
- " Streaming" (wireless playing of the audio are HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
files on the telephone), MAP and PAN.
- " Internet data".
.
Press "OK " to confirm. Go to the Brand's website for more information
(compatibility, additional help, ...).
135
Managing paired telephones Receiving a call Making a call

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
This function allows the connection or Using the telephone is not
superimposed display in the screen.
disconnection of a peripheral device as recommended while driving.
well as the deletion of a pairing. Make a short press on the steering Park the vehicle.
mounted PHONE button to accept an Make the call using the steering
incoming call. mounted controls.
primary page.
Press the " PHONE " button to go to And

Make a long press
Calling a new number
Press " Bluetooth connection" to primary page.
display the list of paired peripheral on the steering mounted PHONE
devices. button to reject the call. Enter the phone number using the
Press on the name of the telephone digital keypad.
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
Or
Press again to connect it.
Press " End call".
Deleting a telephone
Press the basket at the top right
of the screen to display a basket
alongside the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the
telephone chosen to delete it.
136
Calling a contact Calling a recently used number Setting the ringtone

primary page. Press Telephone to display the primary page.
primary page.
Or make a long press Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
5
Or
the secondary page.
Make a long press
on the steering mounted PHONE
button. Press " Ring volume" to display the
on the steering mounted button. volume bar.
Press "Contacts".
4 Press " Recent calls".

Press the arrows or move the cursor
to set the ring volume.
Select the desired contact from the list offered. 3

Press "Call".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call

directly from the telephone; as a safety
measure, first park the vehicle.
.
137
Settings
According to version / according to equipment
1 2 3 4
138
Settings
Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the
Ambience
screen and/or of the instrument panel.
Brightness
1 Profile 1
2 Profile 2
Select a profile.
3 Profile 3
Settings 4 Common profile
Profiles Profile name

Name:
modification
Configure the profiles.
Reset the profile Yes / No
Profile activated Activate/deactivate the profile selected.
Save the settings.
Settings
Function which switches off the lit display.
Pressing the screen reactivates it.
Dark
.
139
Level 1 Level 2
140
System configuration Configure certain system parameters.
Select an ambience for the screen integrated in

Ambience
the system.
Select the display language for the the screen

Language
Settings and/or the instrument panel.
Configuration Set the configuration of the screen and/or the

Screen configuration
instrument panel.
Configure the instrument panel for a personalised

Customization
display.
Set the date and time and select the display

Date and time
format.
.
141
5 6 7
8 9 10 11
142

Distance and fuel
consumption Configure the display units for the distance,
5 Units
consumption and temperature.
Temperatures
Settings
Configuration 6 Factory settings Reset Restore the original settings.
System Consult the version of the different modules

configuration 7 System info View
Save the parameters.
Settings Select an ambience for the screen integrated in

the system.
Configuration
Ambience
Confirm the selection and start the change of
ambience.
8 All
Settings 9 Europe
Select the display language for the screen and/or
the instrument panel.
Configuration 10 Asia
11
.
Language America
Save the parameter.
143
12 13
14 15
14 15
144
12 Brightness Select the display brightness level.
Settings
Automatic scrolling
Configuration 13 Animation Activate or deactivate the parameters.
Animated transitions
Screen
configuration
Save the parameters.
Settings Choose and select the display information

Customization
required.
Configuration
Confirm Confirm the selections.

Temperature conditioning
Time Set the time.
Time Zone Set the time zone.
AM
Select the display format.
Settings 14 Time
12h
Activate or deactivate the synchronisation with the
Configuration GPS Synchronisation
satellites.
Date and time Save the settings.
Date
.
Set the date and select the display format.
15 Date Setting the date
Save the settings.

145
Profile settings Adjust the brightness

Press this button to activate the
As a safety measure and because it Press Settings to display the primary
profile.
requires the sustained attention of the page.
driver, changes to settings must only be
done with the vehicle stationary. Press the back arrow again to
Press Brightness.
confirm.

page. Move the cursor to adjust the brightness
of the screen and/or of the instrument
Press this button to initialise the
panel (according to version).
Press " Profiles". profile selected.
Select " Profile 1" or " Profile 2 " or
1 " Profile 3" or "Common profile".
Press this button to enter a name for

the profile using the virtual keypad
Press "OK " to save.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
146
Modifying system settings Select the language

Press Settings to display the primary Press Settings to display the primary Press Settings to display the primary
page. page. page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the

Press "Configuration" to go to the Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
secondary page. secondary page.
Press " Screen configuration".

Press " System configuration". Select " Language" to change the
language.
Press " Brightness".
Press " Units" to change the units 12 Press the back arrow to confirm.
5 for distance, fuel consumption and

temperature. Move the cursor to set the brightness
of the screen and/or instrument panel
Press " Factory settings" to return to
6
(according to version).
the initial settings.
Press "Animation".
Returning the system to factory settings

13
activates the English language by Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
default (according to version). scrolling".
Press " System info" to display the Select "Animated transitions".

7 versions of the different modules
.
Press the back arrow to confirm. Press the back arrow to confirm.
147
Setting the time Setting the date

Press Settings to display the primary Press the back arrow to save the Press Settings to display the primary
page. settings. page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the

The system does not automatically Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
manage the change between winter secondary page.
and summer time (depending on the
Press " Date and time".
country of sale).
Press " Date and time".
Select " Time".
14 Select " Date".
Press this button to adjust the time 15

using the virtual keypad.
Press this button to define the date.
Press "OK " to save the time.
Press the back arrow to save the

Press this button to define the time date.
zone.
Select the display format of the date.

Select the display format for the Adjustment of the time and date is only
time (12h / 24h). available if "GPS Synchronisation:" is
deactivated.
The change between winter and
Activate or deactivate Press the back arrow again to
summer time is done by changing the
synchronisation with satellites (UTC). confirm.
time zone.
148

The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
Radio
The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area upper band to enable the system to check
to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
or the stored stations do the geographical area.
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
block reception, including in RDS mode. a fault with the audio system.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the
stations in the list of "Radio" page.
stations received.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name

(the title of the song for example).
The name of the radio
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
station changes.
.
149
Media
Playback of my USB Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
memory stick starts only access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
after a very long wait catalogue time). structure on the memory stick.
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some characters in the The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
media information are not folders.
displayed correctly while
playing.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
does not start.
The names of tracks and The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
150
Telephone
I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is
Bluetooth telephone. telephone may not be visible. switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible
to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone
at the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
telephone connected maximum if required, and increase the volume of
in Bluetooth mode is the telephone if necessary.
inaudible.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
communication. windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down, ...).
Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings Modify the display setting in the telephone
alphabetical order. chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. directory.
.
151
Settings
In changing the setting The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the settings for treble Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings to
of treble and bass the and bass and vice-versa. obtain the desired musical ambience.
equalizer setting is
deselected.
In changing the equalizer

setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings Modify the balance or distribution settings to
balance settings, the and vice-versa. obtain the desired musical ambience.
distribution setting is
deselected.
When changing a
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings can be adapted to Check that the audio settings are adapted to the
sound quality between the the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences sources listened to. Adjust the audio functions to
different audio sources. when changing source. the middle position.
With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
system switches off after a depends on the state of charge of the battery. charge.
few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
152
Bluetooth audio system
Contents
First steps 154
Menus 157
Radio 158
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 160
Media 162
Telephone 167
The different functions and adjustments

As a safety measure and because it Your audio system is coded in such

requires the sustained attention of the a way that it will only operate in your
driver, the pairing of your Bluetooth vehicle.
telephone to the Bluetooth hands-free All work on the system must be
audio system must only be carried out carried out exclusively by a dealer or
with the vehicle stationary and the qualified workshop, to avoid any risk of
.
ignition on. electrocution, fire or mechanical faults. To avoid discharging the battery, the
audio system may switch off after a few
minutes if the engine is not running.
153
First steps
Press: On / Off Select the screen display mode, Radio:
Rotate: adjust volume. between: Manual step by step search up /
Date; Audio functions; Trip computer; down for radio stations.
Telephone. Select previous / next MP3 track.
Short press: change audio source Media:
(Radio; USB; AUX (if a device is Confirm or display contextual menu. Select previous / next folder / genre /
connected); CD; Streaming). artist / playlist on the USB device.
Long press: display the Telephone Scroll in a list.
menu (if a telephone is connected).
Buttons 1 to 6.
Short press: select the preset radio
station. Abandon the current operation.
Adjust audio settings: Long press: preset a station. Go up one level (menu or folder).
Front/rear fader; left/right balance;
bass/treble; loudness; audio
ambience.
Activation / Deactivation of automatic Radio: Access to main menu.
volume adjustment (linked to the Automatic step by step search up /
speed of the vehicle). down for radio stations.
Media:
Radio: Select previous / next CD, USB,
Short press: display the list of radio streaming track.
Scroll in a list. Activate / Deactivate TA (traffic
stations. announcements)
Long press: update the list. Long press: select type of announcement.
Media:
Short press: display the list of folders.
Long press: display the sorting
Select waveband: FM / DAB / AM.
options.
154

Radio: Other than telephone calls: Increase volume.
Select the previous / next preset Short press: change audio source
radio station. (Radio; USB; AUX (if a device is
Select the previous / next item in a connected); CD; Streaming), confirm
menu or a list. if the " Telephone" menu is open. Decrease volume.
Media: Long press: open the " Telephone"
Select of the previous / next track. menu.
Select the previous / next item in a In the event of a telephone call:
menu or a list. Short press: accept the call. Mute / Restore sound by
Long press: reject the call. simultaneously pressing the increase
During a telephone call: and decrease volume buttons.
Short press: open the contextual
Radio: telephone menu.
Short press: display the list of radio Long press: end the call.
stations.
Long press: update the list.
Media:
Short press: display the list of folders.
Long press: display the sorting Confirm a selection.
options.
.
155

Access to the main menu. Other than telephone call: Radio:
Short press: change audio source Short press: display the list of radio
(Radio; USB; AUX (if a device is stations.
connected); CD; Streaming), confirm Long press: update the list.
Increase volume.
if the " Telephone" menu is open. Media:
Long press: open the " Telephone" Short press: display the list of folders.
menu. Long press: display the sorting
Mute / Restore sound. In the event of a telephone call: options.
Short press: accept the call.
Long press: reject the call.
During a telephone call:
Decrease volume. Radio:
Short press: open the contextual
Select the previous / next preset
telephone menu.
radio station.
Long press: end the call.
Select the previous / next item in a
menu or a list.
Media:
Select the previous / next track.
Start voice recognition of your Select the previous / next item in a
smartphone via the system. menu or a list.
Press the thumbwheel: confirm.
156
Menus
Depending on version.
"Multimedia": Media settings, Radio Press the " MENU " button.
settings.
" Telephone": Call, Directory Move from one menu to another.

management, Telephone
management, End call.
" Trip computer ". Enter a menu.
" Maintenance": Diagnosis, Warning

log, ... .
"Connections": Manage
connections, search for devices.
" Personalisation-configuration":
Define the vehicle settings, Choice
of language, Display configuration,
Choice of units, Date and time
adjustment.
.
157
Radio
Selecting a station RDS
Press the SOURCE button
The external environment (hills,
Short procedure
repeatedly and select the radio.
buildings, tunnels, basement car In " Radio" mode, press the OK button to
parks, ...) may block reception, activate or deactivate RDS directly.
including in RDS mode. This is a
Press this button to select a normal effect of the way in which radio
waveband (FM / AM / DAB). waves are transmitted and does not Long procedure
indicate any failure of the audio system.
Press the " MENU " button.
Press one of the buttons to carry

out an automatic search for radio
If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol Select "Audio functions".
stations.
appears barred in the screen.
Press OK.
Press one of the buttons to carry out
a manual search up / down for radio
frequencies.
RDS, if activated, enables you to continue Select the " FM waveband
listening to the same station by automatic preferences" function.
Press this button to display the list of retuning to alternative frequencies.
stations received locally. However, in certain conditions, coverage
Press OK.
To update this list, press for more of an RDS station may not be assured
than two seconds. The sound is cut throughout the country as radio stations
while updating. do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
Select " RDS".
explains the loss of reception of a station
that can occur during a journey.
Press OK, RDS is displayed in the

screen.
158
Receiving TA messages Receiving INFO messages Display RADIO TEXT

The TA (Traffic Announcement) The INFO function gives priority to TA Radio text is information transmitted by
function gives priority to TA alert traffic announcements. To be active, the radio station related to the current
messages. To operate, this function this function needs good reception programme or song.
needs good reception of a radio station of a radio station that transmits this
transmitting this type of message. type of message. When a message is
When a traffic report is transmitted, the transmitted, the current audio source
current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted With the radio displayed on the
is interrupted automatically to play the automatically to receive the INFO screen, press OK to display the
TA message. Normal playback of the message. Normal play resumes at the contextual menu.
audio source resumes at the end of the end of the message transmission.
transmission of the message. Select " RadioText (TXT) display"
and confirm OK to save.
Take care when increasing the volume

while listening to TA messages. The Make a long press on this button to
volume may prove too high on return to display the list of categories.
the original audio source.
Select or deselect categories.
Press the TA button to activate or

deactivate traffic messages.
Activate or deactivate the reception of

the corresponding messages.
.
159
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio

Terrestrial digital radio
Display the name of the multiplex
4
If the current "DAB" radio station is not Digital radio provides a superior audio
service being used.
available on "FM", "DAB FM" is struck quality and also additional categories of
out. traffic announcements (TA INFO).
Display RadioText (TXT) for the The different "multiplex services"
1 2 5 current radio station. offer a choice of radio stations in

alphabetical order.
Represents the signal strength for
6 the band being listened to.
Change of band (FM1, FM2, DAB, ...)

When changing region, an update
6 5 4 3 of the list of preset radio stations is
advisable.
Change of station within the same
Display options:
1
"multiplex service".
if active but not available, the display
will be struck out.
Starting of a search for the previous /
Display the name of the current radio next "multiplex service".
2 station.
Long press: select the desired

categories of announcements from
Preset radio station, buttons 1 to 6.
3
Transport, News, Entertainment and
Short press: select the preset radio
Flash special (availability according
station.
Display the list of all radio stations to the station).
Long press: preset a radio station.
and "multiplexes".
160
DAB / FM tracking
When the radio station is displayed in
the screen, press on "OK " to display "DAB" does not have 100% coverage of If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is activated,
the contextual menu. the country. there will be a difference of a few
(Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM When the digital signal is weak, seconds in the programme when the
auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to system changes to analogue "FM" radio,
Information on the station, ...) continue listening to the same station, with sometimes a variation in volume.
by automatically switching to the
corresponding analogue "FM" station
(if there is one).
When "DAB / FM auto tracking" is
active, the DAB station will be selected
If the "DAB" station you are listening
automatically.
to is not available on "FM" (" DAB/FM "
option barred), or if "DAB / FM auto
tracking" is not on, the sound will be cut
when the digital signal is too weak.
Press the " MENU " button.
Select " Multimedia" and confirm.
Select " DAB / FM auto tracking"

and confirm.
.
161
Media
USB port
This unit consists of a USB port and an Play mode
auxiliary Jack socket, depending on version.
The play modes available are:
- Normal: the tracks are played in order,
To protect the system, do not use a depending on the classification of the
USB hub. selected files.
- Random: the tracks in an album or folder
are played in a random order.
Any additional equipment connected - Random on all media: all of the tracks
to the system must conform to Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port saved in the media are played in random
the standard of the product or or connect a USB peripheral device to the USB order.
standard IEC 60950-1. port using a suitable cable (not supplied). - Repeat: the tracks played are only those
The system changes automatically to "USB" from the current album or folder.
source.
The system creates playlists (temporary
memory), which can take from a few seconds
to several minutes on the first connection. While connected by USB, the portable
Reducing the number of non-music files and device may be charged automatically.
the number of folders reduces this waiting Press this button to display the
time. Playlists are updated every time a new contextual menu for the Media
USB memory stick is connected. function.
Press this button to select the play
mode.
Press this button to confirm.
The choice made is displayed at the top of the

screen.
162
Choosing a track to play File classication Playing les

Press one of these buttons to go to Make a long press on this button to Make a long press on this button to
the previous / next track. display the different classifications. display the chosen classification.
Press one of these buttons to go to Choose by " Folder " / "Artist " / Navigate in the list using the left /
the previous / next folder. "Genre" / " Playlist "*. right and up / down buttons.
Press OK to select the desired

Confirm the selection by pressing
classification, then press OK again
OK.
to confirm.
Press one of these buttons to go to

the previous / next track in the list.
Press and hold one of these buttons
for fast forward or fast back.
Press one of these buttons to go

to the next " Folder " / "Artist " /
"Genre" / " Playlist "* in the list.
* Depending on availability and the type of

device used.
.
163
Jack auxiliary (AUX) socket CD player Playing an MP3 compilation

Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs
or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may Insert an MP3 CD compilation in the player.
cause faults which are no reflection on the The audio equipment searches for all of the
quality of the vehicle's player. music tracks, which may take anything between
Insert a CD in the player, play begins a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
automatically. before play begins.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, ) to

the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied). External CD players connected via the On a single disc, the CD player can
USB port are not recognised by the read up to 255 MP3 files spread
Any additional equipment connected system. over 8 folder levels.
to the system must conform to the However, it is advisable to keep to a
standard of the product or standard IEC To play a disc which has already limit of two levels to reduce the access
60950-1. been inserted, press the SOURCE time before the CD is played.
button several times in succession While the CD is being played, the folder
Press the SOURCE button several and select CD. structure is not followed.
times in succession and select All of the files are displayed on a single
"AUX ". Press one of the buttons to select a level.
track on the CD.
First adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume on
your audio system. Operation of controls is via Press the LIST button to display the
the portable device. list of tracks on the CD.
Do not connect a device to both the

Jack auxiliary socket and the USB port Press and hold one of the buttons for
at the same time. fast forward or fast back.
164
Bluetooth audio streaming Connecting Apple players

Streaming allows music files on the telephone Connect the Apple player to the USB port
to be played via the audio system. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
To play a disc which has already Play starts automatically.
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession Connect the telephone. Control is via the audio system.
and select CD. (Refer to the " Pairing a telephone" section).
Press one of the buttons to select a The classifications available are those of the
folder on the CD. Activate the streaming source by portable device connected (artists / albums /
pressing the SOURCE * button. genres / playlists).
Press one of the buttons to select a The version of software in the audio system
Audio files can be selected using the buttons
track on the CD. may not be compatible with the generation of
on the audio system control panel and the
your Apple player.
steering mounted controls**. Contextual
information may be displayed in the screen.
Press the LIST button to display
the list of directories of the MP3
compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for

fast forward or backward play.
* In certain cases, play of the audio files must

be initiated from the keypad.
.
** If the telephone supports the function. The
audio quality depends on the quality of
transmission by the telephone.
165
Information and advice

The CD player can play files with .mp3, .wma, In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or
.wav and .aac file extensions, with a bit rate of CDRW, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file
of 32 to 320 Kbps. format is recommended when recording.
It also supports TAG mode (ID3 tag, WMA If the disc is recorded in another format, it may
TAG). not be played correctly.
Other file types (mp4, ...) may be played. It is recommended that the same recording
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma9 format is always used for an individual disc,
standard. with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 for optimum sound quality.
and 48 KHz. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet format is recommended.
Via the USB port, the system can play audio

files with the extension ".mp3, .wma, .wav, .cbr,
.vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
No other file types (.mp4, ...) can be played.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to
the wma9 standard.
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44
and 48 KHz. Use only USB memory sticks formatted
FAT32 (File Allocation Table).
File names should have less than 20 characters, It is recommended that you use
avoiding special characters (e.g.: " ? ; ) so as to genuine Apple USB cables for correct
avoid any reading or display problems. operation.
166
Telephone
Procedure from the telephone Completing the pairing
requires the sustained attention of the Select the name of the system in the
driver, the pairing of your a Bluetooth list of devices detected.
procedure is used (from the telephone
telephone to the Bluetooth hands-free
or from the system), check that the
audio system must only be carried out
code displayed in the system and the
with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on
Procedure from the system telephone is the same and confirm.
Press the MENU button. If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not
restricted.
A message appears in the screen confirming
Select the "Connections" menu. the pairing.
Information and advice

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
Confirm with OK.
function and ensure that it is "visible to The " Telephone" menu gives access to the
all" (telephone configuration). following functions in particular: " Directory"*,
Select " Search for a Bluetooth "Calls list ", " View paired devices".
device". Depending on the type of telephone, you may
be asked to accept or confirm access by the
system to each of these functions.
Confirm with OK.

the network, the SIM card and the
Go to the Brand's website for more
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone A window is displayed with a search in progress information (compatibility, more
used. message. help, ...).
Refer to the instructions for your
.
telephone and to your service provider In the list of devices detected, select a
for the services available to you. telephone to pair. Only one telephone can be
paired at a time.
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
167
Managing connections
Indicates that a device is connected. Then select and confirm:
The telephone connection
- "Connect telephone" /
automatically includes hands-free
" Disconnect telephone":
operation and audio streaming.
to connect / disconnect the
The ability of the system to connect
A number indicates the profile of the telephone or the hands-free kit
to just one profile depends on the
connection with the system: only.
telephone. Both profiles may connect
- 1 for media or 1 for telephone. - "Connect media player " /
by default.
- 2 for media and telephone. " Disconnect media player ":
to connect / disconnect
streaming only.
Press the MENU button. Indicates the audio streaming profile. - "Connect telephone +
media player " / " Disconnect
telephone + media player ":
to connect / disconnect the
Select "Connections". telephone (hands-free kit and
Indicates the hands-free telephone
streaming).
profile.
- " Delete connection": to delete
the pairing.
Confirm with OK.
Select a telephone.
When you delete a pairing in the
system, remember to delete it from your
Select "Connections management "
telephone as well.
and confirm. The list of paired
devices is displayed. Confirm with OK.
Confirm with OK. Confirm with OK.
168
Receiving a call Making a call Ending a call

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a In the " Telephone" menu. In the " Telephone" menu.
superimposed display in the screen.
Select "Call". Select " End call".
Select the " YES" tab in the screen Select " Dial". Confirm with OK to end the call.
using the buttons.
Or
Select " Directory". During a call, press one of the

Confirm with OK.
buttons for more than 2 seconds.
Or
Select "Calls list ".

Press this button at the steering
mounted controls to accept the call. Confirm with OK.
The system accesses the telephone's
contacts directory, depending on its
compatibility, and while it is connected
by Bluetooth
Press this button for more than two
seconds for access to your directory,
then navigate using the thumb wheel. With certain telephones connected by
Bluetooth, you can send a contact to
the directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone
connected.
.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty.
169
Managing calls
During a call, press OK to display the Telephone mode Interactive voice response
contextual menu.
In the contextual menu: From the contextual menu, select
- select " Telephone mode" to " DTMF tones" and confirm to use
transfer the call to the telephone the digital keypad to navigate in the
Hang up (for example, to leave the vehicle interactive voice response menu.
while continuing a conversation).
In the contextual menu, select " End - deselect " Telephone mode" to
call" to end the call. transfer the call to the vehicle. Confirm with OK.
Confirm with OK.
Confirm with OK. Dual call

From the contextual menu, select
" Switch" and confirm to return to a
Microphone off call left on hold.
If the contact has been cut off, when you
(so that the caller cannot hear) reconnect on returning to the vehicle,
the Bluetooth connection will be restored Confirm with OK.
In the contextual menu:
automatically and sound returned to the
- select " Micro OFF " to switch off
system (depending on the compatibility of the
the microphone.
telephone).
- deselect " Micro OFF " to switch
In some cases telephone mode must be
the microphone on.
activated from the telephone.
Confirm with OK.
170
Directory Voice recognition

The system accesses the telephone's Select " Directory" to see the list of This function allows you to use your
contacts directory, depending on contacts. smartphone's voice recognition via the system.
its compatibility, and while it is
connected by Bluetooth. Confirm with OK.
To start voice recognition, depending on the
type of steering mounted controls:
With certain telephones connected
by Bluetooth you can send a contact
to the directory of the audio system. Make a long press on the end of the lighting
Contacts imported in this way are To modify the contacts saved in the control stalk.
saved in a permanent directory system, press MENU then select
visible to all, whatever the telephone " Telephone" and confirm. OR
connected. Select " Directory management "
The menu for the directory is not and confirm. Press this button.
accessible if it is empty. You can:
- "Consult an entry",
- " Delete an entry",
- " Delete all entries".
Make a long press on SRC/TEL . Voice recognition requires the use of a
compatible smartphone first connected
to the vehicle by Bluetooth.
.
171

The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system.

With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
audio system switches off depends on the state of charge of the battery. charge.
after a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy
mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's
battery.
The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
system is overheated" is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal allow the system to cool.
appears on the display. protection mode leading to a reduction in volume or CD play
stopping.
Radio
There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between the Treble, Ambience and Loudness) can be adapted to the different Treble, Ambience and Loudness) are adapted to
different audio sources sound sources, which may result in audible differences when the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
(radio, CD...). changing source (radio, CD...). audio functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance
and Left-Right Balance) to the middle position,
select the musical ambience "None" and set the
loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD
mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
172

The preset stations do An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND button to return to the waveband
not function (no sound, (FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the stations are
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). preset.
The traffic announcement The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
(TA) is displayed. I do network. information.
not receive any traffic
information.
The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the RDS function to enable the system
the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area to check whether there is a more powerful
to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound, The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, underground car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). block reception, including in RDS mode. a fault in the audio system.
through an automatic car wash or into an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for another Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. frequency giving better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.
.
173
Media
The Bluetooth connection The state of charge of the device may be too low. Charge the battery of the portable device.
is broken.
The message "USB device The USB memory stick is not recognised. Reformat the USB memory stick.
error" is displayed in the The USB memory stick may be corrupt.
screen.
The CD is ejected every The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does not contain audio - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
time or is not played. files or contains audio files of a format not recognised by the audio right way up.
system. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system not recognised by be played if it is too damaged.
the audio system. - Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The sound from the CD is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert a good quality CD and store them in
poor. suitable conditions.
The audio settings (base, treble, ambience) are unsuitable. Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
selecting an ambience.
I am unable to play Depending on the smartphone, access by the audio system to music Manual activate the MTP profile on the
the music files on my on the smartphone may have to be approved on the latter. smartphone (USB settings menu).
smartphone via the USB
port.
174
Telephone
I am unable to access my Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function. Call your voicemail box, via the telephone menu,
voicemail. using the number supplied by your service
provider.
I am unable to access my Check the compatibility of your telephone.

directory of contacts.
You did not give access to your contacts when pairing the telephone. Accept or confirm access by the system to the
contacts on your telephone.
I am unable to continue a Telephone mode is activated. Deselect telephone mode to transfer the call to
conversation when getting the vehicle.
into my vehicle.
I am unable to pair my Telephones (models, versions of operating systems) have their own Before starting the pairing procedure, delete the
telephone by Bluetooth. specific aspects in the pairing procedure and some telephones are pairing of the telephone from the system and of
not compatible. the system from the telephone, so as to see the
compatibility of the telephones.
.
175
ADDENDUM TO USER GUIDE
PEUGEOT 3008
On-line user guide
Select one of the following means of access to view your user guide Scan this QR code to access your user guide directly.
online...
Find your user guide on the Peugeot website, under "MyPeugeot".
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for the care
and maintenance of your vehicle.
Visiting the user guide online also gives you access to the latest If the "MyPeugeot" section is not available on the Peugeot website
information available, easily identified by the bookmark, associated with for your country, you can find your user guide at the following
this symbol: address:
Select:
- the language,
- the vehicle, its body style,
- the publication period of your user guide corresponding to the date
your vehicle went into circulation.
Access
Hands-free tailgate
2
General points
Activation and deactivation of the motorised
tailgate function is done in the vehicle settings To avoid the risk of injury through pinching
menu. or trapping, before and during operation of
Movement requests of the tailgate should only the motorised tailgate:
be carried out with the vehicle stationary. - ensure that there is no person close to
the rear of the vehicle,
- watch the activity of your passengers,
particularly any children.
Do not insert your finger in the motorised Bicycle carrier / Towbar

tailgate locking system - risk of serious
The motorised tailgate is not designed to
injury!
support a bicycle carrier.
When installing a bicycle carrier on a towbar
with connection of a cable to the towbar socket,
Check that there is enough space to Safety anti-pinch
the motorised operation of the tailgate will be
allow for the movement of the motorised The motorised tailgate has an obstacle automatically deactivated.
tailgate. detection system that automatically interrupts If using a towbar or bicycle carrier not
and reverses its movement by a few degrees to recommended by PEUGEOT, it is essential
allow the obstacle to be cleared. to deactivate the motorised operation of the
Please note that this anti-pinch system is not tailgate.
active at the end of the closing travel (around
1cm from completely closed).
1
Access
Motorised operation
Activation / deactivation of the Opening / Closing
motorised operation of the tailgate
F Press and hold the central button A of the
is done in the Driving menu of the
electronic key.
touch screen.
or
This function is deactivated by default. F Press the exterior control B of the tailgate
with the electronic key on your person.
or
F Press the interior tailgate control C (closing
only).
or
F Press control D on the dashboard twice
repeatedly.
or
F With the electronic key on you, use the
"hands-free" access E by performing a
"kicking" movement below the rear bumper.
The command is confirmed by an audible
There are several ways of operating the signal.
motorised tailgate:
A. using the electronic key of the Keyless
Entry and Starting system,
B. using the exterior control on the tailgate,
C. using the interior tailgate control,
D. using the control on the dashboard,
E. using the "hands-free access" procedure
below the rear bumper.
2
Access
The tailgate opens, either completely

Hands-Free Access Automatic locking using "Hands-
2
by default, or to the position memorised Activation and deactivation of the Free Tailgate Access" function
beforehand. "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
If motorised operation is not activated, system is done in the Driving menu
these actions release the tailgate. of the touch screen.
The request to open the tailgate with one This function is deactivated by default.
of the controls A, B or E enables you to
unlock the vehicle or the tailgate alone
beforehand, if selective unlocking of the
boot is activated. Ensure that you are steady on your
Closing the tailgate with the "hands-free" feet before performing the quick foot
access function enables you to lock the movement.
vehicle. Take care not to touch the exhaust system
which may be hot - Risk of burns!
To activate automatic locking of the vehicle
when closing the tailgate using the Hands-Free
Tailgate Access function:
At any point, It is possible to interrupt the
operation of the tailgate. F Press this button. The indicator
Pressing one of these controls again lamp will light up.
interrupts the movement in progress. Pressing this button again
Following the interruption of a movement, deactivates the function. The
pressing one of these controls again indicator lamp turns off.
resumes the movement.
3
Access
Memorising an opening Manual operation Reinitialising the motorised

position The tailgate can be manoeuvred by hand, even tailgate
To limit the motorised tailgate opening angle: with motorised operation activated. This operation is necessary where there is
F open the tailgate to the desired position, The tailgate must be immobile. no movement - after detection of an obstacle,
F press button C or the exterior control B for When opening and closing a motorised tailgate connecting or recharging the battery, etc.
more than 3 seconds. manually, there is no assistance from gas F Open the tailgate manually, if necessary.
Memorisation of the maximum opening position struts. Resistance to opening and closing is F Fully close the tailgate manually.
of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal. therefore entirely normal. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT
Repeatedly opening and closing of the

motorised tailgate can cause overheating
To cancel the memorised position: of its electric motor, after which opening
F stop the tailgate in an intermediate and closing will not be possible.
position, Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric
F press button C or the exterior control B for motor to cool down before operating the
more than 3 seconds. tailgate again.
Cancellation of the memorised position is If you are unable to wait, operate it
confirmed by an audible signal. manually.
4
Access
2
Precautions in use Recommendations related to the "Hands-Free Tailgate
In wintry conditions
Access" function
In the event of an accumulation of snow If several kicking movements to operate the In some circumstances, the tailgate may open
on the tailgate, clear the snow before tailgate have no effect, wait a few seconds or close by itself, particularly if:
commanding a motorised opening of the before trying again. - you hitch or unhitch a trailer,
tailgate. - you fit or remove a bicycle carrier,
The formation of ice can block the tailgate The function automatically deactivates in heavy - you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle
and prevent its opening: wait until the ice rain or following a build-up of snow. carrier,
melts with the heating of the passenger - you place or lift something behind the
If it does not work, check that the electronic key
compartment. vehicle,
is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic
- an animal approaches the rear bumper,
pollution (smartphone etc.).
- you are washing your vehicle,
- your vehicle is being serviced,
The function may not work correctly with a
When washing - you are accessing the spare wheel
prosthetic leg.
When washing the vehicle in an automatic (depending on version).
car wash, don't forget to lock your vehicle The function may not work correctly if your To avoid such operating problems, keep the
to avoid the risk of unexpected opening. vehicle is fitted with a towbar. electronic key away from the sensor zone or
deactivate the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
function.
5
Programmable heating
The programmable heating operates independently from the engine.
With the engine off, it preheats the coolant circuit to ensure optimal engine operating temperature
Presentation
as soon as it is started up. Remote control
The programmable heating is switched on by the long range remote control. It may be immediate or
deferred thanks to a programming function.
Always switch off the programmable heating when refuelling to avoid any risk of fire or
explosion.
The programmable heating is powered by the vehicle fuel tank. Before use, ensure that
the remaining quantity of fuel is sufficient. If the fuel tank is in its reserve, we strongly
recommend you do not programme the heating. The heating programming remote control has
To avoid the risks of intoxication or asphyxia, the programmable heating must not be used, the following buttons and displays:
even for short periods, in a closed environment such as a garage or workshop which are not
equipped with an exhaust gas extraction system.
1. Buttons for functions scroll-down menu.
Do not park the vehicle on a flammable surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper, etc.) - risk of
fire! 2. Function symbols:
clock, temperature, operating time,
programmed time, heater operation,
The volumetric alarm movement detector Adapting the programmable heating heating management.
may be disrupted by the programmable enables you to use it to preheat the
heating air flows when it is operating. passenger compartment of your vehicle. 3. Digital displays:
To avoid any untimely triggering of the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified time, temperature, operating time,
alarm when using the programmable workshop. programmed time or heating level.
heating, it is advisable that the volumetric
monitoring is deactivated. 4. Off button.
5. On button.
6
Operating indicator light Function display Setting the time

lit up: deferred programmed start-up.
flashing: heating on.
3
turned off: heating off.
F Press button 1 several times to display the F After having displayed the time, using
functions. button 1, press on buttons 4 and 5
The first press on the left or right button simultaneously within 10 seconds.
displays the time.
Then, the left button is used to scroll to the
programmed time then the heating level ("C1" This symbol will flash.
to "C5").
The right button is used to scroll to the
passenger compartment temperature then F Set the time with button 1.
the heater operating time when immediately F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to
switched on. save it.
The passenger compartment temperature This symbol will be displayed.

information is only available when the
engine is off.
7
Immediate switching on Adjusting the operating time

This symbol and the indicator light
will turn off.
During these operations, if the message

"FAIL" appears, it means that the signal
has not been received. Follow the
procedure again after having changed
position.
F Press on button 5 until the message "OK" F Press on button 1 to display the operating
appears. time.
When the signal has been received, the This symbol will be displayed.
message "OK" is displayed along with the
operating time.
The heater starts and this symbol is F After having displayed the operating time,
displayed. press on buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously
within 10 seconds.
This indicator light flashes during
heating. This symbol will flash.
F To deactivate the function, press on button

4 until the message "OK" appears. F Adjust the time by pressing on the buttons
1: by 10 min increment and maximum value
of 30 mins.
8
Deferred switching on
You must programme your start time for the Programming the start time
F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to system to automatically calculate the optimal
3
save the operating time. time to start the heater.
F Press on button 1 to display the
programming time.
This symbol will be displayed. This symbol will be displayed.
F After having displayed the programming

The factory value setting is 30 minutes. time, press on buttons 4 and 5
simultaneously within 10 seconds.
This symbol will flash.
F Set the time by pressing on button 1.

F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to
save it.
This symbol will be displayed.
9
Activation / Deactivation Stopping the heating Changing the heating level

The system has 5 heating levels: C1 (lowest
F After having displayed the programming F Press button 5.
time using button 1, press on button 5 until level) to C5 (highest level).
the message "OK" appears. This symbol will remain displayed. F After having displayed the heating level
using button 1, press simultaneously on
buttons 4 and 5.
When the signal has been received,
The letter "C" will flash.
the message "OK" is displayed along This indicator light turns off.
F Adjust the heating level by pressing on
with this symbol.
button 1.
This indicator lights up until the F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to
heater starts. save the selected level.
The letter "C" will be displayed.
This symbol is displayed when the
heater starts.
HTM: Heat Thermo Management The presets are replaced by the new
entries. The programmed times are
memorised until the next change.
F To deactivate the programming, press on When the start time is activated, it is not
button 4 until the message "OK" appears. possible to change the heating level. You
must first deactivate the start time.
This symbol will disappear.
During these operations, if the message

"FAIL" appears, it means that the signal
has not been received. Follow the
procedure again after having changed
position.
10
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the programmable Changing the battery Resetting the remote control
3
heating, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop. The remote control is powered by a 6V-28L If the battery is disconnected or when changing
battery which is provided. the battery, the remote control must be reset.
Information on the screen indicates when this F After turning on the power, within the next
battery needs to be changed. 5seconds, press button 4 for 1 second.
If the operation is successful, the message
"OK" will be displayed on the remote
control's screen.
If there is a fault, the message "FAIL" will
appear.
F Start the operation again.
F Unclip the case.

F Replace the battery observing the
polarities.
F Reset the remote control.
Do not throw away used batteries, take

them to an approved collection point.
11
Wiper control stalk

Windscreen wash
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do
not operate the windscreen washer if the
windscreen washer reservoir is empty.
Only operate the windscreen washer if
there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the
windscreen and hindering visibility. Always
use windscreen washer fluid suitable for
low temperatures during the winter period.
F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you.

The windscreen wash and then the wiper will
operate for a fixed period.
The windscreen wash includes a wiper

blade system with integral washer jets.
The screenwash fluid is sprayed from
along the length of the wiper blade.
This improves visibility and reduces the
consumption of screenwash fluid.
In some cases, depending on the
composition or the colour of the liquid and
the outside lighting, the liquid spray may
be hardly perceptible.
12
Safety
Trailer stability assist

When towing, this system reduces the risk of the vehicle or trailer swaying.
Operation Operating fault

The system is activated automatically when the Should a fault occur with the system,
The trailer stability assist system
ignition is switched on. this warning lamp comes on in the
offers increased safety in normal
The electronic stability programme (ESC) must instrument panel, accompanied by
driving conditions, provided that the
not have any faults. the display of a message and an
recommendations on towing a trailer are
Between 36 and 100 mph (60 and 160 km/h), audible signal.
observed. It must not encourage the driver
5
if the system detects swaying movements in
If you continue to tow a trailer, reduce your to take additional risks, such as towing
the trailer, it acts on the brakes to stabilise the
speed and drive carefully! a trailer in adverse operating conditions
trailer and, if necessary, reduces engine power
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (overloading, failure to observe the trailer
to slow down the vehicle.
workshop to have the system checked. nose weight, worn or under-inflated tyres,
faulty braking system, etc.) or drive at too
The correction is signalled by the high a speed.
flashing of the indicator lamp in the In certain cases, the swaying of the trailer
instrument panel and activation of the may not be detected by the ESC system,
brake lights. particularly with a light trailer.
When driving on slippery or poor surfaces,
For information on the weights and towed the system may not be able to prevent
loads, refer to the "Technical data" section or sudden swaying of the trailer.
the registration certificate for your vehicle.
For advice on driving safely when Towing a
trailer, refer to the corresponding section.
13
Driving
Distance alert and Active Safety Brake

Activation and operating conditions
The vehicle has a camera located at the top of
This system is designed to assist the
the windscreen, and depending on the version,
driver and improve road safety.
a radar located in the front bumpers.
It is the driver's responsibility to
continuously monitor the state of the
traffic, observing the driving regulations.
This system does not replace the need for
This system includes three functions:
- Distance alert (alert if there is a risk of
collision),
- Intelligent emergency braking assistance,
- Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency
braking).
Distance alert: it warns the driver if their
vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in
front or a pedestrian present in their traffic lane.
Intelligent emergency braking assistance: The system is activated from about 4 mph
it supplements the braking action taken by the (7km/h) and is deactivated below about 3 mph
driver if this is inadequate. (5 km/h).
Active Safety Brake: it intervenes following It takes account of:
the alert if the driver does not react quickly - registered vehicles running in the same
enough and does not operate the vehicle's direction or stationary,
brakes. - pedestrians in the traffic lane (bicycles,
If the driver fails to act, it contributes motorcycles, animals and objects on the
towards avoiding a collision or limiting road are not necessarily detected).
its severity by reducing the speed of your
vehicle.
14
Driving
Operating limits Distance alert

In the following cases, deactivating the Depending on the degree of risk of collision
Because of limits in the operation of the detected by the system and the alert threshold
system via the vehicle's configuration menu is
system, it is possible that warnings are chosen by the driver, different levels of
recommended:
not given, are given too late or seem alert can be triggered and displayed in the
- when towing a trailer,
unjustified. instrument panel.
- when carrying long objects on roof bars or Level 1: visual alert only, signalling
Consequently, the driver must always
a roof rack, that the vehicle in front is very close.
remain attentive and able to react at any
- before using an automatic car wash, with The message "Vehicle close" is
time to avoid an accident.
the engine running, displayed.
- before placing the vehicle on a rolling road
in a workshop,
- when the vehicle is being towed, with the This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle
engine running, time between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front.
6
- when a "space-saver" type spare wheel is
fitted (depending on version), Level 2: visual and audible alert,
- following impact damage to the windscreen warning you that a collision is
close to the detection camera, imminent.
- if the front bumper has been damaged, The message "Brake!" is displayed.
- if the brake lamps are not working.
This level of alert is based on the time before
collision. It takes into account the vehicle
dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the
one in front, the environmental conditions, the
operating conditions of the vehicle (on a curve,
pedals pressed, etc.) to trigger the alert at the
relevant moment.
15
Driving
Intelligent emergency Active Safety Brake

braking assistance
If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid
Where the speed of your vehicle is too a collision, this system will supplement the
high approaching another vehicle, the first braking, within the limits of the laws of physics.
level of alert may not be displayed: the This assistance will only be provided if you
level 2 alert may be displayed directly. press the brake pedal.
Important: alert level 1 is never displayed
when the "Close" trigger threshold has
been selected.
Modifying the alert trigger

threshold
This threshold determines how you wish
to be alerted of the presence of a moving
or stationary vehicle in front of you, or a
pedestrian present in your traffic lane.
The current threshold can be modified via the
vehicle configuration menu.
You can select one of three thresholds:
- "Distant", This function, also called automatic emergency
- "Normal", braking, aims to reduce the speed of impact or
- "Close". avoid a frontal collision with your vehicle where
The last threshold selected is kept in memory the driver fails to react.
when the ignition is switched off. Using a radar and a camera, depending on
the version, this function acts on the vehicle's
braking system.
16
Driving
If the camera and/or radar have The point at which braking is triggered Specific conditions for operation
confirmed the presence of a vehicle may be adjusted according to the reaction
or a pedestrian, this warning lamp from the driver, such as movement of the The vehicle's speed must be between 3 mph
flashes once the function is acting on steering wheel or pressing the accelerator and 53 mph (5km/h and 85 km/h) (versions with
the vehicle's brakes. pedal. camera alone) or 87 mph (140 km/h) (versions
Important: if operation of the with camera and radar) when a moving vehicle
automatic emergency braking is is detected.
triggered, you must take back control The vehicle's speed must not exceed 50 mph
of your vehicle and brake with the Operation of the function may be felt by (80km/h) when a stopped vehicle is detected.
pedal to supplement or finish the slight vibration in the brake pedal. The vehicle's speed must not exceed 37 mph
automatic braking action. If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected.
the automatic braking is maintained for 1 The ESC system must not be defective.
6
to 2 seconds. The CDS must not be deactivated.
The driver can take back control of the vehicle All passengers seatbelts must be fastened.
at any time by sharply turning the steering Driving at steady speed on roads with few
wheel and/or pressing the accelerator pedal. bends is required.
With a manual gear box, in the event of

automatic emergency braking until the
vehicle comes to a complete stop, the After an impact, the function automatically
engine may stall. stops operating. Consult a PEUGEOT
With an automatic gear box, in the event dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
of automatic emergency braking until system checked.
the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
maintain the brake pedal down to stop the
vehicle from starting off again.
17
Driving
Deactivation / Activation Operating fault

By default, the system is automatically In the event of a fault with the system,
Clean the windscreen regularly,
activated at every engine start-up. you are alerted by the tell-tale lighting
particularly the area in front of the camera.
The system can be deactivated or activated via up, accompanied by the display of a
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
the vehicle settings menu. message and an audible signal.
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
Check that the sensors (camera and radar) are conceal the detection camera.
Deactivation of the system is not covered by dirt, mud, frost, snow, etc. Clean the front bumper, removing mud,
signalled by the illumination of this If the fault persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer snow, etc.
indicator lamp, accompanied by the or a qualified workshop to have the system
display of a message. checked.
The camera my be disrupted or not work If the front bumper is to be repainted or

in the following situations: retouched, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
- poor visibility (inadequate street or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, paint could interfere with the operation of
dense fog, etc.), the radar.
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on
a damp road, leaving a tunnel,
alternating shade and light, etc.),
- obstruction of the camera or radar
(mud, frost, snow, etc.).
In these situations, detection performance
may be reduced.
18
Technical data
Characteristics of engines and towed loads

Engines Weights and towed loads
The engine characteristics are detailed on the The weights and towed loads relating to your
vehicle's registration certificate, and in the vehicle are stated in the registration certificate, High ambient temperatures may result
sales documentation. and in the sales documentation. in a reduction in the performance of
the vehicle to protect the engine. If the
These values are also shown on the ambient temperature is above 37C, limit
The maximum power corresponds to
manufacturer's nameplate or label. the towed load.
the value type-approved on a test bed,
according to the conditions defined in For more information, contact a PEUGEOT
European legislation (Directive 1999/99/ dealer or a qualified workshop.
EC).
The GTW and towed load values indicated are Towing with a towing vehicle which is only
For more information, contact a PEUGEOT valid up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres. slightly laden may negatively affect its
dealer or a qualified workshop. The towed load value must be reduced by 10% handling.
for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude. Towing a trailer increases the braking
The recommended nose weight corresponds distance.
to the weight permitted on the towbar With a towing vehicle, never exceed the
(dismantlable with or without a tool). speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the
GTW: Gross train weight local legislation in force).
When the ambient temperature is high,

leaving the engine running for 1 to
2minutes after stopping the vehicle to
allow it to cool is recommended.
9
19
Technical data
Petrol engines and towed loads

1.2 litre PureTech 1.2 litre PureTech 1.6 litre THP 165
Engines 1.6 litre THP 150 1.6 litre THP 160
130 S&S 130 S&S S&S
BVM6 EAT6 EAT6 EAT6 EAT6

Gearboxes
(Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed)
EB2DTS MCM EB2DTS AT6III EP6FDTMD EP6FDT AT6III

Codes EP6FDTM AT6III
STT STT AT6III STT
HNYH/C1B
Model codes HNYH/C1F HNYW/C1B 5GZW/C1B
5GYW/C1A 5GXV/C1A
MR... M4... - HNYW/C1F 5GZW/C1F
HNYH/C1K
Cylinder capacity (cm) 1,199 1,199 1,598 1,598 1,598
Max power: EU standard (kW) 96 96 110 120 121.4
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)

1,400 - 1,300 1,200 600 600 1,550
Unbraked trailer (kg) 660 670 600 600 685
Recommended nose weight (kg) 80 80 70 70 80
20
Technical data
Diesel engines and towed loads

1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi
Engines
100 S&S 115 S&S 115 S&S 120 S&S 120 S&S
BVM BVM6 EAT6 BVM6 EAT6

Gearboxes
(Manual 5-speed) (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed)
DV6FC ML6C DV6FC AT6III DV6FC ML6C DV6FC AT6III

Codes DV6FD BE4 STT
STT STT STT STT
BHZH/C2B
Model codes BHYB/C2B BHXH/C2B BHXW/C2B BHZH/C2F BHZW/C2B
MC... BHYB/C2F BHXH/C2F BHXW/C2F - BHZW/C2F
BHZH/C2K
Cylinder capacity (cm) 1,560 1,560 1,560 1,560 1,560
Max power: EU standard (kW) 73 85 85 88 88
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

1,300 1,500 1,300 1,500 - 1,400 1,300
Unbraked trailer (kg) 680 685 695 685 695
Recommended nose weight (kg) 80 80 80 80 80
9
21
Technical data
Diesel engines and towed loads

2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 2.0 litre BlueHDi 180
Engines 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150
S&S S&S
BVM6 EAT6 BVM6 EAT6

Gearboxes
(Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed)
Codes DW10FD ML6C DW10FD AM6III DW10FD ML6C STT DW10FC AM6III STT
AHRH/C2B
AHRH/C2F
Model codes AHSH/C2B AHWW/C2B
AHXG/C2A AHXV/C2A
MR... M9... AHSH/C2F AHWW/C2F
AHXH/C2B
AHXH/C2F
Cylinder capacity (cm) 1 997 1 997 1 997 1 997
Max power: EU standard (kW) 110 110 110 133
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

600 600 2,000 1,700
Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 745 750
Recommended nose weight (kg) 70 70 80 80
22
Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.
9
23
Technical data
Identification markings
Different visible markings for the identification of your vehicle. - the spare tyre pressure.
It also indicates the paint colour code.
The vehicle may be originally equipped

with tyres with higher load and speed
indices than those indicated on the label,
without affecting inflation pressure.
Checking tyre pressures

The tyre pressures should be checked when
A. Vehicle identification number (VIN), - the vehicle identification number (VIN), cold at least monthly.
under the bonnet. - the maximum authorised vehicle weight The pressures given on the label are valid for
The number is engraved on the body structure. (the Gross Vehicle Weight or GVW), cold tyres. If you have driven for more than
- the maximum authorised train weight 10minutes or more than 6 miles (10 kilometres)
B. Vehicle identification number (VIN), on at more than 30 mph (50 km/h), the tyres will be
(GTW),
the dashboard. warm. In this case 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be
- the maximum weight on the front axle,
The number is recorded on a label, visible added to the pressures given on the label.
- the maximum weight on the rear axle.
through the windscreen.
D. Tyres / paint code label.
C. Manufacturer's label. Never reduce the pressure of a warm
This label is affixed near to the driver's door.
This self-destructing label is affixed near to the tyre.
It bears the following information about the tyres:
right-hand door.
- the tyre pressures, unladen and laden,
It bears the following information: Low tyre pressures increase fuel
- the tyre specification, made up of the
- the name of the manufacturer, consumption.
dimensions and type as well as the load
- the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval
and speed indices,
number,
24
PEUGEOT Cars certifies, by application of the Even partial copies and translations of this
provisions of European regulation (Directive document are forbidden without the written
2000/53) relating to end-of-life vehicles, that it consent of PEUGEOT cars.
has satisfied the targets set by the EU and that
recycled materials are used in manufacturing the
products it markets.
Printed in the EU.

Anglais (UK)
07-16
Anglais (UK)
www.peugeot.com *16P84.A040* 16P84.A040

Peugeot 3008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Peugeot 3008

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Peugeot 3008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Handbook

Find your handbook on the PEUGEOT website, under "MyPEUGEOT".

The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation.

This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on

safety warning additional information contributes to the protection of the environment

Overview . Ease of use and comfort

Driving Practical information Technical data

Exterior Electronic key

Remote control key 54, 63-67

Very cold climate screens 291

Main lighting 141, 143-144 Electronic stability programme

Defrosting the rear screen 118 Roof bars 293

Changing rear bulbs 328-330

Child lock 193-194

Visiopark 1 & 2 265-271

Front seats 90-97

Rear seats 130-132

Monochrome screen C 45-47

Changing a fuse 331

Instruments and controls

Lighting controls 141-144, 146-150

Wiper controls 152-155

Adjusting the steering wheel 99

Side switch panel

Petrol engines 338-339

Checking levels 297-300 Changing a fuse 331

Limit the causes of excess consumption Observe the recommendations on

Head-up digital screen

Digital screen Control buttons

* Versions with monochrome screen.

Displays Personalisation of the

** Versions with touch screen.

- "TRIP COMPUTER"*: minimal display with

* Versions with monochrome screen.

Indicator and warning lamps

When the ignition is switched on Associated warnings

Operation indicator lamps

Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the

Dipped beam fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

The electric parking brake is applied.

Release the parking brake to switch off the warning

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

fixed. The system has been activated, but

Deactivation indicator lamps

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

One or more minor faults for which

Identify the cause of the fault using the message

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

fixed, associated with Speed above 6 mph (10 km/h), a door

* Depending on the country of sale.

Warning / indicator lamp

The driver and/or the front/rear

Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

A lane marking has been crossed on